Reyrolle Protection Devices 7SR242 Duobias Transformer Protection Relay Answers for energy. 2 Contents Technical Manual Chapters 1. Description of Operation 2. Settings, Configuration & Instruments 3. Performance Specification 4. Data Communications 5. Installation 6. Commissioning and Maintenance 7. Applications Guide 3 4 Software Revision History 2017/08 2662H85001 R8c-7d Phase currents added to 61850. 5A instruments corrected. 2015/11 2662H85001 R8b-7c EN100+ compatibility. Additional `46IT' and `51' element time multiplier steps incorporated. 2013/01 2662H85001 R7c-7b Revised file handling during shutdown 2012/08 2662H85001 R7b-7a Addition of optional IEC 61850 communication protocol and Ethernet. (Requires CC) Compatible with H/W CC 2010/02 hardware 2662H80001 R4c-3 Revisions to: VT ratio settings, 87BD 1st bias slope limit setting increments, CB fail function, LED CONFIG menu, DATA STORAGE menu. Added: Open circuit detection (46BC), CONTROL MODE menu, Close circuit supervision (74CCS), Measured earth fault undercurrent (37G), Pulsed output contacts. 2008/07 2662H80001R3d-2c. Demand metering. Optional DNP3.0 data comms. 2008/05 2662H80001R3-2b First Release. Hardware Revision History 2015/11 DD EN100+ Ethernet comms card replaces EN100. 2012/08 CC Hardware revisions to allow integration of IEC 61850 functionality. 2008/05 BB First Release 5 www. siemens.com/energy 6 7SR242 Duobias Contents Contents Technical Manual Chapters 1. Description of Operation 2. Settings, Configuration & Instruments 3. Performance Specification 4. Data Communications 5. Installation 6. Commissioning and Maintenance 7. Applications Guide (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 7SR242 Duobias Contents (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 7SR242 Duobias Contents Software Revision History 2017/08 2662H85001 R8C-7d Phase currents added to 61850. 5A instruments corrected. 2015/11 2662H85001 R8b-7c Additional `46IT' and `51' element time multiplier steps incorporated. 2013/01 2662H85001 R7c-7b Revised file handling during shutdown 2012/08 2662H85001 R7b-7a Addition of optional IEC 61850 communication protocol and Ethernet. (Requires CC) Compatible with H/W CC 2010/02 hardware 2662H80001 R4c-3 Revisions to: VT ratio settings, 87BD 1st bias slope limit setting increments, CB fail function, LED CONFIG menu, DATA STORAGE menu. Added: Open circuit detection (46BC), CONTROL MODE menu, Close circuit supervision (74CCS), Measured earth fault undercurrent (37G), Pulsed output contacts. 2008/07 2662H80001R3d-2c. Demand metering. Optional DNP3.0 data comms. 2008/05 2662H80001R3-2b First Release. Hardware Revision History 2015/11 DD EN100+ Ethernet comms card replaces EN100. 2012/08 CC Hardware revisions to allow integration of IEC 61850 functionality. 2008/05 BB First Release (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 7SR242 Duobias Contents (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation 7SR242 Duobias Multi-Function 2-Winding Transformer Protection Relay Description of Operation Document Release History This document is issue 2017/08. The list of revisions up to and including this issue is: 2017/08 Software revision 2662H85001 R8c-7d 2015/11 7SR2424 added. RS485 comms terminal labelling revised Figure 1-4). Text revisions to LED indications (2.5), inrush detector (5.3), waveform records (6.4.3) and fault data records (6.4.4). 2014/04 Section 6.4.3 - Waveform Records revised. 2013/01 Software revision 2662H85001 R7c-7b 2012/08 Addition of optional IEC 61850 communication protocol. 2010/06 Additional Comms modules option of (RS485 + IRIG-B) and (RS232 + IRIG-B) and typographical revisions 2010/02 Document reformat due to rebrand 2010/02 Software revision 2662H80001 R4c-3 2008/07 Software revision 2662H80001R3d-2c. 2008/05 First issue The copyright and other intellectual property rights in this document, and in any model or article produced from it (and including any registered or unregistered design rights) are the property of Siemens Protection Devices Limited. No part of this document shall be reproduced or modified or stored in another form, in any data retrieval system, without the permission of Siemens Protection Devices Limited, nor shall any model or article be reproduced from this document unless Siemens Protection Devices Limited consent. While the information and guidance given in this document is believed to be correct, no liability shall be accepted for any loss or damage caused by any error or omission, whether such error or omission is the result of negligence or any other cause. Any and all such liability is disclaimed. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 2 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation Contents Section 1: Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 7 Current Transformer Circuits ............................................................................................................ 7 External Resistors ............................................................................................................................. 7 Fibre Optic Communication .............................................................................................................. 7 Front Cover ....................................................................................................................................... 7 Section 2: Hardware Description ........................................................................................................ 15 2.1 General ................................................................................................................................... 15 2.2 Case ........................................................................................................................................ 15 2.3 Front Cover ............................................................................................................................. 16 2.4 Power Supply Unit (PSU)........................................................................................................ 16 2.5 Operator Interface/ Fascia ...................................................................................................... 16 2.6 Current Inputs ......................................................................................................................... 19 2.7 Voltage Input ........................................................................................................................... 19 2.8 Binary inputs ........................................................................................................................... 19 2.9 Binary outputs (Output Relays) ............................................................................................... 20 2.10 Virtual Input/Outputs ............................................................................................................... 21 2.11 Self Monitoring ........................................................................................................................ 22 2.11.1 Protection Healthy/Defective ...................................................................................... 22 Section 3: Protection Functions ......................................................................................................... 23 3.1 Current Protection: Differential Protection .............................................................................. 23 3.1.1 ICT.............................................................................................................................. 23 3.1.2 Overall Biased Differential (87BD) ............................................................................. 24 3.1.3 87HS .......................................................................................................................... 26 3.2 Current Protection: Phase Overcurrent (51, 50) ..................................................................... 28 3.2.1 Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection (50) ................................................................ 28 3.2.2 Time Delayed Overcurrent Protection (51) ................................................................ 29 3.3 Current Protection: Derived Earth Fault (50N, 51N) ............................................................... 30 3.3.1 Instantaneous Derived Earth Fault Protection (50N) ................................................. 30 3.3.2 Time Delayed Derived Earth Fault Protection (51N) ................................................. 31 3.4 Current Protection: Measured Earth Fault (50G, 51G) ........................................................... 32 3.4.1 Instantaneous Measured Earth Fault Protection (50G) ............................................. 32 3.4.2 Time Delayed Measured Earth Fault Protection (51G) .............................................. 33 3.5 Current Protection: High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault (64H) ........................................ 34 3.6 Open Circuit (46BC) ................................................................................................................ 35 3.7 Current Protection: Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent (46NPS) ................................... 36 3.8 Current Protection: Under-Current (37, 37G) ......................................................................... 37 3.9 Current Protection: Thermal Overload (49) ............................................................................ 38 3.10 Voltage Protection: Over Fluxing (24) ..................................................................................... 40 3.11 Voltage Protection: Under/Over Voltage (27/59) .................................................................... 42 3.12 Voltage Protection: Neutral Overvoltage (59N) ...................................................................... 43 3.13 Voltage Protection: Under/Over Frequency (81) .................................................................... 45 Section 4: Control & Logic Functions ................................................................................................ 46 4.1 Quick Logic ............................................................................................................................. 46 Section 5: Supervision Functions ...................................................................................................... 48 5.1 Circuit Breaker Failure (50BF) ................................................................................................ 48 5.2 Trip/Close Circuit Supervision (74TCS/74CCS) ..................................................................... 50 5.3 Inrush Detector (81HBL2) ....................................................................................................... 51 (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 3 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation 5.4 Over Fluxing Detector (81HBL5)............................................................................................. 52 Section 6: Other Features .................................................................................................................... 54 6.1 Data Communications ............................................................................................................. 54 6.2 IEC 61850 Communications ................................................................................................... 54 6.3 Maintenance............................................................................................................................ 55 6.3.1 Output Matrix Test...................................................................................................... 55 6.3.2 CB Counters ............................................................................................................... 55 2 6.3.3 I t CB Wear ................................................................................................................ 55 6.4 Data Storage ........................................................................................................................... 56 6.4.1 General....................................................................................................................... 56 6.4.2 Event Records ............................................................................................................ 56 6.4.3 Waveform Records. ................................................................................................... 56 6.4.4 Fault Data Records .................................................................................................... 57 6.4.5 Demand ...................................................................................................................... 57 6.4.6 Demand/Data Log ...................................................................................................... 57 6.5 Metering .................................................................................................................................. 58 6.6 Operating Mode ...................................................................................................................... 58 6.7 Control Mode........................................................................................................................... 58 6.8 Real Time Clock ...................................................................................................................... 59 6.8.1 Time Synchronisation - Data Comms ....................................................................... 59 6.8.2 Time Synchronisation - Binary Input ......................................................................... 59 6.8.3 Time Synchronisation - IRIG-B (Optional) ................................................................. 59 6.9 Settings Groups ...................................................................................................................... 59 6.10 Password Feature ................................................................................................................... 60 (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 4 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation List of Figures Figure 1-1 Function Diagram: 7SR242n-2aAnn-0AA0 Relay ............................................................. 10 Figure 1-2 Function Diagram: 7SR242n-2aAnn-0BA0 Relay ............................................................. 11 Figure 1-3 Function Diagram: 7SR242n-2aAnn-0CA0 Relay ............................................................. 12 Figure 1-4 Connection Diagram: 7SR242 Relay ................................................................................. 13 Figure 2-1 7SR24 with 3 + 16 LEDs in E8 Case ................................................................................ 16 Figure 2-2 Binary Input Logic ............................................................................................................. 19 Figure 2-3 Binary Output Logic .......................................................................................................... 21 Figure 2.11-1 Start-up Counter Meter .................................................................................................... 22 Figure 3-1 Biased Differential Characteristic ....................................................................................... 24 Figure 3-2 Functional Diagram for Biased Current Differential Protection .......................................... 25 Figure 3-3 Differential Highset Characteristic ..................................................................................... 26 Figure 3-4 Logic Diagram: High Set Current Differential Protection ................................................... 27 Figure 3-5 Logic Diagram: Instantaneous Over-current Element ....................................................... 28 Figure 3-6 Logic Diagram: Time Delayed Overcurrent Element ......................................................... 29 Figure 3-7 Logic Diagram: Instantaneous Derived Earth Fault Element............................................. 30 Figure 3-8 Logic Diagram: Derived Time Delayed Earth Fault Protection .......................................... 31 Figure 3-9 Logic Diagram: Measured Instantaneous Earth-fault Element .......................................... 32 Figure 3-10 Logic Diagram: Time Delayed Measured Earth Fault Element (51G) ............................... 33 Figure 3-11 Logic Diagram: High Impedance REF (64H) ..................................................................... 34 Figure 3-12 Logic Diagram: Open Circuit Function (46BC) .................................................................. 35 Figure 3-13 Logic Diagram: Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent (46NPS) .................................... 36 Figure 3-14 Logic Diagram: Undercurrent Detector (37, 37G) .............................................................. 37 Figure 3-15 Logic Diagram: Thermal Overload Protection (49) ............................................................ 39 Figure 3-16 Inverse Over-fluxing Characteristic (24IT) ......................................................................... 40 Figure 3-17 Logic Diagram: Overfluxing Elements (24) ........................................................................ 41 Figure 3-18 Logic Diagram: Under/Over Voltage Elements (27/59) ..................................................... 42 Figure 3-19 Logic Diagram: Neutral Overvoltage Element ................................................................... 44 Figure 3-20 Logic Diagram: Under/Over Frequency Detector (81) ....................................................... 45 Figure 4-1 Sequence Diagram showing PU/DO Timers in Quick Logic (Counter Reset Mode Off) ........................................................................................................................... 47 Figure 5-1 Logic Diagram: Circuit Breaker Fail Protection (50BF) ...................................................... 49 Figure 5-2 Logic Diagram: Trip Circuit Supervision Feature (74TCS) ................................................ 50 Figure 5-3 Logic Diagram: Close Circuit Supervision Feature (74CCS) ............................................. 50 Figure 5-4 Logic Diagram: Inrush Detector Feature (81HBL2) ........................................................... 51 Figure 5-5 Logic Diagram: Overfluxing Detector Feature (81HBL5) ................................................... 52 List of Tables Table 1-1: 7SR242 Ordering Options ....................................................................................................... 8 Table 2-1 Summary of 7SR24 Relay Configurations ......................................................................... 15 Table 6-1 Operating Mode ................................................................................................................. 58 (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 5 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation Symbols and Nomenclature The following notational and formatting conventions are used within the remainder of this document: * * * * Setting Menu Location Setting: Setting value: Alternatives: MAIN MENU>SUB-MENU Elem name -Setting value [1st] [2nd] [3rd] Elem Char Dir Binary input signal visible to user Elem Inhibit Elem Starter Binary Output visible to user List of settings associated with a specific function Appropriate list is TRUE when setting selected. Non-Dir Forward Reverse Common setting for multiple functions Digital signal not visible to user, to/from another element Digital signal not visible to user, internal to this element Analogue signal with signal description PhaseAFwd L1 Dir Blk IL1 Common control input (c) for multiple functions. All functions are enabled when control input is TRUE. Function. Elem Reset Delay c Pickup c Operate Pickup Individual functions are enabled when associated control input (c) is TRUE. c And Gate (2 inputs shown) & 1 Or Gate (3 inputs shown) EVENT: IEC, Modbus, DNP etc. Where applicable Relay instrument Exclusive Or (XOR) Gate (3 inputs shown) Latch (Set/Reset) Operate EVENT INST. =1 S R Q Positive Edge Trigger (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 6 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation Section 1: Introduction This manual is applicable to the following relays: * 7SR242 Multi-Function 2-Winding Transformer Protection Relay The 7SR242 relay integrates the protection and control elements required to provide a complete transformer protection. The `Ordering Options' Tables summarise the features available in each model. General Safety Precautions ! Current Transformer Circuits The secondary circuit of a live CT must not be open circuited. Non-observance of this precaution can result in injury to personnel or damage to equipment. ! External Resistors Where external resistors are fitted to relays, these may present a danger of electric shock or burns, if touched. ! Fibre Optic Communication Where fibre optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed directly. Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or signal level of the device. ! Front Cover The front cover provides additional securing of the relay element within the case. The relay cover should be in place during normal operating conditions. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 7 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation Table 1-1: 7SR242 Ordering Options DUOBIAS-M Multifunctional 2 winding transformer differential protection 7 S R 2 4 2 | | | | | | | | Case I/O and Fascia E8 case, 6 CT, 2 EF/REF CT, 1 VT, 9 Binary Inputs / 6 Binary Outputs, 2 16 LEDs | E10 case, 6 CT, 2 EF/REF CT, 1 VT, 19 Binary Inputs / 14 Binary Outputs, 3 24 LEDs | E12 case, 6 CT, 2 EF/REF CT, 1 VT, 39 Binary Inputs / 14 Binary Outputs, 4 32 LEDs Measuring Input 1/5 A, 40 - 160V, 50/60Hz 2 Relay Type Differential (2 winding) 2 Auxiliary voltage 30 to 220V DC, binary input threshold 19V DC 30 to 220V DC, binary input threshold 88V DC Communication Interface Standard version - included in all models, USB front port, RS485 rear port Standard version - plus additional rear F/O ST connectors (x2) and IRIG-B Standard version - plus additional rear RS485 (x1) and IRIG-B Standard version - plus additional rear RS232 (x1) and IRIG-B Standard version - plus additional rear Electrical Ethernet RJ45 (x2) Standard version - plus additional rear Optical Ethernet Duplex (x2) Protocol IEC 60870-5-103 and Modbus RTU (user selectable setting) IEC 60870-5-103, Modbus RTU and DNP 3.0 (user selectable) IEC 60870-5-103, Modbus RTU and DNP 3.0 (user selectable) and IEC61850 Protection Function Packages Option A: Standard version - Included in all models - 81HBL2 Inrush Detector - 81HBL5 Overfluxing detector - 87BD Biased current differential - 87HS Current differential highest Programmable logic For each winding/circuit breaker - 50BF Circuit breaker fail - 64H High impedance REF - 74TCS/CCS Trip/close circuit supervision Option B: - 37/37G - 46BC - 46NPS - 49 - 50 - 50G/50N - 51 - 51G/51N Standard version - plus Undercurrent Open circuit Negative phase sequence overcurrent Thermal overload Instantaneous phase fault overcurrent Instantaneous earth fault Time delayed phase fault overcurrent Time delayed earth fault (continued on following page ) (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited A | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | Protection Product Transformer | | | | 4 | | | - 2 | | | | | A B | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1 2 3 4 7 8 | | | | | | | | 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 7 7 | | 1 2 7 - 0 A 0 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | A | | | | | | | | | | B | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | Chapter 1 Page 8 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation DUOBIAS-M (continued from previous page) 7 S R 2 4 2 Option C: - 24 - 27/59 - 59N - 81 - 37/37G - 46BC - 46NPS - 49 - 50 - 50G/50N - 51 - 51G/51N Standard version - plus Overfluxing Under/overvoltage Neutral voltage displacement Under/overfrequency Undercurrent Open circuit Negative phase sequence overcurrent Thermal overload Instantaneous phase fault overcurrent Instantaneous earth fault Time delayed phase fault overcurrent Time delayed earth fault Additional Functionality No Additional Functionality (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited - 2 A - 0 A 0 C | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | A Chapter 1 Page 9 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation 7SR242n-2aAn1-0AA0 50 BF-1 81 HBL 2 81 HBL 5 W1-Ib 50 BF-1 81 HBL 2 81 HBL 5 W1-Ib 50 BF-1 81 HBL 2 81 HBL 5 50 BF-1 I4 64H W1-Ia Ig-1 ICT 87BD 87HS 50 BF-2 I4 Ig-2 ICT 64H 74 CCS (x6) 74 TCS (x6) W2-Ic W2-Ib W2-Ia Figure 1-1 50 BF-2 81 HBL 2 81 HBL 5 50 BF-2 81 HBL 2 81 HBL 5 50 BF-2 81 HBL 2 81 HBL 5 Function Diagram: 7SR242n-2aAnn-0AA0 Relay (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 10 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation 7SR242n-2aAn1-0BA0 W1-Ia 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 W1-Ib 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 W1-Ic 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 50N (x2) 51N (x2) 46 BC (x2) 46 NPS (x4) 50G (x2) 51G (x4) 64H 37G (x2) Ig-1 50 BF-1 I4 ICT Each function element can be assigned to W1 or W2 CT inputs. NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive 87HS 37G Ig-2 W2-Ic W2-Ib W2-Ia Figure 1-2 50 BF-2 I4 50G 51G 87BD ICT 64H 50N 51N 46 BC 46 NPS 74 CCS (x6) 74 TCS (x6) 37 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL 2 81 HBL5 37 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL 2 81 HBL5 Function Diagram: 7SR242n-2aAnn-0BA0 Relay (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 11 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation 7SR242n-2aAn1-0CA0 W1-Ia 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 W1-Ib 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 W1-Ic 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 50N (x2) 51N (x2) 46 BC (x2) 46 NPS (x4) 50G (x2) 51G (x4) 64H 37G (x2) Ig-1 50 BF-1 I4 ICT Each function element can be assigned to W1 or W2 CT inputs. NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive 87HS 37G Ig-2 W2-Ic W2-Ib W2-Ia V Figure 1-3 50 BF-2 I4 50G 51G 87BD ICT 64H 50N 51N 46 BC 46 NPS 74 CCS (x6) 74 TCS (x6) 37 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL 2 81 HBL5 37 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL 2 81 HBL5 24 (x3) 27 59 (x4) 59N (x2) 81 (x6) Function Diagram: 7SR242n-2aAnn-0CA0 Relay (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 12 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation Rear View: Arrangement of terminals and modules 1 22 24 28 1 7SR242 +ve BO 1 -ve 5 +ve Screen 18 B 20 Term. 24 26 28 17 19 21 23 25 27 BO 5 RS485 16 BO 4 BI 3 -ve A 22 BO 3 BI 2 -ve 14 20 -ve 1A BI 4 W2-Ia -ve C B A Optional I/O Optional I/O PSU CT CT/VT 1A BI 6 W2-Ib +ve -ve 27 28 -ve 15 4 5A 1A BI 8 W2-Ic BI 9 5A B 27 28 27 28 27 28 17 6 19 8 21 10 5A -ve -ve 12 27 14 1 16 2 18 3 20 5 7 22 24 9 26 10 28 W1-Ia Ig-2 5A 4 18 6 19 8 20 10 12 W1-Ib 28 14 16 W1-Ic 18 22 Ig-1 A 24 26 BI = Binary Input BO = Binary Output -ve +ve BI 22 BI 32 BI 23 BI 33 BI 24 BI 34 BI 25 BI 35 +ve +ve +ve +ve -ve +ve +ve -ve +ve BI 26 BI 36 BI 27 BI 37 BI 28 BI 38 +ve +ve +ve +ve +ve -ve +ve BI 29 E BI 39 +ve -ve 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 -ve 23 25 27 Shows contacts internal to relay case assembly. Contacts close when the relay chassis is withdrawn from case Figure 1-4 (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 28 1 BI 10 BO 7 BI 11 BO 8 BI 12 BO 9 BI 13 BO 10 +ve -ve 7 9 +ve 11 13 +ve BI 14 15 BO 11 17 BO 12 19 +ve -ve 3 5 +ve 21 BI 15 +ve BI 16 1A NOTES BI 31 +ve 27 20 16 BI 21 1 11 17 V 5A -ve +ve +ve 1A 5A BI 30 +ve 1A 5A +ve BI 20 12 1A 14 15 28 +ve 8 +ve -ve 2 12 13 27 6 BI 7 +ve 10 11 Data Comms (Optional) 4 +ve -ve 5A BI 5 8 9 2 26 C +ve 6 7 1 23 BO 6 4 5 2 D 13 25 +ve 2 3 1 E 2 1 2 11 +ve 12 18 1 9 BI 1 -ve 8 10 2 7 +ve 4 6 1 3 GND. BO 2 2 2 BO 13 23 BO 14 25 27 +ve BI 17 +ve BI 18 +ve -ve BI 19 D Connection Diagram: 7SR242 Relay Chapter 1 Page 13 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 14 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation Section 2: Hardware Description 2.1 General The structure of the relay is based upon the Multi-function hardware platform. The relays are supplied in either size E8, E10 or E12 cases (where 1 x E = width of approx. 26mm). The hardware design provides commonality between products and components across the 7SR2 range of relays. Table 2-1 Summary of 7SR24 Relay Configurations Relay Current Inputs Voltage Inputs Binary Inputs Output Relays LEDs Case 7SR2422 8 1 9 6 16 E8 7SR2423 8 1 19 14 24 E10 7SR2424 8 1 39 14 32 E12 Relays are assembled from the following modules: 1) Front Fascia with three fixed function LEDs and ordering options of configurable LEDs. 2) Processor module 3) Analogue Input module `A': 3 x Current + 6 x Binary Inputs 4) Analogue Input module `B': 5 x Current + 1 x Voltage. 5) Power Supply and basic Binary Input (BI) and Binary Output (BO). 6) Optional Binary Input/Output Module 7) Optional Binary Input Module 8) Optional data comms module 2.2 Case The relays are housed in cases designed to fit directly into standard panel racks. The complete relay assembly is withdrawable from the front of the case. Contacts in the case ensure that the CT circuits remain short-circuited when the relay is removed. Note that when the optional Ethernet comms module is fitted to the relay the comms cables and the EN100 module rear securing screw must be removed before the relay assembly is withdrawn. The rear terminal blocks comprise M4 screw terminals for wire connections. Each terminal can accept two 90 degree ring tongue crimps. Located at the top rear of the case is a screw clamp earthing point, this must be connected to the main panel earth. See Chapter 5 (Installation Guide) for full details of panel cut-out and internal clearance requirements. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 15 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation 2.3 Front Cover With the transparent front cover in place the user only has access to the and TEST/RESET buttons, allowing all areas of the menu system to be viewed, but preventing setting changes and control actions. The only `action' that is permitted is to reset the Fault Data display, latched binary outputs and LEDs by using the TEST/RESET button. The front cover is used to secure the relay assembly in the case. 2.4 Power Supply Unit (PSU) The relay PSU can be directly connected to any substation dc system rated from 30V dc to 220V dc. In the event of the station battery voltage level falling below the relay minimum operate level the PSU will automatically switch itself off and latch out - this prevents any PSU overload conditions occurring. The PSU is reset by switching the auxiliary supply off then on. Typically the PSU is connected to the auxiliary supply via an external HRC fuse rated at 6A (BS88/IEC60259). Isolation links may also be installed in accordance with user requirements. 2.5 Operator Interface/ Fascia The operator interface is designed to provide a user-friendly method of controlling, entering settings and retrieving data from the relay. Figure 2-1 7SR24 with 3 + 16 LEDs in E8 Case NOTE: Pushbuttons on cover not shown The fascia is an integral part of the relay. Handles are located at each side of the element to allow it to be withdrawn from the relay case. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 16 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation Relay Information Above the LCD three labels are provided, these provide the following information: 1) Product name and order code. 2) Nominal current rating, rated frequency, voltage rating, auxiliary dc supply rating, binary input supply rating, configuration and serial number. 3) Blank label for user defined information. A `template' is available within the `Reydisp' program to allow users to create and print customised LED label inserts. The warning and information labels on the relay fascia provide the following information: Dielectric Test Voltage 2kV Impulse Test Above 5kV Caution: Refer to Equipment Documentation Caution: Risk of Electric Shock Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) A 4 line by 20-character liquid crystal display indicates settings, instrumentation, fault data and control commands. To conserve power the display backlighting is extinguished when no buttons are pressed for a user defined period. A setting within the "SYSTEM CONFIG" menu allows the timeout to be adjusted from 1 to 60 minutes and "Off" (backlight permanently on). After an hour the display is completely de-activated. Pressing any key will reactivate the display. The LCD contrast can be adjusted using a flat blade screwdriver to turn the screw located below the contrast symbol . Turning the screw clockwise increases the contrast, anti-clockwise reduces the contrast. `PROTECTION HEALTHY' LED This green LED is steadily illuminated to indicate that DC voltage has been applied to the relay power supply and that the relay is operating correctly. If the internal relay watchdog detects an internal fault then this LED will continuously flash. `PICKUP' LED This yellow LED is illuminated to indicate that a user selectable function(s) has picked up. The LED will self reset after the initiating condition has been removed. Functions are assigned to the PICKUP LED in the OUTPUT CONFIG>PICKUP CONFIG menu. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 17 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation `TRIP' LED This red LED is steadily illuminated to indicate that a user selectable function has operated to trip the circuit breaker. Functions are assigned to the `Trip' LED using the OUTPUT CONFIG>Trip Contacts setting. Operation of the LED is latched and can be reset by either pressing the TEST/RESET button, energising a suitably programmed binary input, or, by sending an appropriate command over the data communications channel(s). Indication LEDs Relays have either 16, 24 or 32 user programmable LED indicators. Each LED can be programmed to be illuminated as either green, yellow or red. Where an LED is programmed to be lit both red and green it will illuminate yellow. . Each LED can be assigned two different colours dependent upon whether a Start/Pickup or Operate condition initiates operation. The LED illumination colour is assigned in the OUTPUT CONFIG>LED CONFIG menu for both Pickup and Operate initiation. Functions are assigned to the LEDs in the OUTPUT CONFIG>OUTPUT MATRIX menu. Each LED can be labelled by withdrawing the relay and inserting a label strip into the pocket behind the front fascia. A `template' is available to allow users to create and print customised legends. Each LED can be user programmed as hand or self-resetting. Hand reset LEDs can be reset by either pressing the TEST/RESET button, energising a suitably programmed binary input, or, by sending an appropriate command over the data communications channel(s). The status of hand reset LEDs is maintained by a back up storage capacitor in the event of an interruption to the d.c. supply voltage. The length of time for which the LED status will be maintained will depend on such things as temperature, length of time in service, etc. However the status will be maintained for a minimum of 1.8 days. LED status stored in fault data records are backed up in non-volatile memory and are permanently stored even in the event of loss of auxiliary d.c. supply voltage, see section 6.4.4 Standard Keys The relay is supplied as standard with five pushbuttons. The buttons are used to navigate the menu structure and control relay functions. They are labelled: Increases a setting or moves up menu. Decreases a setting or moves down menu. TEST/RESET Moves right, can be used to reset selected functionality and for LED test (at relay identifier screen). ENTER Used to initiate and accept settings changes. CANCEL. Used to cancel settings changes and/or move up the menu structure by one level per press. NOTE: All settings and configuration of LEDs, BI, BO and function keys can be accessed and set by the user using these keys. Alternatively configuration/settings files can be loaded into the relay using `ReyDisp'. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 18 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation 2.6 Current Inputs In total eight current inputs are provided on the Analogue Input modules. Terminals are available for both 1A and 5A inputs. CT ratios are input by the user in the CT/VT CONFIG menu. Current is sampled at 1600Hz for 50Hz systems and 1920Hz for 60Hz systems (32 samples per cycle). The waveform recorder samples and displays current input waveforms at 32 samples per cycle. 2.7 Voltage Input An optional voltage input is provided on the Analogue Input module `A'. VT ratios are input by the user in the CT/VT CONFIG menu. Voltage is sampled at 1600Hz for 50Hz systems and 1920Hz for 60Hz systems (32 samples per cycle). The waveform recorder displays the voltage input waveform at 32 samples per cycle. 2.8 Binary inputs The binary inputs are opto-couplers operated from a suitably rated dc supply. Relays are fitted with 9 or 19 binary inputs (BI). The user can assign any binary input to any of the available functions (INPUT CONFIG > INPUT MATRIX). The Power Supply module includes the relay basic I/O. The module includes 3 x BI. Pick-up (PU) and drop-off (DO) time delays are associated with each binary input. Where no pick-up time delay has been applied the input may pick up due to induced ac voltage on the wiring connections (e.g. cross site wiring). The default pick-up time of 20ms provides ac immunity. Each input can be programmed independently. Each input may be logically inverted to facilitate integration of the relay within the user scheme. When inverted the relay indicates that the BI is energised when no d.c. is applied. Inversion occurs before the PU & DO time delay, see fig. 2.8-1. Each input may be mapped to any front Fascia indication LED and/or to any Binary output contact and can also be used with the internal user programmable logic. This allows the relay to provide panel indications and alarms. Inverted Inputs BI 1 P/U Delay BI 1 inverted BI 1 D/O Delay BI 1 Event =1 Binary Input 1 INPUT CONFIG> BINARY INPUT CONFIG INPUT CONFIG> INPUT MATRIX (Or gates) BI n P/U Delay BI n inverted BI n D/O Delay BI n Event =1 Binary Input n Logic signals, e.g. '51-1 Inhibit' Figure 2-2 (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Binary Input Logic Chapter 1 Page 19 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation 2.9 Binary outputs (Output Relays) Relays are fitted with 6 or 14 binary outputs. All outputs are fully user configurable and can be programmed to operate from any or all of the available functions. The Power Supply module includes the relay basic I/O. The module includes six binary outputs each fitted with 1 contact - providing in total 1 x normally closed (NC), 2 x change-over (CO) and 3 x normally open (NO) contacts. In the default mode of operation binary outputs are self reset and remain energised for a user configurable minimum time of up to 60 seconds. If required, outputs can be programmed to operate as `hand reset' or `pulsed'. Where an output is programmed to be `hand reset' and `pulsed' then the output will be `hand reset' only. The binary outputs can be used to operate the trip coils of the circuit breaker directly where the trip coil current does not exceed the 'make and carry' contact rating. The circuit breaker auxiliary contacts or other in-series auxiliary device must be used to break the trip coil current. CB1 and CB2 `Trip Contacts' are assigned in the OUTPUT CONFIG>BINARY OUTPUT CONFIG menu. Operation of a `Trip Contact' will actuate the `Trip Alert' screen where enabled and will initiate both fault record storage and CB Fail protection where enabled. When the relay is withdrawn from the case all normally closed contacts will be open circuited. This should be considered in the design of the control and protection circuitry. Notes on Self Reset Outputs Outputs reset after the initiate condition is removed, they are subject to the user definable `Minimum Operate Time' setting. With a failed breaker condition the relay may remain operated until current flow in the primary system is interrupted by an upstream device. The relay will then reset and attempt to interrupt trip coil current flowing through an output contact. Where this level is above the break rating of the output contact an auxiliary relay with heavy-duty contacts should be utilised. Notes on Pulsed Outputs When operated, the output will reset after the user definable `Minimum Operate Time' setting regardless of the initiating condition. Notes on Hand Reset Outputs Hand reset outputs can be reset by either pressing the TEST/RESET button, by energising a suitably programmed binary input, or, by sending an appropriate command over the data communications channel(s). On loss of the auxiliary supply hand-reset outputs will reset. When the auxiliary supply is re-established the binary output will remain in the reset state unless the initiating condition is still present. Binary Output Test The MAINTENANCE>OUTPUT MATRIX TEST menu includes a facility to test output relays from the relay fascia without the need for a secondary injection test set. Binary outputs can also be energised from the Reydisp Evolution software package where PC facilities are available. For both methods the output contact is energised for the duration of the `OUTPUT CONFIG > BINARY OUTPUT CONFIG > Min Operate Time' setting. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 20 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation Logic signals, e.g. '51-1' Reset LEDs & Outputs (TEST/RESET key, Binary Input, Data Comms) BO 1 S R Hand Reset 1 Min Operate Time & 1 OUTPUT CONFIG> OUTPUT MATRIX Event & & BO 1 hand reset Output 1 Q (Or gates) OUTPUT CONFIG> BINARY OUTPUT CONFIG OUTPUT CONFIG> BINARY OUTPUT CONFIG BO n Output n S R Event & & BO n hand reset Q 1 & 1 Figure 2-3 Binary Output Logic 2.10 Virtual Input/Outputs The relays have 16 virtual input/outputs, these are internal logic states. Virtual I/O is assigned in the same way as physical Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs. Virtual I/O is mapped from within the INPUT CONFIG > INPUT MATRIX and OUTPUT CONFIG > OUTPUT MATRIX menus. The status of virtual I/O is not stored during power loss. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 21 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation 2.11 Self Monitoring The relay incorporates a number of self-monitoring features. Each of these features can initiate a controlled reset recovery sequence. Supervision includes a power supply watchdog, code execution watchdog, memory checks by checksum and processor/ADC health checks. When all checks indicate the relay is operating correctly the `Protection Healthy' LED is illuminated. If an internal failure is detected, a message will be displayed. The relay will reset in an attempt to rectify the failure. This will result in de-energisation of any binary output mapped to `protection healthy' and flashing of the protection healthy LED. If a successful reset is achieved by the relay the LED and output contact will revert back to normal operational mode, and the relay will restart, therefore ensuring the circuit is protected for the maximum time. A Start-up Counter Meter is provided to display the number of start-ups the relay has performed. Once the number of start-ups has exceeded a set number, an Alarm output can be given. Figure 2.11-1 Start-up Counter Meter Reset of the counter can be done from the meter or via a binary input or a command. Various types of start-up are monitored by the relay: 1. power-on starts (auxiliary supply initiation) 2. expected starts (user initiated via comms, language changes, custom protection curve etc.) 3. unexpected starts (caused by the relay watchdog) Any combination of these can be selected for the start-up count. This is done in the MAINTENANCE MENU>START COUNT menu using the Start Up Types setting. All the start-up types selected will be added to the overall start-up count. The number of restarts before the alarm output is raised is set in the MAINTENANCE MENU>START COUNT menu using the Start Up Count Target setting. When the number of relay start-ups reaches the target value an output is raised, OUTPUT MATRIX>Start Up Count Alarm, which can be programmed to any combination of binary outputs, LED's or virtual outputs. 2.11.1 Protection Healthy/Defective A normally open contact can be used to signal protection healthy. When the relay has DC supply and it has successfully passed its self-checking procedure then the Protection Healthy contacts are made. A normally closed contact is used to signal protection defective. When the DC supply is not applied to the relay or a problem is detected within the relay then this output is de-energised and the normally closed contacts make to provide an external alarm. An alarm can be provided if the relay is withdrawn from the case. A contact is provided in the case at positions 25-26 of the PSU module, this contact closes when the relay is withdrawn. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 22 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation Section 3: Protection Functions 3.1 Current Protection: Differential Protection Comprises both biased differential and high-set differential elements. The fundamental frequency current is measured with the line CT inputs. These line currents are both multiplied and vector corrected before being applied to the current differential elements. 3.1.1 ICT The Wn ICT Multiplier setting is applied to the line currents - the CT secondary currents. The multiplier is used to correct any CT ratio mismatch so that ideally nominal current (ICT OUT = 1A) is applied to the biased differential algorithm. The Wn ICT Connection setting applies the correct vector compensation to the current applied to the differential algorithm. The nominal current ratio of the virtual interposing CT is 1:1. Note that where Yd settings are applied some current distributions will result in a 3 multiplying factor being applied. See `Applications Guide'. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 23 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation 3.1.2 Overall Biased Differential (87BD) lop e IW2 B ia sS IW1 + IW2 2nd Operate Current IW1 D 87B 87BD Initial Setting st ias 1 B 2nd Bias Slope Type e Slop Bias (Restraint) Current IW1 + IW2 2 Figure 3-1 1st Bias Slope Limit Biased Differential Characteristic Figure 3.1-1 illustrates the biased differential characteristic. Within the relay the fundamental frequency RMS line currents are modified by the ICT Multiplier and ICT Connection settings (see 3.1.1) before being applied to the biased differential elements. The biased differential elements calculate the operate current for each phase from the vector sum of winding 1 and winding 2 currents i.e. I OPERATE = I W1 + I W2 . The bias (or restraint) current is calculated from the total current of winding 1 and winding 2 currents i.e. IRESTRAIN = I W1 + I W2 2 . The 87BD Initial setting defines the minimum differential current required to operate the relay. st The 87BD 1 Bias Slope setting is used to ensure protection stability in the presence of steady state errors e.g. the effects of an on-load tap changer. st st nd The 87BD 1 Bias Slope Limit setting defines the border between the 1 and 2 nd 87BD 2 bias slopes. Bias Slope Type setting allows the user to select the preferred characteristic shape i.e. Line or Curve. nd nd The 87BD 2 Bias Slope setting is applied when 87BD 2 Bias Slope Type = Line. This setting is used to modify the sensitivity of the differential algorithm at higher current levels. The output of 87BD Delay can be mapped to relay outputs. Operation of the biased differential elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 87BD A binary or virtual input. 87BD Inrush Action: Inhibit Operation of the inrush current detector 87BD Overfluxing Action: Inhibit Operation of the overfluxing detector User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic). (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 24 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation 87BD Element 87BD Initial Disabled 87BD 1st Bias Slope Enabled 87BD 1st Bias Slope Limit 87BD 2nd Bias Slope Type & Inhibit 87BD 87BD 2nd Bias Slope User Inhibit 87BD Enable 87BD `A' Inhibit c ICT A W1 ICT Multiplier Pickup Operate W1 ICT Connection 87BD `B' Inhibit c W1-IL1 B W1-IL2 1 General Pickup Pickup Operate W1-IL3 87BD `C' Inhibit c C Pickup Operate ICT 87BD Delay 1 87BD W2 ICT Multiplier W2 ICT Connection W2-IL1 W2-IL2 W2-IL3 87BD Inrush Action 81HBL2 Element 81HBL2 Setting Disabled 81HBL2 Bias Enabled Off Inhibit Enable > > > Wn-IL1 Wn-IL2 Wn-IL3 81HBL5 Setting Disabled 81HBL5 Bias Enabled Enable Wn-IL2 Wn-IL3 Figure 3-2 & 87BD `A' Inhibit L2 81HBL2 & 87BD `B' Inhibit L3 81HBL2 & 87BD `C' Inhibit L1 81HBL5 & 87BD `A' Inhibit L2 81HBL5 & 87BD `B' Inhibit L3 81HBL5 & 87BD `C' Inhibit 87BD Overfluxing Action 81HBL5 Element Wn-IL1 L1 81HBL2 > > > Off Inhibit Functional Diagram for Biased Current Differential Protection (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 25 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation 3.1.3 87HS Operate Current 87HS Setting IW1 + IW2 Bias (Restraint) Current IW1 + IW2 2 Figure 3-3 Differential Highset Characteristic Figure 3.1-3 illustrates the differential highset characteristic. Within the relay the fundamental frequency RMS line currents are modified by the ICT Multiplier and ICT Connection settings (see 3.1.1) before being applied to the differential highset elements. The differential highset elements calculate the operate current for each phase from the vector sum of winding 1 and winding 2 currents i.e. I OPERATE = I W1 + I W2 . 87HS Setting defines the differential current required to operate the element. The output of 87HS Delay can be mapped to relay outputs. Operation of the highset differential elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 87HS A binary or virtual input. 87HS Inrush Action: Inhibit Operation of the inrush current detector 87HS Overfluxing Action: Inhibit Operation of the overfluxing detector User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic). (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 26 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation 87HS Element Disabled Enabled & Inhibit 87HS 87HS Setting Enable User Inhibit 87HS 87HS `A' c Inhibit ICT Pickup Operate W1 ICT Multiplier W1 ICT Connection 87HS `B' c Inhibit W1-IL1 & General Pickup Pickup Operate W1-IL2 W1-IL3 87HS `C' c Inhibit 87HS Delay Pickup & 87HS Operate ICT W2 ICT Multiplier W2 ICT Connection W2-IL1 W2-IL2 W2-IL3 87HS Inrush Action 81HBL2 Element 81HBL2 Setting Disabled 81HBL2 Bias Enabled Enable > > > Wn-IL1 Wn-IL2 Wn-IL3 Off Inhibit L1 81HBL2 & 87HS `A' Inhibit L2 81HBL2 & 87HS `B' Inhibit L3 81HBL2 & 87HS `C' Inhibit L1 81HBL5 & 87HS `A' Inhibit L2 81HBL5 & 87HS `B' Inhibit L3 81HBL5 & 87HS `C' Inhibit 87HS Overfluxing Action 81HBL5 Element 81HBL5 Setting Disabled 81HBL5 Bias Enabled Enable Wn-IL1 Wn-IL2 Wn-IL3 Figure 3-4 > > > Off Inhibit Logic Diagram: High Set Current Differential Protection (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 27 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation 3.2 Current Protection: Phase Overcurrent (51, 50) The optional phase overcurrent elements have a common setting to measure either fundamental frequency RMS or True RMS current: True RMS current: 51/50 Measurement = RMS Fundamental Frequency RMS current: 51/50 Measurement = Fundamental 3.2.1 Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection (50) Optionally two instantaneous overcurrent elements are provided, each can be selected to either winding 1 or winding 2. Each instantaneous element (50-n) has independent settings. 50-n Setting for pick-up current and 50-n Delay follower time delay. The instantaneous elements have transient free operation. Operation of the instantaneous overcurrent elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 50-n A binary or virtual input. 50-n Inrush Action: Inhibit Operation of the inrush detector function. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic). 50-n Element Disabled Enabled & Inhibit 50-n User Inhibit 50-n 50-n Inrush Action 50-n Setting Enable L1 81HBL2 & 1 General Pickup 1 50-n 50-n Delay c > Off Inhibit L2 81HBL2 L3 81HBL2 & c & c > > 50/51 Measurement Wn-IL1 Wn-IL2 Wn-IL3 Figure 3-5 Logic Diagram: Instantaneous Over-current Element (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 28 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation 3.2.2 Time Delayed Overcurrent Protection (51) Optionally two time delayed overcurrent elements are provided, each can be selected to either winding 1 or winding 2. 51-n Setting sets the pick-up current level. A number of shaped characteristics are provided. An inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) characteristic is selected from IEC, ANSI or user defined curves using 51-n Char. A time multiplier is applied to the characteristic curves using the 51-n Time Mult setting. Alternatively, a definite time lag delay (DTL) can be chosen using 51-n Char. When Delay (DTL) is selected the time multiplier is not applied and the 51-n Delay (DTL) setting is used instead. The full list of operating curves is given in Chapter 2 - `Settings, Configuration and Instruments Guide'. Operating curve characteristics are illustrated in Chapter 3 - `Performance Specification'. The 51-n Reset setting can apply a definite time delayed reset, or when configured as an ANSI characteristic an ANSI (DECAYING) reset. If ANSI (DECAYING) reset is selected for an IEC characteristic, the reset will be instantaneous. The reset mode is significant where the characteristic has reset before issuing a trip output - see `Applications Guide'. A minimum operate time for the characteristic can be set using 51-n Min. Operate Time setting. A fixed additional operate time can be added to the characteristic using 51-n Follower DTL setting. Operation of the time delayed overcurrent elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 51-n A binary or virtual input. 51-n Inrush Action: Inhibit Operation of the inrush detector function. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic). 51-n Setting 51-n Element 51-n Char Disabled 51-n Time Mult Enabled 51-n Delay (DTL) 51-n Min. Operate Time & Inhibit 51-n 51-n Follower DTL 51-n Reset User Inhibit 51-n Enable 51-n Inrush Action L1 81HBL2 & c Pickup Operate Off Inhibit L2 81HBL2 & c 1 General Pickup 1 51-n Pickup Operate L3 81HBL2 & c Pickup Operate 50/51 Measurement Wn-IL1 Wn-IL2 Wn-IL3 Figure 3-6 Logic Diagram: Time Delayed Overcurrent Element (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 29 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation 3.3 Current Protection: Derived Earth Fault (50N, 51N) The earth current is derived by calculating the sum of the measured line currents. These optional elements utilise RMS current values of the fundamental frequency (50 or 60Hz). 3.3.1 Instantaneous Derived Earth Fault Protection (50N) Optionally two instantaneous derived earth fault elements are provided, each can be selected to either winding 1 or winding 2. Each instantaneous element has independent settings for pick-up current 50N-n Setting and a follower time delay 50N-n Delay. The instantaneous elements have transient free operation. Operation of the instantaneous earth fault elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 50N-nt A binary or virtual input. 50N-n Inrush Action: Inhibit Operation of the inrush detector function. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic). 50N-n Element Disabled Enabled Inhibit 50N-n User Inhibit 50N-n 50N-n Inrush Action & Off Inhibit General Pickup & 50N-n Setting 81HBL2 50N-n Delay Enable Wn-IL1 IN Wn-IL2 > 50N-n Wn-IL3 Figure 3-7 Logic Diagram: Instantaneous Derived Earth Fault Element (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 30 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation 3.3.2 Time Delayed Derived Earth Fault Protection (51N) Optionally two time delayed derived earth fault elements are provided, each can be selected to either winding 1 or winding 2. 51N-n Setting sets the pick-up current level. A number of shaped characteristics are provided. An inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) characteristic is selected from IEC, ANSI or user defined curves using 51N-n Char. A time multiplier is applied to the characteristic curves using the 51N-n Time Mult setting. Alternatively, a definite time lag delay (DTL) can be chosen using 51N-n Char. When Delay (DTL) is selected the time multiplier is not applied and the 51N-n Delay (DTL) setting is used instead. The 51N-n Reset setting can apply a definite time delayed or ANSI (DECAYING) reset. The reset mode is significant where the characteristic has reset before issuing a trip output - see `Applications Guide'. A minimum operate time for the characteristic can be set using the 51N-n Min. Operate Time setting. A fixed additional operate time can be added to the characteristic using the 51N-n Follower DTL setting. Operation of the time delayed earth fault elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 51N-n A binary or virtual input. 51N-n Inrush Action: Inhibit Operation of the inrush detector function. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic). 51N-n Element Disabled 51N-n Setting Enabled 51N-n Charact Inhibit 51N-n 51N-n Time Mult & 51N-n Delay (DTL) User Inhibit 51N-n 51N-n Min Operate Time 51N-n Follower DTL 51N-n Inrush Action 51N-n Reset Off Enable Inhibit & c Pickup General Pickup 81HBL2 Operate Wn-IL1 51N-n IN Wn-IL2 Wn-IL3 Figure 3-8 Logic Diagram: Derived Time Delayed Earth Fault Protection (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 31 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation 3.4 Current Protection: Measured Earth Fault (50G, 51G) The earth current is measured directly via dedicated current analogue inputs. These optional elements utilise either RMS or Fundamental current values as defined by the 51G/50G Measurement setting (MEASURED E/F menu). 3.4.1 Instantaneous Measured Earth Fault Protection (50G) Optionally two instantaneous measured earth fault elements are provided, each can be selected to either winding 1 or winding 2. Each instantaneous element has independent settings for pick-up current 50G-n Setting and a follower time delay 50G-n Delay. The instantaneous elements have transient free operation. Operation of the instantaneous measured earth fault elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 50G-n A binary or virtual input. 50G-n Inrush Action: Inhibit Operation of the inrush detector function. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic). 50G-n Element Disabled Enabled Inhibit 50G-n User Inhibit 50G-n 50G-n Inrush Action & Off Inhibit & General Pickup 81HBL2 50G-n Setting 50G-n Delay Enable 51G/50G Measurement > 50G-n IGn Figure 3-9 Logic Diagram: Measured Instantaneous Earth-fault Element (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 32 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation 3.4.2 Time Delayed Measured Earth Fault Protection (51G) Optionally two time delayed measured earth fault elements are provided, each can be selected to either winding 1 or winding 2. 51G-n Setting sets the pick-up current level. A number of shaped characteristics are provided. An inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) characteristic is selected from IEC, ANSI or user defined curves using 51G-n Char. A time multiplier is applied to the characteristic curves using the 51G-n Time Mult setting. Alternatively, a definite time lag (DTL) can be chosen using 51G-n Char. When DTL is selected the time multiplier is not applied and the 51G-n Delay (DTL) setting is used instead. The 51G-n Reset setting can apply a definite time delayed or ANSI (DECAYING) reset. The reset mode is significant where the characteristic has reset before issuing a trip output - see `Applications Guide'. A minimum operate time for the characteristic can be set using 51G-n Min. Operate Time setting. A fixed additional operate time can be added to the characteristic using 51G-n Follower DTL setting. Operation of the time delayed measured earth fault elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 51G-n A binary or virtual input. 51G-n Inrush Action: Inhibit Operation of the inrush detector function. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic). 51G-n Element Disabled Enabled Inhibit 51G-n & 51G-n Setting User Inhibit 51G-n 51G-n Charact 51G-n Inrush Action 51G-n Time Mult 51G-n Delay (DTL) Off 51G-n Min Operate Time Inhibit & 81HBL2 51G-n Follower DTL 51G-n Reset Enable 51G/50G Measurement c IGn Pickup Operate General Pickup 51G-n Figure 3-10 Logic Diagram: Time Delayed Measured Earth Fault Element (51G) (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 33 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation 3.5 Current Protection: High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault (64H) Two high impedance restricted earth fault elements are provided, one for each transformer winding The relay utilises fundamental current measurement values for this function. The single phase current input is derived from the residual output of line/neutral CTs connected in parallel. An external stabilising resistor must be connected in series with this input to ensure that this element provides a high impedance path. 64H Current Setting sets the pick-up current level. An output is given after elapse of the 64H Delay setting. An external series stabilising resistor and a parallel connected voltage limiting non-linear resistor are used with this function. See `Applications Guide' for advice in specifying suitable component values. Operation of the high impedance element can be inhibited from: Inhibit 64H A binary or virtual input. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic). 64H-n Element Disabled 64H-n Current Setting Enabled 64H-n Delay Inhibit 64H-n & Enable > User Inhibit 64H-n 64H-n IG Figure 3-11 Logic Diagram: High Impedance REF (64H) (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 34 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation 3.6 Open Circuit (46BC) Optionally two open circuit elements are provided, each can be selected to either winding 1 or winding 2. The element calculates the ratio of NPS to PPS currents. Where the NPS:PPS current ratio is above 46BC Setting an output is given after the 46BC Delay. The Open Circuit function can be inhibited from Inhibit 46BC A binary or virtual input . Gn 46BC-n U/I Guarded Operation of the undercurrent guard function. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic). 46BC-n Element Disabled Enabled Inhibit 46BC-n User Inhibit 46BC-n 46BC-n U/I Guarded 46BC-n Setting Yes & 46BC-n U/I Guard Setting < < < & Enable 46BC-n Delay & 46BC-n IL1 IL2 NPS Filter I2 PPS Filter I1 IL3 Figure 3-12 Logic Diagram: Open Circuit Function (46BC) (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 35 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation 3.7 Current Protection: Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent (46NPS) Optionally four NPS current elements are provided - 2 x 46IT and 2 x 46DT. Each element can be selected to either winding 1 or winding 2. The 46IT elements can be configured to be either definite time lag (DTL) or inverse definite minimum time (IDMT), 46IT Setting sets the pick-up current level for the element. A number of shaped characteristics are provided. An inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) characteristic is selected from IEC and ANSI curves using 46IT Char. A time multiplier is applied to the characteristic curves using the 46IT Time Mult setting. Alternatively, a definite time lag delay (DTL) can be chosen using 46ITChar. When Delay (DTL) is selected the time multiplier is not applied and the 46IT Delay (DTL) setting is used instead. The 46IT Reset setting can apply a, definite time delayed or ANSI (DECAYING) reset. The 46DT elements have a DTL characteristic. 46DT Setting sets the pick-up current and 46DT Delay the follower time delay. Operation of the negative phase sequence overcurrent elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 46IT A binary or virtual input. Inhibit 46DT A binary or virtual input. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic). 46IT Setting 46IT Char 46IT-n Element 46IT Time Mult Disabled 46IT Delay (DTL) Enabled 46IT Reset & Inhibit 46IT-n En. User Inhibit 46IT-n Wn-IL1 NPS Wn-IL2 General Pickup Pickup 46IT-n Operate I2 Wn-IL3 General Pickup 46DT-n Element 46DT Setting Disabled Enabled > Inhibit 46DT-n & 46DT-n Delay 46DT-n c User Inhibit 46DT-n Figure 3-13 Logic Diagram: Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent (46NPS) (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 36 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation 3.8 Current Protection: Under-Current (37, 37G) Optionally two under-current elements are provided for both line and measured earth current, each can be selected to either winding 1 or winding 2. Each phase has an independent level detector and current-timing element. 37-n Setting sets the pick-up current. An output is given after elapse of the 37-n Delay setting. Operation of the under-current elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 37(G)-n A binary or virtual input. Gn 37-n U/I Guarded Operation of the undercurrent guard function. Inhibit 37(G)-n A binary or virtual input. User Inhibit 37(G)-n Reylogic (graphical logic). 37-n Element Disabled Enabled Inhibit 37-n User Inhibit 37-n 37-n U/I Guarded Yes & 37-n U/I Guard Setting < < & 1 37-n Setting 37-n Delay Enable < Wn IL1 < Wn IL2 < Wn IL3 < 1 37-n 37G-n Element Disabled Enabled 37G-n Setting Inhibit 37G-n & Enable 37G-n Delay User Inhibit 37G-n Ig-n < 37G-n Figure 3-14 Logic Diagram: Undercurrent Detector (37, 37G) (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 37 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation 3.9 Current Protection: Thermal Overload (49) Optionally a phase segregated thermal overload element is provided, this can be selected to either winding 1 or winding 2. The thermal state is calculated using the measured True RMS current. Should the current rise above the 49 Overload Setting for a defined time an output signal will be initiated. Operate Time (t):- I2 - IP2 t = x ln 2 2 ( ) - x I k I B Where T = Time in minutes = 49 Time Constant setting (minutes) In = Log Natural I = measured current I P = Previous steady state current level k = Constant I B = Basic current, typically the same as In k.I B = 49 Overload Setting (I ) Additionally, an alarm can be given if the thermal state of the system exceeds a specified percentage of the protected equipment's thermal capacity 49 Capacity Alarm setting. For the heating curve: = I2 I 2 (1- e -t ) x 100% Where: = thermal state at time t I = measured thermal current I = 49 Overload setting (or k.I B ) The final steady state thermal condition can be predicted for any steady state value of input current where t >, F = I2 I2 x 100% Where: F = final thermal state before disconnection of device 49 Overload Setting I is expressed as a multiple of the relay nominal current and is equivalent to the factor k.I B as defined in the IEC255-8 thermal operating characteristics. It is the value of current above which 100% of thermal capacity will be reached after a period of time and it is therefore normally set slightly above the full load current of the protected device. The thermal state may be reset from the fascia, a user logic reset or externally via a binary input. Thermal overload protection can be inhibited from: Inhibit 49 A binary or virtual input. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic). (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 38 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation 49 Element Disabled Enabled & Inhibit 49 49 Overload Setting User Inhibit 49 49 Time Constant 49 Capacity Alarm Enable C Wn-IL1 trip Reset 49 1 User Reset 49 C Wn-IL2 1 49 Alarm 1 49 Trip cap alarm trip C Wn-IL3 cap alarm cap alarm trip Figure 3-15 Logic Diagram: Thermal Overload Protection (49) (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 39 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation 3.10 Voltage Protection: Over Fluxing (24) Optionally, three over fluxing elements are provided - 2 x 24DT and 1 x 24IT Char elements. The 24DT Elements have a DTL characteristic. 24DT Setting sets the pick-up level and 24DT Delay the follower time delay. An output is given if the Volts/Hertz ratio is above setting for the duration of the delay. The 24DT-n Hysteresis setting allows the user to vary the pick-up/drop-off ratio for the element. The 24IT Element has a user definable shape. 24Xn Point Setting sets the over fluxing (V/f) level for up to 7 user definable points. 24Yn Point Setting sets the operate time for each of the defined points. Y (secs) The 24IT Reset setting can apply a, definite time delayed reset. Y0 X0, Y0 point defines curve pick-up X X Straight-line between points X X X6, Y6 point defines curve cut-off X X Y6 X0 X X6 X - (V/f) Figure 3-16 Inverse Over-fluxing Characteristic (24IT) Operation of the over fluxing elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 24IT A binary or virtual input. Inhibit 24DT-n A binary or virtual input. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic). (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 40 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation 24DT-1 Element Disabled 24DT-1 Setting Enabled General Pickup 24DT-1 Hysteresis Inhibit 24DT-1 Enable & 24DT-1 Delay User Inhibit 24DT-1 > 24DT-1 24DT-2 Element Disabled 24DT-2 Setting Enabled General Pickup 24DT-2 Hysteresis Inhibit 24DT-2 & Enable 24DT-2 Delay User Inhibit 24DT-2 > 24DT-2 24IT Char 24IT Char Reset Disabled 24IT Char Point Xn Enabled 24IT Char Point Yn Inhibit 24IT Char & Enable User Inhibit 24IT Char c V Pickup trip General Pickup 24IT-Char Figure 3-17 Logic Diagram: Overfluxing Elements (24) (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 41 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation 3.11 Voltage Protection: Under/Over Voltage (27/59) Optionally four under/over voltage elements are provided. The relay utilises fundamental voltage measurement values for this function. 27/59-n Setting sets the pick-up voltage level for the element. The sense of the element (undervoltage or overvoltage) is set by the 27/59-n Operation setting. Voltage elements are blocked if the measured voltage falls below the 27/59 U/V Guard setting. An output is given after elapse of the 27/59-n Delay setting. The 27/59-n Hysteresis setting allows the user to vary the pick-up/drop-off ratio for the element. Operation of the under/over voltage elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 27/59-n A binary or virtual input. 27/59-n U/V Guarded Under voltage guard element. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic). 27/59-n Element Disabled Enabled Inhibit 27/59-n User Inhibit 27/59-n 27/59-n U/V Guarded 27/59-n Operation Yes 27/59-n Setting & 27/59 U/V Guard Setting General Pickup 27/59-n Hysteresis Enable & 27/59-n Delay < > or < V Figure 3-18 27/59-n Logic Diagram: Under/Over Voltage Elements (27/59) (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 42 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation 3.12 Voltage Protection: Neutral Overvoltage (59N) Optionally two Neutral Overvoltage (or Neutral Voltage Displacement) elements are provided. One of the elements can be configured to be either definite time lag (DTL) or inverse definite minimum time (IDMT), 59NIT Setting sets the pick-up voltage level (3V 0 ) for the element. An inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) can be selected using 59NIT Char. A time multiplier is applied to the characteristic curves using the 59NIT Time Mult setting (M): M t op = 3Vo [ Vs ] - 1 Alternatively, a definite time lag delay (DTL) can be chosen using 59NITChar. When Delay (DTL) is selected the time multiplier is not applied and the 59NIT Delay (DTL) setting is used instead. An instantaneous or definite time delayed reset can be applied using the 59NIT Reset setting. The second element has a DTL characteristic. 59NDT Setting sets the pick-up voltage (3V 0 ) and 59NDT Delay the follower time delay. Operation of the neutral overvoltage elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 59NIT A binary or virtual input. Inhibit59NDT A binary or virtual input. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic). It should be noted that neutral voltage displacement can only be applied to VT arrangements that allow zero sequence flux to flow in the core i.e. a 5-limb VT or 3 single phase VTs. The VT primary winding neutral must be earthed to allow the flow of zero sequence current. 59NIT Setting 59NIT Charact 59NIT Element 59NIT Time Mult Disabled 59NIT Delay (DTL) Enabled 59NIT Reset Inhibit 59NIT & En. General Pickup Pickup User Inhibit 59NIT Operate 59NIT V = 3Vo 59NDT Element General Pickup 59NDT Setting 59NDT Delay Disabled Enabled Inhibit 59NDT > & 59NDT En. User Inhibit 59NDT (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 43 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation Figure 3-19 Logic Diagram: Neutral Overvoltage Element (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 44 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation 3.13 Voltage Protection: Under/Over Frequency (81) Optionally six under/over frequency elements are provided. Frequency elements are blocked if the measured voltage falls below the 81 U/V Guard setting. The sense of the element (under-frequency or over-frequency) is set by the 81-n Operation setting. 81-n Setting sets the pick-up frequency for the element. An output is given after elapse of the 81-n Delay setting. The 81-n Hysteresis setting allows the user to vary the pick-up/drop-off ratio for the element. Operation of the under/over frequency elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 81-n A binary or virtual input. 81-n U/V Guarded Under voltage guard element. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic). 81-n Element Disabled Enabled Inhibit 81-n User Inhibit 81-n 81-n U/V Guarded 81-n Operation 81-n Setting Yes General Pickup & 81-n U/V Guard Setting & 81-n Hysteresis Enable 81-n Delay < > V or < 81-n Figure 3-20 Logic Diagram: Under/Over Frequency Detector (81) (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 45 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation Section 4: Control & Logic Functions 4.1 Quick Logic The `Quick Logic' feature allows the user to input up to 16 logic equations (E1 to E16) in text format. Equations can be entered using Reydisp or at the relay fascia. Each logic equation is built up from text representing control characters. Each can be up to 20 characters long. Allowable characters are: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 Digit ( ) Parenthesis ! `NOT' Function . `AND' Function ^ `EXCLUSIVE OR' Function + `OR' Function En Equation (number) Fn Function Key (number) `1' = Key pressed, `0' = Key not pressed In Binary Input (number) `1' = Input energised, `0' = Input de-energised Ln LED (number) `1' = LED energised, `0' = LED de-energised On Binary output (number) `1' = Output energised, `0' = Output de-energised Vn Virtual Input/Output (number) `1' = Virtual I/O energised, `0' = Virtual I/O de-energised Example Showing Use of Nomenclature E1= ((I1^F1).!O2)+L1 Equation 1 = ((Binary Input 1 XOR Function Key 1) AND NOT Binary Output 2) OR LED 1 When the equation is satisfied (=1) it is routed through a pick-up timer (En Pickup Delay), a drop-off timer (En Dropoff Delay), and a counter which instantaneously picks up and increments towards its target (En Counter Target). The counter will either maintain its count value En Counter Reset Mode = OFF, or reset after a time delay: En Counter Reset Mode = Single Shot: The En Counter Reset Time is started only when the counter is first incremented (i.e. counter value = 1) and not for subsequent counter operations. Where En Counter Reset Time elapses and the count value has not reached its target the count value is reset to zero. En Counter Reset Mode = Multi Shot: The En Counter Reset Time is started each time the counter is incremented. Where En Counter Reset Time elapses without further count increments the count value is reset to zero. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 46 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation Counter D.O. DELAY P.U. DELAY Equation n Counter Value 1 Increment Counter Counter = Target Value En = 1 2 D .O .D P. U .D EL AY AY EL Equation Output 1 0 1 0 T 1 For Counter Target = 2 En = 1 Figure 4-1 Sequence Diagram showing PU/DO Timers in Quick Logic (Counter Reset Mode Off) When the count value = En Counter Target the output of the counter (En) = 1 and this value is held until the initiating conditions are removed when En is instantaneously reset. The output of En is assigned in the OUTPUT CONFIG>OUTPUT MATRIX menu where it can be programmed to any binary output (O), LED (L) or Virtual Input/Output (V) combination. Protection functions can be used in Quick Logic by mapping them to a Virtual Input / Output. Refer to Chapter 7 - Applications Guide for examples of Logic schemes. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 47 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation Section 5: Supervision Functions 5.1 Circuit Breaker Failure (50BF) Two CB Fail elements are provided - one element per winding. Each circuit breaker fail function has two time delayed outputs that can be used for combinations of re-tripping or back-tripping. CB Fail outputs are given after elapse of the 50BF-n-1 Delay or 50BF-n-2 Delay settings. The two timers run concurrently. The circuit breaker fail protection time delays are initiated either from: An output Trip Contact of the relay (MENU: OUTPUT CONFIG\BINARY OUTPUT CONFIG\CBn Trip Contacts), or A binary or virtual input assigned to 50BF-n Ext Trip (MENU: INPUT CONFIG\INPUT MATRIX\50BF Ext Trip). A binary or virtual input assigned to 50BF-n Mech Trip (MENU: INPUT CONFIG\INPUT MATRIX\ 50BFn Mech Trip). CB Fail outputs will be issued providing any of the 3 phase currents are above the 50BF-n Setting or the current in the fourth CT is above 50BF-n-I4 for longer than the 50BF-n-n Delay setting, or for a mechanical protection trip the circuit breaker is still closed when the 50BF-n-n Delay setting has expired - indicating that the fault has not been cleared. Both 50BF-n-1 and 50BF-n-2 can be mapped to any output contact or LED. If the 50BF-n CB Faulty input (MENU: INPUT CONFIG\INPUT MATRIX\CB Faulty) is energised when a CB trip is given the time delays 50BF-n-n Delay will be by-passed and the output given immediately. Operation of the CB Fail elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 50BF-n A binary or virtual input. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic). (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 48 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation 50BF-n Element 50BF-n CB Faulty Enabled & 1 Disabled 50BF-n-1 User Inhibit 50BF-n Inhibit 50BF-n & Trip Contact 50BF-n-1 Delay & 1 & 50BF-n Ext Trip 50BF-n Mech Trip 1 50BF-n-2 Delay 50BF-n-2 & & CB-n Closed 50BF-n Setting Wn-IL1 Wn-IL2 Wn-IL3 > 1 & 1 50BF-n-I4 Setting Ig-n > Figure 5-1 Logic Diagram: Circuit Breaker Fail Protection (50BF) (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 49 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation 5.2 Trip/Close Circuit Supervision (74TCS/74CCS) The relay provides six trip and six close circuit supervision elements, all elements are identical in operation and independent from each other allowing 6 trip and 6 close circuits to be monitored. One or more binary inputs can be mapped to 74TCS-n/74CCS-n. The inputs are connected into the trip circuit such that at least one input is energised when the trip circuit wiring is intact. If all mapped inputs become deenergised, due to a break in the trip circuit wiring or loss of supply an output is given. The 74TCS-n Delay or 74CCS-n Delay setting prevents failure being incorrectly indicated during circuit breaker operation. This delay should be greater than the operating time of the circuit breaker. The use of one or two binary inputs mapped to the same Circuit Supervision element (e.g. 74TCS-n) allows the user to realise several alternative monitoring schemes - see `Applications Guide'. 74TCS-n Notes For details of data communications points refer to Technical Manual, Chapter 4 (Data Communications). For details of user logic inputs and outputs refer to the relevant Reydisp Manager template. Disabled 74TCS-n Delay Enabled & User Inhibit 74TCS-n 74TCS-n & 74TCS 74TCS-n Figure 5-2 Logic Diagram: Trip Circuit Supervision Feature (74TCS) 74CCS-n Enabled 74CCS-n Delay Disabled & 74CCS-n 74CCS-n 1 Figure 5-3 CCS-n NOTE: Diagram shows two binary inputs mapped to the same Close Circuit Supervision element Logic Diagram: Close Circuit Supervision Feature (74CCS) (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 50 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation 5.3 Inrush Detector (81HBL2) Inrush detector elements monitor the line currents. The inrush detector can be used to block the operation of selected elements during transformer magnetising inrush conditions. The 81HBL2 Bias setting allows the user to select between Phase, Sum and Cross methods of measurement: Phase Each phase is inhibited separately. Sum With this method the square root of the sum of the squares of the second harmonic in each phase is compared to each operate current individually. Cross All phases are inhibited when any phase detects an inrush condition. An output is initiated where the measured ratio of second harmonic to fundamental current component content is above the 81HBL2 setting. An LED assigned to this function operates instantaneously, whereas an output relay assigned to this function operates after a 60ms time delay. 81HBL2 Element Enabled >1 Disabled 81 HBL2 81HBL2 Setting 81HBL2 Bias c IL1 IL2 IL3 Figure 5-4 > > > L1 81HBL2 L2 81HBL2 L3 81HBL2 Logic Diagram: Inrush Detector Feature (81HBL2) (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 51 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation 5.4 Over Fluxing Detector (81HBL5) Over fluxing detector elements monitor the line currents. The over fluxing detector can be used to block the operation of differential protection (87BD/ 87HS) elements. The 81HBL5 Bias setting allows the user to select between Phase, Sum and Cross methods of measurement: Phase Each phase is inhibited separately Sum The inrush current from each phase is summated and compared to each operate current individually Cross All phases are inhibited when any phase detects an inrush condition An output is given where the measured fifth harmonic component content is above the 81HBL5 setting. >1 81HBL5 Element 81 HBL5 81HBL5 Setting Disabled 81HBL5 Bias Enabled c IL1 IL2 IL3 Figure 5-5 > > > L1 81HBL5 L2 81HBL5 L3 81HBL5 Logic Diagram: Overfluxing Detector Feature (81HBL5) (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 52 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 53 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation Section 6: Other Features 6.1 Data Communications Two communication ports, COM1 and COM2 are provided as standard. RS485 connections are available on the terminal blocks at the rear of the relay (COM1). A USB port, COM 2, is provided at the front of the relay for local access using a PC. Optionally, additional communication ports are available: 2 x fibre optic communication serial ports with ST connectors (COM 3 and COM 4) plus 1 x IRIG B 1 RS232 serial port (COM 3) plus IRIG B 1 x RS485 serial port (COM 3) plus IRIG B 2 x Electrical Ethernet with RJ45 connectors IEC 61850 - (COM 3 and COM 4), 2 x Optical Ethernet Duplex LC connectors IEC 61850 - (COM 3 and COM 4). Communication is compatible with Modbus-RTU, IEC60870-5-103 FT 1.2, DNP 3.0, and IEC60870-5-101 transmission and application standards for all serial ports and IEC 61850 for Ethernet ports. Reydisp Manager provides the functionality of Reydisp Evolution and also provides project management of multiple devices to allow engineering of IEC61850 projects Communication with the relay from a personal computer (PC) is facilitated by the REYDISP EVOLUTION software package. The program allows the transfer of relay settings, waveform records, event records, fault data records, Instruments/meters and control functions. REYDISP EVOLUTION is compatible with IEC60870-5-103. Data communications operation is described in detail in Chapter 4 of this manual. 6.2 IEC 61850 Communications The relay can optionally be provided with IEC61850 comms. The 61850 comms can be user configured to provide HSR, PRP and RSTP operation. For further details refer to the following publications: IEC 61850 Model Implementation Conformance Statement (MICS) IEC 61850 PIXIT, PICS, TICS Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS), Protocol Implementation Extra Information for Testing (PIXIT) and Technical Issues Implementation Conformance Statement (TICS), (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 54 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation 6.3 Maintenance 6.3.1 Output Matrix Test The feature is available from the Relay fascia and allows the user to operate binary outputs or LEDs assigned to relay functions. Any protection function which is enabled in the setting menu will appear in the Output Matrix Test. 6.3.2 CB Counters Four CB trip counters are provided: CB1 Total Trip Count: Increments on each trip command issued. CB1 Delta Trip Count: Additional counter which can be reset independently of the Total Trip Counter. This can be used, for example, for recording trip operations between visits to a substation. CB2 Total Trip Count As CB1 CB2 Delta Trip Count: As CB1 The status of each counter can be viewed in the INSTRUMENTS mode. Binary outputs can be mapped to each of the above counters, these outputs are energised when the user defined Count Target is reached. 6.3.3 I2t CB Wear CB1 and CB2 wear counters are also provided: 2 Provides an estimate of contact wear and maintenance requirements. The algorithm works on a per phase basis, measuring the arcing current during faults. The I 2 t value at the time of trip is added to the previously stored value and an alarm is given when any one of the three phase running counts exceeds the set Alarm limit . The t value is the time between CB contacts separation when an arc is formed, Separation Time, and the CB Clearance time. 2 As CB1 I t CB1 Wear: I t CB2 Wear: The status of each counter can be viewed in the INSTRUMENTS mode. Binary outputs can be mapped to each of the above counters, these outputs are energised when the user defined Alarm Limit is reached. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 55 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation 6.4 Data Storage 6.4.1 General The relay stores three types of data records: relay event records, analogue/digital waveform records and fault data records. These data records are backed up in non-volatile memory and are permanently stored even in the event of loss of auxiliary d.c. supply voltage. 6.4.2 Event Records The event recorder feature allows the time tagging of any change of state (Event) in the relay. As an event occurs, the actual event condition is logged as a record along with a time and date stamp to a resolution of 1 millisecond. There is capacity for a maximum of 5000 event records that can be stored in the relay and when the event buffer is full any new record will over-write the oldest. Stored events can be erased using the DATA STORAGE>Clear Events setting. The following events are logged: Change of state of Binary outputs. Change of state of Binary inputs. Change of Settings and Settings Group Change of state of any of the control functions of the relay. All events can be uploaded over the data communications channel(s) and can be displayed in the `ReyDisp Evolution' package in chronological order, allowing the sequence of events to be viewed. Events are also made available spontaneously to an IEC 60870-5-103 or Modbus RTU compliant control system. For a complete listing of events available in each model, refer to Technical Manual Chapter 4 `Data Comms'. 6.4.3 Waveform Records. Waveform records provide a trace of the instantaneous magnitude of each analogue input channel and the status of each binary channel i.e. each binary input, binary output, virtual I/O and LED, against time for the duration of the record. The values are recorded at every digital sampling point used by the relay software. Each recorded analogue waveform displays an input identifier, minimum value, maximum value and the instantaneous values at both cursor positions (user variable). Each binary waveform displays the input/output number and the initiating condition(s) e.g. external input or protection element. Triggering of waveform storage is configured from the `Settings > DATA STORAGE > WAVEFORM STORAGE' menu. Triggering is automatically initiated from operation of any of the selected protection or control elements. Waveform storage can also be triggered from the relay fascia, from a suitably programmed binary input or via the data comms channel(s). Waveforms are sampled at a rate of 32 samples per cycle. The latest 100 records are stored, the most recent is waveform 1. Records are archived by the relay during quiescent periods. The duration of each stored record is 1s, 2s, 5s or 10s. The percentage of waveform storage prior to waveform triggering is user configurable. When the waveform archive buffer is full (i.e. 100 records are stored) the triggering of a new waveform record causes the oldest record - waveform 100 - to be overwritten. Stored waveforms can be deleted from the relay fascia using the DATA STORAGE > Clear Waveforms setting or via Reydisp. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 56 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation 6.4.4 Fault Data Records Measured quantities for the last 100 relay trip fault records are stored with time and date of trip. The HMI LCD can display the latest 10 fault records with time and date of trip, measured quantities and LED status. The Max Fault Rec. Time setting sets the time period from fault trigger during which the operation of any LEDs is recorded. Records are triggered from operation of an output relay programmed as a `CBn Trip Contact'. The `Trip Alert' feature must also be enabled. To achieve accurate instrumentation values for the fault records when testing, ensure a drop off delay is applied to the test set so that the injected quantities remain on for a short duration, typically 20ms, after the relay has issued the trip output. This extended period of injection simulates the behaviour of the power system where faulted conditions are present until CB operation. Where examined together the event records and the fault records will detail the full sequence of events leading to a trip. Fault records are stored in a rolling buffer, with the oldest faults overwritten. The fault storage can be cleared with the DATA STORAGE>Clear Faults setting. The SYSTEM CONFIG > Trip Alert = Disabled setting allows the above to be switched off e.g. during commissioning tests. 6.4.5 Demand Maximum, minimum and mean values of line currents and voltage (where applicable) are available as instruments which can be read in the relay INSTRUMENTS MENU or via Reydisp. The DATA STORAGE > DEMAND DATA LOG > Data Log Period setting is used to define the time/duration after which the instrument is updated. The updated value indicates the maximum, minimum and mean values for the defined period. The Gn Demand Window setting defines the maximum period of time over which the demand values are valid. A new set of demand values is established after expiry of the set time. The Gn Demand Window Type can be set to FIXED, PEAK or ROLLING. When set to FIXED the maximum, minimum and mean values demand statistics are calculated over fixed Window duration. At the end of each window the internal statistics are reset and a new window is started. When set to PEAK the maximum and minimum values within the Demand Window time setting is recorded. When set to ROLLING the maximum, minimum and mean values demand statistics are calculated over a moving Window duration. The internal statistics are updated when the window advances every Updated Period. The statistics can be reset from a binary input or communication command, after a reset the update period and window are immediately restarted. 6.4.6 Demand/Data Log The Data log feature can be used to build trend and demand records. Up to 10,080 values for each phase current (W1 and W2) and voltage (where fitted) analogue are recorded. Each recorded value consists of the mean value of the sampled data over the Data Log Period. Stored Data Log records are retrieved using Reydisp. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 57 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation 6.5 Metering The metering feature provides real-time data available from the relay fascia in the `Instruments Mode' or via the data communications interface. For a detailed description refer to Technical Manual Chapter 2 - Settings and Instruments. 6.6 Operating Mode The relay has three operating modes, Local, Remote and Out of Service. functions operation in each mode. The following table identifies the The modes can be selected by the following methods: SYSTEM CONFIG>RELAY MODE setting, a Binary Input or Command OPERATION Control Rear Serial Ports (when set as Remote) Rear Serial Ports (when set as Local) Fascia (Control Mode) USB Binary Inputs Binary Outputs Reporting Spontaneous IEC 103 DNP3 General Interrogation IEC 103 DNP3 MODBUS Changing of Settings Rear Ports (when set as Remote) Rear Ports (when set as Local) Fascia USB Historical Information Waveform Records Event Records Fault Information Setting Information REMOTE LOCAL OUT OF SERVICE Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Setting Option Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Setting Option Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Table 6-1 6.7 Operating Mode Control Mode This mode provides convenient access to commonly used relay control and test functions. When any of the items listed in the control menu are selected control is initiated by pressing the ENTER key. The user is prompted to confirm the action, again by pressing the ENTER key, before the command is executed. Control Mode commands are password protected using the Control Password function - see Section 6.10. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 58 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation 6.8 Real Time Clock Time and date can be set either via the relay fascia using appropriate commands in the System Config menu, via the data comms channel(s) or via the optional IRIG-B input. In order to maintain synchronism within a substation, the relay can be synchronised to the nearest second or minute using the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, optional IRIG-B input or binary input. The default date is set at 01/01/2000, this indicates that no date has been set. When editing the Time, only the hours and minutes can be edited. The seconds are zeroed by pressing ENTER and the clock begins running. The time and date are maintained while the relay is de-energised by a back up storage capacitor. The length of time for which this data will be maintained will depend on such things as temperature, length of time in service, etc. However the data will be maintained for a minimum of 1.8 days. 6.8.1 Time Synchronisation - Data Comms Where the data comms channel(s) is connected to a dedicated substation automation system the relay can be time synchronised using the relevant command within IEC 60870-5-103 or optional DNP3.0 protocols. The time can also be synchronised from `Reydisp Evolution' which utilises the communications support software. 6.8.2 Time Synchronisation - Binary Input A binary input can be mapped Clock Sync from BI. The seconds or minutes will be rounded up or down to the nearest value when the BI is energised. This input is leading edge triggered. 6.8.3 Time Synchronisation - IRIG-B (Optional) A BNC connector on the relay rear provides an isolated IRIG-B time synchronisation port. The IRIG-B input is compatible with a modulated 3-6 Volt signal and provides time synchronisation to the nearest millisecond. 6.9 Settings Groups The relay provides eight groups of settings - Group number (Gn) 1 to 8. At any one time only one group of settings can be `active' - SYSTEM CONFIG>Active Group setting. It is possible to edit one group while the relay operates in accordance with settings from another `active' group using the View/Edit Group setting. Some settings are independent of the active group setting i.e. they apply to all settings groups. This is indicated on the top line of the relay LCD - where only the Active Group No. is identified. Where settings are group dependent this is indicated on the top line of the LCD by both the Active Group No. and the View Group No. being displayed. A change of settings group can be achieved either locally at the relay fascia, remotely over the data comms channel(s) or via a binary input. When using a binary input an alternative settings group is selected only whilst the input is energised (Select Grp Mode: Level triggered) or latches into the selected group after energisation of the input (Select Grp Mode: Edge triggered). (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 59 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation 6.10 Password Feature The relay incorporates two levels of password protection - one for settings, the other for control functions. The programmable password feature enables the user to enter a 4 character alpha numeric code to secure access to the relay functions. The relay is supplied with the control password set to AAAA. The settings password is supplied set to NONE, i.e. the password feature is disabled. Passwords must be entered twice as a security measure against accidental change. Once a password has been entered then it will be required thereafter to change settings or initiate control commands. Passwords can be deactivated by using the password to gain access and by entering the password NONE. Again this must be entered twice to de-activate the security system. As soon as the user attempts to change a setting or initiate control the password is requested before any changes are allowed. Once the password has been validated, the user is `logged on' and any further changes can be made without re-entering the password. If no more changes are made within 1 hour then the user will automatically be `logged off', re-enabling the password feature. The Settings Password prevents unauthorised changes to settings from the front fascia or over the data comms channel(s). The Control Password prevents unauthorised operation of controls in the relay Control Menu from the front fascia. The password validation screen also displays a numerical code. If the password is lost or forgotten, this code should be communicated to Siemens Protection Devices Ltd. and the password can be retrieved. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 60 of 61 Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 61 of 61 Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide 7SR242 Duobias Multi-Function 2-Winding Transformer Protection Relay Settings, Configuration & Instruments Document Release History This document is issue 2017/08. The list of revisions up to and including this issue is: 2017/08 Software revision 2662H85001 R8c-7d 2013/01 Software revision 2662H85001 R7c-7b 2012/08 Addition of optional IEC 61850 communication protocol and Ethernet Interface. 2010/06 Additional Comms modules option of (RS485 + IRIG-B) and (RS232 + IRIG-B) and typographical revisions 2010/02 Document reformat due to rebrand 2010/02 Software revision 2662H80001 R4c-3 2008/07 Software revision 2662H80001R3d-2c. 2008/05 First issue The copyright and other intellectual property rights in this document, and in any model or article produced from it (and including any registered or unregistered design rights) are the property of Siemens Protection Devices Limited. No part of this document shall be reproduced or modified or stored in another form, in any data retrieval system, without the permission of Siemens Protection Devices Limited, nor shall any model or article be reproduced from this document unless Siemens Protection Devices Limited consent. While the information and guidance given in this document is believed to be correct, no liability shall be accepted for any loss or damage caused by any error or omission, whether such error or omission is the result of negligence or any other cause. Any and all such liability is disclaimed. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 2 of 22 Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide Contents Section 1: Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 5 1.1 Relay Menus And Display ....................................................................................................................... 5 1.2 Operation Guide ...................................................................................................................................... 6 1.2.1 User Interface Operation ........................................................................................................... 6 1.3 Settings Display ...................................................................................................................................... 8 1.4 Instruments Mode ................................................................................................................................... 8 1.5 Fault Data Mode ................................................................................................................................... 16 Section 2: Setting the Relay Using Reydisp ........................................................................................................... 17 2.1 Physical Connection ............................................................................................................................. 17 2.1.1 Front USB connection ............................................................................................................. 17 2.1.2 Rear RS485 connection .......................................................................................................... 18 2.1.3 Optional rear fibre optic connection ........................................................................................ 18 2.1.4 Optional rear RS485 + IRIG-B connection .............................................................................. 19 2.1.5 Optional rear RS232 + IRIG-B connection .............................................................................. 19 2.1.6 Optional Rear EN100 Ethernet Module (COM3) ..................................................................... 20 2.1.7 Configuring Relay Data Communication ................................................................................. 21 2.1.8 Connecting to the Relay via Reydisp ...................................................................................... 22 APPENDIX 1 7SR242 Settings List of Figures Figure 1-1 Figure 1-2 Figure 1-3 Figure 1-4 Figure 1-5 Figure 1-6 Figure 2-1 Figure 2-2 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-4 Figure 2-5 Menu ................................................................................................................................................. 5 Fascia Contrast symbol .................................................................................................................. 5 Fascia of 7SR242 Relay .................................................................................................................... 5 Relay Identifier Screen .................................................................................................................... 6 7SR24 Menu Structure ...................................................................................................................... 7 Schematic Diagram: Current and Voltage Meters (includes optional functionality) ......................... 12 USB connection to PC .................................................................................................................. 17 RS485 connection to PC ............................................................................................................... 18 Fibre Optic Connection to PC ...................................................................................................... 18 EN100 Ethernet Module .................................................................................................................. 20 PC Comms Port Allocation ........................................................................................................... 22 (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 3 of 22 Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 4 of 22 Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide Section 1: Introduction 1.1 Relay Menus And Display All relay fascias contain the same access keys although the fascias may differ in appearance from model to model. The basic menu structure is also the same in all products and consists of four main menus, these being, Settings Mode - allows the user to view and (if allowed via the settings mode password) change settings in the relay. Instruments Mode - allows the user to view the relay meters e.g. current, voltage etc. Fault Data Mode - allows the user to see type and data of any fault that the relay has detected. The menus can be viewed via the LCD by pressing the access keys as below, Pressing CANCEL returns to the Relay Identifier screen Relay Identifier CONTROL MODE TEST/ RESET TEST/ RESET SETTINGS MODE INSTRUMENTS MODE Figure 1-1 TEST/ RESET FAULT DATA MODE TEST/ RESET Menu LCD Contrast To adjust the contrast on the LCD insert a flat nosed screwdriver into the screw below the contrast symbol, turning the screw left or right decreases and increases the contrast of the LCD. Figure 1-2 Figure 1-3 (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Fascia Contrast symbol Fascia of 7SR242 Relay Chapter 2 Page 5 of 22 Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide 1.2 Operation Guide 1.2.1 User Interface Operation The basic menu structure flow diagram is shown in Figure 1.2-2. This diagram shows the main modes of display: Settings Mode, Instrument Mode, Fault Data Mode and Control Mode. When the relay leaves the factory all data storage areas are cleared and the settings set to default as specified in settings document. When the relay is first energised the user is presented with the following message: - Duobias 7SR242 _______________________________ ENTER to CONTROL Figure 1-4 Relay Identifier Screen On the factory default setup the relay LCD should display the relay identifier, on each subsequent power-on the screen that was showing prior to the last power-off will be displayed. The push-buttons on the fascia are used to display and edit the relay settings via the LCD, to display and activate the control segment of the relay, to display the relays instrumentation and Fault data and to reset the output relays and LED's. The five push-buttons have the following functions: READ DOWN READ UP These pushbuttons are used to navigate the menu structure and to adjust settings. ENTER ENTER The ENTER push-button is used to initiate and accept setting changes. When a setting is displayed pressing the ENTER key will enter the edit mode, the setting will flash and can now be changed using the or buttons. When the required value is displayed the ENTER button is pressed again to accept the change. When an instrument is displayed pressing ENTER will toggle the instruments favourite screen status. CANCEL CANCEL This push-button is used to return the relay display to its initial status or one level up in the menu structure. Pressed repeatedly will return to the Relay Identifier screen. It is also used to reject any alterations to a setting while in the edit mode. TEST/ RESET This push-button is used to reset the fault indication on the fascia. When on the Relay Identifier screen it also acts as a lamp test button, when pressed all LEDs will momentarily light up to indicate their correct operation. It is also moves the cursor right when navigating through menus and settings. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 6 of 22 Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide 7SR242 DUOBIAS __________________________ ENTER to CONTROL CONTROL MODE SETTINGS DISPLAY MODE INSTRUMENTS MODE CB1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FAVOURITE METERS CB2 CT/VT CONFIGURATION DIFFERENTIAL METERS E/F Protection FUNCTION CONFIG CURRENT METERS Set L or R DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION VOLTAGE METERS Set Remote CURRENT PROTECTION 51-1 51-2 50-1 50-2 FREQUENCY METERS 51N-1 51N-2 50N-2 50N-1 OVERFLUXING METERS 51G-1 51G-2 50G-2 50G-1 THERMAL METERS RESTRICTED E/F 64H-1 64H-2 MAINTENANCE METERS NPS OVERCURRENT 46IT 46DT PHASE OVERCURRENT Set Local DERIVED E/F Set Service MEASURED E/F FAULT DATA MODE Fault n DD/MM/YY GENERAL ALARM METERS UNDER CURRENT 37-1 37-2 37G-1 37G-2 DEMAND METERS THERMAL 46BC-1 46BC-2 OPEN CIRCUIT VOLTAGE PROTECTION PHASE U/O VOLTAGE NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE BINARY INPUT METERS 27/59-1 27/59-2 27/59-3 27/59-4 BINARY OUTPUT METERS 59NIT 59NDT VIRTUAL METERS U/O FREQUENCY COMMUNICATION METERS 24DT-1 24DT-2 24IT OVERFLUXING SUPERVISION 81-1 81-2 81-3 81-4 81-5 81-6 MISCELLANEOUS METERS INRUSH DETECTOR OVERFLUXING DETECTOR QUICK LOGIC METERS CB FAIL TRIP CCT SUPERVISION CLOSE CCT SUPERVISION CONTROL & LOGIC CB CONTROL QUICK LOGIC INPUT CONFIGURATION INPUT MATRIX BINARY INPUT CONFIG. GENERAL ALARMS OUTPUT CONFIGURATION OUTPUT MATRIX BINARY OUTPUT CONFIG LED CONFIG PICKUP CONFIG MAINTENANCE CB COUNTERS I2T CB WEAR DATA STORAGE COMMUNICATIONS Figure 1-5 (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 7SR24 Menu Structure Chapter 2 Page 7 of 22 Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide 1.3 Settings Display The Settings Mode is reached by pressing the READ DOWN button from the relay identifier screen. Once the Settings Mode title screen has been located pressing the READ DOWN button takes the user into the Settings mode sub-menus. Each sub-menu contains the programmable settings of the relay in separate logical groups. The sub menus are accessed by pressing the TEST/RESET button. Pressing the button will scroll through the settings, after the last setting in each sub menu is reached the next sub menu will be displayed. If a particular sub menu is not required to be viewed then pressing will move directly to the next one in the list. While a setting is being displayed on the screen the ENTER button can be pressed to edit the setting value. If the relay is setting password protected the user will be asked to enter the password. If an incorrect password is entered editing will not be permitted. All screens can be viewed even if the password is not known. While a setting is being edited flashing characters indicate the edit field. Pressing the or buttons will display the valid field values. If these buttons are held on, the rate of scrolling will increase. Once editing is complete pressing the ENTER button stores the new setting into the non-volatile memory. The setting change is effective immediately unless any protection element is operating, in which case the change becomes effective when no elements are operating. Configuration and inspection of communications protocol data objects, text used for display in international languages, graphical user logic and programming of user specific custom protection characteristics is not possible from the fascia and pc based tools must be used if required. The actual setting ranges and default values for each relay model can be found in the appendix to this section of the manual. 1.4 Instruments Mode The Instrument Mode sub-menu displays key quantities and information to aid with commissioning. The following meters are available and are navigated around by using the ,and TEST/REST buttons. Instrument FAVOURITE METERS to view Description This allows the user to view his previously constructed list of `favourite meters' by pressing TEST/RESET button and the READ DOWN button to scroll though the meters added to this sub-group To construct a sub-group of favourite meters, first go to the desired meter then press ENTER this will cause a message to appear on the LCD `Add To Favourites YES pressing ENTER again will add this to the FAVOURITE METERS Sub-menu. To remove a meter from the FAVOURITE METERS sub-menu go to that meter each in the FAVOURITE METERS sub-menu or at its Primary location press ENTER and the message `Remove From Favourites' will appear press ENTER again and this meter will be removed from the FAVOURITE METERS sub-group. The relay will poll through, displaying each of the meters selected in favourite meters, after no key presses have been detected for a user settable period of time. The time is set in the Setting menu>System Config>Favourite Meters Timer. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 8 of 22 Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide DIFFERENTIAL METERS This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with Current TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group to view W1 Line Ia Ib Ic W2 Line Ia Ib Ic W1 Relay Ia Ib Ic W2 Relay Ia Ib Ic Operate Ia Ib Ic Restrain Ia Ib Ic W1 1st Harmonic Ia Ib Ic nd W1 2 Harmonic Ia Ib Ic nd W1 5 Harmonic Ia Ib Ic W2 1st Harmonic nd W2 2 o 0.00xIn ---o 0.00xIn ---o 0.00xIn ---o 0.00xIn ---o 0.00xIn ---o 0.00xIn ---o 0.00xIn ---o 0.00xIn ---o 0.00xIn ---o 0.00xIn ---o 0.00xIn ---o 0.00xIn ---0.00xIn 0.00xIn 0.00xIn 0.00xIn 0.00xIn 0.00xIn 0.00xIn 0.00xIn 0.00xIn Displays Winding 1 Input 3 Phase currents Nominal RMS values & phase angles with respect to PPS voltage. Displays Winding 2 Input 3 Phase currents Nominal RMS values & phase angles with respect to PPS voltage. Displays Winding 1 relay currents Nominal RMS values & phase angles with respect to PPS voltage. Displays Winding 2 relay currents Nominal RMS values & phase angles with respect to PPS voltage. Displays the 3 phase operate currents' relevant to the biased differential (87BD) and highset differential (87HS) functions. Displays the 3 phase restrain currents relevant to the biased differential (87BD) function. Displays W1 3 phase fundamental current components Nominal RMS values. nd 0.00xIn 0.00xIn 0.00xIn 0.00xIn 0.00xIn 0.00xIn Displays W1 3 phase 2 Nominal RMS values. Displays W1 3 phase 5th Harmonic current components Nominal RMS values. See above. Harmonic See above. W2 5th Harmonic See above. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Harmonic current components Chapter 2 Page 9 of 22 Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide CURRENT METERS This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with Current TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group to view W1 Primary Ia Ib Ic W1 Secondary Ia Ib Ic W1 Nominal Ia Ib Ic W1 Sequence Izps Ipps Inps W1 Derived Earth (In) Ia Ib Ic W2 Primary Displays the 3 phase currents Primary RMS values 0.00kA 0.00kA 0.00kA Displays the 3 phase currents Secondary RMS values 0.00A 0.00A 0.00A o 0.00xIn ---o 0.00xIn ---o 0.00xIn ---o 0.00xIn ---o 0.00xIn ---o 0.00xIn ---kA A xIn Displays the 3 Phase currents Nominal RMS values & phase angles with respect to PPS voltage. Displays the 3 Phase currents Nominal RMS values & phase angles with respect to PPS voltage. Displays the Earth currents derived from W1 line currents. RMS values. See above. W2 Secondary See above. W2 Nominal See above. W2 Sequence See above. W2 Derived Earth (In) See above. Measured Earth - 1 (Ig) Ig Ig Ig Measured Earth - 2 (Ig) Ig Ig Ig Displays the Earth currents for IG1. RMS values 0.000kA 0.000A 0.000xIn Displays the Earth currents for IG2. RMS values 0.000kA 0.000A 0.000xIn (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 10 of 22 Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide VOLTAGE METERS This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with Voltage TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group to view Voltage Meters Pri (Ph-Ph) Sec Nom Displays the Voltage RMS values 0.00kV 0.00V 0.00xVn FREQUENCY METERS This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with Frequency TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group to view Frequency 00.000Hz OVERFLUXING METERS This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with Over-fluxing. TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group to view Overfluxing Meters V/f V V/f V/f 24IT Displays the over-fluxing values xVn xVn/fn % THERMAL METERS This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with Thermal TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group to view Thermal Status Phase A Phase B Phase C Displays the power system frequency. Displays the thermal capacity 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 11 of 22 Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide W1 Ia Line W1 Ia prim W1 Ia secy W1 Ia Nom. W1 1st Harm W1 2nd Harm W1 W1 5th Therm Harm W1 Ib Line W1 Ib prim W1 Ib secy W1 Ib Nom. W1 1st Harm W1 2nd Harm W1 W1 5th Therm Harm W1 Ic Line W1 Ic prim W1 Ic secy W1 Ic Nom. W1 1st Harm W1 2nd Harm W1 W1 5th Therm Harm W1 I Seq. W1 I EF Der. Meas Earth 1 ICT W1 Rel. Ia W1 Rel. Ib W1 Rel. Ic Ia Op. 7SR242n-2aAnn-0CA0 Ia Rest. Ib Op. Ib Rest. Ic Op. Ic Rest. W2 Rel. Ia Meas Earth 2 Figure 1-6 W2 Rel. Ib W2 Rel. Ic ICT W2 I Seq. W2 I EF Der. W2 Ic Line W2 Ic prim W2 Ic secy W2 Ic Nom. W2 1st Harm W2 2nd Harm W2 W2 5th Therm Harm W2 Ib Line W2 Ib prim W2 Ib secy W2 Ib Nom. W2 1st Harm W2 2nd Harm W2 W2 5th Therm Harm W2 Ia Line W2 Ia prim W2 Ia secy W2 Ia Nom. W2 1st Harm W2 2nd Harm W2 W2 5th Therm Harm V Prim V Secy V Nom. F V/F Schematic Diagram: Current and Voltage Meters (includes optional functionality) (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 12 of 22 Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide MAINTENANCE METERS This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with Maintenance TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group to view CB1 Manual Close Last Close CB1 Manual Open Last Open CB2 Manual Close Last Close CB2 Manual Open Last Open CB1 Total Trips Count Target CB1 Delta Trips Count Target CB2 Total Trips Count Target CB2 Delta Trips Count Target CB1 Wear Phase A Phase B Phase C CB2 Wear Phase A Phase B Phase C CB1 Trip Time Trip Time CB2 Trip Time Trip Time Displays the CB manual opening and closing times ms ms Displays the CB opening and closing times ms ms Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the CB 0 100 Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the CB 0 100 Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the CB 0 100 Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the CB 0 100 Displays the current measure of circuit breaker wear. 0.00MA^2s 0.00MA^2s 0.00MA^2s Displays the current measure of circuit breaker wear. 0.00MA^2s 0.00MA^2s 0.00MA^2s Displays the CB manual opening and closing times ms ms (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 13 of 22 Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide GENERAL ALARM METERS This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with the Binary inputs TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group to view General Alarms ALARM 1 General Alarms ALARM 2 General Alarms ALARM 3 General Alarms ALARM 4 General Alarms ALARM 5 General Alarms ALARM 6 General Alarms ALARM 7 General Alarms ALARM 8 General Alarms ALARM 9 General Alarms ALARM 10 General Alarms ALARM 11 General Alarms ALARM 12 Displays the state of General Alarm Cleared Cleared Cleared Cleared Cleared Cleared Cleared Cleared Cleared Cleared Cleared Cleared DEMAND METERS This is the sub-group that includes Demand meters. Values are available for user defined time periods. TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group to view Voltage Demand W1 I Phase A Demand W1 I Phase B Demand W1 I Phase C Demand W2 I Phase A Demand W2 I Phase B Demand W2 I Phase C Demand Frequency Demand Displays maximum, minimum and mean values BINARY INPUT METERS to view BI 1-8 BI 9-13 ---- ------- - (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with the Binary inputs TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group Displays the state of DC binary inputs 1 to 8 (The number of binary inputs may vary depending on model) Chapter 2 Page 14 of 22 Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide BINARY OUTPUT METERS This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with the Binary Outputs TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group to view BO 1-8 BO 9-14 ---- ------- -- Displays the state of DC binary Outputs 1 to 8. (The number of binary outputs may vary depending on model) VIRTUAL METERS This is the sub-group that shows the state of the virtual status inputs in the relay TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group to view V 1-8 V 9-16 ---- ------- ---- Displays the state of Virtual Outputs 1 to 16 (The number of virtual inputs will vary depending on model) COMMUNICATION METERS This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with Communications ports TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group to view COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 COM1 TRAFFIC Tx1 Rx1 Rx1 Errors COM2 TRAFFIC Tx2 Rx2 Rx2 Errors COM3 TRAFFIC Tx3 Rx3 Rx3 Errors COM4 TRAFFIC Tx4 Rx4 Rx4 Errors Displays which com ports are currently active Displays traffic on Com1 0 0 0 Displays traffic on Com2 0 0 0 Displays traffic on Com3 0 0 0 Displays traffic on Com4 0 0 0 MISCELLANEOUS METERS to view Date Time Waveform Recs Fault Recs DD/MM/YYYY HH:MM:SS 0 0 Event Recs Data Log Recs 0 0 (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited This is the sub-group that includes indication such as the relays time and date, the amount of fault and waveform records stored in the relay TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group This meter displays the date and time and the number of Fault records and Event records stored in the relay. The records stored in the relay can be cleared using the options in the Settings Menu>Data Storage function. Chapter 2 Page 15 of 22 Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide QUICK LOGIC METERS to view E 1-8 E 9-16 E1 Equation EQN TMR 0-0 CNT 0-1 En Equation 1.5 0 =0 =0 =0 Fault Data Mode The Fault Data Mode sub menu lists the time and date of the previous ten protection operations. The stored data about each fault can be viewed by pressing the TEST/RESET button. Each record contains data on the operated elements, analogue values and LED flag states at the time of the fault. The data is viewed by scrolling down using the button. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 16 of 22 Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide Section 2: Setting the Relay Using Reydisp Reydisp Evolution software provides a pc tool which can be used for programming of protection configuration and settings and the mapping of hardware input and outputs using a graphical interface. It is supplied with additional tools for configuration of serial communication protocol data objects, configuration of text for international language support and programming of user specific time current curves. To configure the relay using a serial communication port the user will need the following:PC with Reydisp Evolution Installed. (This can be download from our website www.siemens.com/energy and found under the submenu `Software'). Configuration and download of IEC 61850 data and programming of graphical user logic requires the use of the Reydisp Manager software which is supplied with online instructions and help and is not documented here. 2.1 Physical Connection The relay can be connected to Reydisp via any of the communication ports on the relay. Suitable communication Interface cable and converters are required depending which port is being used. 2.1.1 Front USB connection To connect your pc locally via the front USB port. USB Type A socket on PC USB Data Cable Local Engineer Access USB Type B USB Type A Figure 2-1 (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited USB connection to PC Chapter 2 Page 17 of 22 Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide 2.1.2 Rear RS485 connection USB or 9 pin male D connector 14 18 Laptop computer RS232 straight through cable or RS232 to USB converter cable RS485 Screened twisted pair 25 pin male D connector Figure 2-2 2.1.3 Rear terminals RS485 connection to PC Optional rear fibre optic connection 7SG244 USB or 9 pin male D connector Laptop computer RS232 straight through cable or RS232 to USB converter cable Figure 2-3 25 pin male D connector Tx Rx Rx Tx 62.5/125m fibre optic with ST connectors Fibre Optic Connection to PC Sigma devices have a 25 pin female D connector with the following pin out. Pin 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 Function Transmit Data Received Data Request to Send Clear to Send Data set ready Signal Ground Received Line Signal Detector Data Terminal Ready (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 18 of 22 Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide 2.1.4 Optional rear RS485 + IRIG-B connection IRIG-B COM 3 USB or 9 pin male D connector Gnd Term B A RS232 straight through cable or RS232 to USB converter cable Laptop computer Figure 2.1-1 2.1.5 RS485 Screened twisted pair Rear Connector 25 pin male D connector Additional (Optional) rear RS485 + IRIG-B connection to a PC Optional rear RS232 + IRIG-B connection IRIG-B COM 3 USB or 9 pin male D connector Laptop computer RS232 cross-over cable or RS232 to USB converter cable Figure 2.1-2 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 9 way D connector Additional (Optional) rear RS232 + IRIG-B connection to a PC Relay Function Not Connected Receive Data (RXD) Transmit Data (TXD) Outut Supply +5 V 50mA Signal Ground (GND) Input Supply +5 V 50mA Linked to 8 (volts free) Linked to 7 (volts free) Output Supply +5V 50mA (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 19 of 22 Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide 2.1.6 Optional Rear EN100 Ethernet Module (COM3) The optional ethernet interface is primarily provided for support of IEC 61850 protocol. Support for IEC 870-5-103 is also provided over this interface to allow connection with Reydisp Evolution and Reydisp Manager software for interrogation, editing and download of relay settings and other data. Ordering options are available with two RJ45 electrical connectors or with two duplex LC fibre optic connectors. Setting name Range Default LAN Protocol OFF, IEC60870-5-103 IEC60870-5-103 Setting Notes If this setting is set to Off, access to relay data using Reydisp Evolution and Reydisp Manager software via the Ethernet interface is not available. Connections to the optional EN100 ethernet module are made on the rear underside of the relay. Connections are made to either RJ45 sockets (electrical) or Duplex LC (fibre optic) connectors. Ethernet - EN100-E Ethernet - EN100-O Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 1 LED yellow LED yellow LED green Ch 2 LED green EN100 Module - RJ45 Interface EN100 Module - Duplex-LC Interface Green LED (Physical Link) Off - No link On - Link present Yellow LED (Activity) Off - No traffic On/flashing - Traffic Figure 2-4 (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited EN100 Ethernet Module Chapter 2 Page 20 of 22 Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide 2.1.7 Configuring Relay Data Communication Using the keys on the relay fascia scroll down the settings menu's into the `communications' menu. All of the below settings may not be available in all relay types. Reydisp software is compatible with IEC60870-5-103 protocol. COM1-RS485 Port COM2-USB Port (Front) COM3 - Optional Fibre Optic, RS485, RS232 or Ethernet Port COM4 - Optional Fibre Optic Port LAN - Optional Ethernet Ports Setting name Range Default Station Address 0 ... 65534 0 COM1-RS485 Protocol OFF, IEC60870-5-103, MODBUS-RTU, DNP3 IEC60870-5103 COM1-RS485 Mode Local,Remote, Local or Remote Remote COM1-RS485 Baud Rate 75 110 150 300 600 1200 19200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 COM1-RS485 Parity NONE, ODD, EVEN EVEN COM2-USB Protocol OFF, IEC60870-5-103, MODBUS-RTU, ASCII, DNP3 IEC60870-5103 COM2-USB Mode Local,Remote, Local or Remote Remote COM3 Protocol OFF, IEC60870-5-103, MODBUS-RTU, DNP3 IEC6-0870-5103 COM3 Baud Rate 75 110 150 300 600 1200 19200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 COM3 Parity NONE, ODD, EVEN EVEN COM3 Line Idle* LIGHT ON, LIGHT OFF LIGHT OFF COM3 Data echo* ON, OFF OFF COM4 Protocol** OFF, IEC60870-5-103, MODBUS-RTU, DNP3 OFF COM4 Baud Rate** 75 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 19200 38400 COM4 Parity** NONE, ODD, EVEN EVEN COM4 Line Idle** LIGHT ON, LIGHT OFF LIGHT OFF COM4 Data echo** ON, OFF OFF DNP3 Unsolicited Events ENABLED, DISABLED DISABLED (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Units Notes Address given to relay to identify that relay from others which may be using the same path for communication as other relays for example in a fibre optic hub COM1: Rear mounted RS485 port COM2: Front USB port. COM3: Optional rear mounted connection COM4: Optional rear mounted Fibre Optic ST connection Setting is only visible when a port protocol is set to DNP3. Chapter 2 Page 21 of 22 Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide Setting name Range Default DNP3 Destination Address 0 ... 65534 0 DNP3 Application Timeout 5, 6 ... 299, 300 10s Units Notes Setting is only visible when a port protocol is set to DNP3. Seconds Setting is only visible when a port Protocol is set to DNP3 *Not applicable for RS485 or RS232 interface modules. **Fibre Optic Module only 2.1.8 Connecting to the Relay via Reydisp When Reydisp software is running all available communication ports of the PC will automatically be detected. On the start page tool bar open up the sub-menu File > Connect. The `Communication Manager' window will display all available communication ports. With the preferred port highlighted, select the `Properties' option and ensure the baud rate and parity match that selected in the relay Data Comms settings. Select `Connect' to initiate the relay-PC connection. Figure 2-5 PC Comms Port Allocation Via the Relay > Set Address > Address set the relay address (1-254) or alternatively search for connected devices using the Relay > Set Address > Device Map. The relay can now be configured using the Reydisp software. Please refer to the Reydisp Evolution Manual for further guidance. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 22 of 22 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification 7SR242 Duobias Multi-Function 2-Winding Transformer Protection Relay Performance Specification Document Release History This document is issue 2017/08. The list of revisions up to and including this issue is: 2017/08 Software revision 2662H85001 R8c-7d 2015/11 7SR2424 data added - section 1.1.3 Time multiplier settings revised - sections 2.5, 2.10, 2.11 and 2.12. 2014/04 Revision to sections 1.2.11 and 2.16.2 2013/01 Software revision 2662H85001 R7c-7b 2012/08 Minor corrections and addition of optional IEC 61850 communication protocol. 2012/02 Clarification made to differential protection operate times, sections 2.16.3 and 2.17.3 2010/06 Additional Comms modules option of (RS485 + IRIG-B) and (RS232 + IRIG-B) and typographical revisions 2010/02 Document reformat due to rebrand 2010/02 Third issue. Software revision 2662H80001 R4c-3 2008/07 Second issue. Software revision 2662H80001R3d-2c. 2008/05 First issue The copyright and other intellectual property rights in this document, and in any model or article produced from it (and including any registered or unregistered design rights) are the property of Siemens Protection Devices Limited. No part of this document shall be reproduced or modified or stored in another form, in any data retrieval system, without the permission of Siemens Protection Devices Limited, nor shall any model or article be reproduced from this document unless Siemens Protection Devices Limited consent. While the information and guidance given in this document is believed to be correct, no liability shall be accepted for any loss or damage caused by any error or omission, whether such error or omission is the result of negligence or any other cause. Any and all such liability is disclaimed. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 2 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification Contents Section 1: Common Functions ................................................................................................................................. 7 1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................... 7 1.1.1 CE Conformity........................................................................................................................... 7 1.1.2 Reference ................................................................................................................................. 7 1.1.3 Dimensions and Weights .......................................................................................................... 7 1.2 Energising Quantities .............................................................................................................................. 8 1.2.1 Auxiliary Power Supply ............................................................................................................. 8 1.2.2 AC Current ................................................................................................................................ 9 1.2.3 AC Voltage .............................................................................................................................. 10 1.2.4 Binary (Digital) Outputs ........................................................................................................... 11 1.2.5 Binary (Digital) Inputs .............................................................................................................. 11 1.3 Functional Performance ........................................................................................................................ 13 1.3.1 Instrumentation ....................................................................................................................... 13 1.3.2 Data Communication .............................................................................................................. 13 1.3.3 Real Time Clock...................................................................................................................... 14 1.4 Environmental Performance.................................................................................................................. 15 1.4.1 General ................................................................................................................................... 15 1.4.2 Emissions................................................................................................................................ 16 1.4.3 Immunity ................................................................................................................................. 16 1.4.4 Mechanical .............................................................................................................................. 18 Section 2: Protection Functions ............................................................................................................................. 19 2.1 24 Over Fluxing ..................................................................................................................................... 19 2.1.1 Reference (24DT) ................................................................................................................... 19 2.1.2 Operate and Reset Level (24DT) ............................................................................................ 19 2.1.3 Operate and Reset Time (24DT)............................................................................................. 19 2.1.4 Reference (24IT) ..................................................................................................................... 19 2.1.5 Operate and Reset Level (24IT).............................................................................................. 19 2.1.6 Operate and Reset Time (24IT) .............................................................................................. 20 2.2 27/59 Under/Over Voltage .................................................................................................................... 21 2.2.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 21 2.2.2 Operate and Reset Level ........................................................................................................ 21 2.2.3 Operate and Reset Time ......................................................................................................... 21 2.3 37,37G Undercurrent ............................................................................................................................ 22 2.3.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 22 2.3.2 Operate and Reset Level ........................................................................................................ 22 2.3.3 Operate and Reset Time ......................................................................................................... 22 2.4 46BC Open Circuit ................................................................................................................................ 23 2.4.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 23 2.4.2 Operate and Reset Level ........................................................................................................ 23 2.4.3 Operate and Reset Time ......................................................................................................... 23 2.5 46NPS Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent ................................................................................... 24 2.5.1 Reference (46DT) ................................................................................................................... 24 2.5.2 Operate and Reset Level (46DT) ............................................................................................ 24 2.5.3 Operate and Reset Time (46DT)............................................................................................. 24 2.5.4 Reference (46IT) ..................................................................................................................... 24 2.5.5 Operate and Reset Level (46IT).............................................................................................. 24 2.5.6 Operate and Reset Time (46IT) .............................................................................................. 25 2.6 49 Thermal Overload ............................................................................................................................ 26 2.6.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 26 2.6.2 Operate and Reset Level ........................................................................................................ 26 2.6.3 Operate and Reset Time ......................................................................................................... 26 2.7 50 instantaneous overcurrent................................................................................................................ 28 2.7.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 28 2.7.2 Operate and Reset Level ........................................................................................................ 28 2.7.3 Operate and Reset Time ......................................................................................................... 28 2.8 50N instantaneous Derived Earth Fault ................................................................................................ 29 2.8.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 29 2.8.2 Operate and Reset Level ........................................................................................................ 29 2.8.3 Operate and Reset Time ......................................................................................................... 29 2.9 50G Instantaneous Measured Earth Fault ............................................................................................ 30 (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 3 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification 2.10 2.11 2.12 2.13 2.14 2.15 2.16 2.17 2.9.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 30 2.9.2 Operate and Reset Level ........................................................................................................ 30 2.9.3 Operate and Reset Time ......................................................................................................... 30 51 Time Delayed Overcurrent ............................................................................................................... 31 2.10.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 31 2.10.2 Operate and Reset Level ........................................................................................................ 31 2.10.3 Operate and Reset Time ......................................................................................................... 32 51N Time Delayed Derived Earth Fault................................................................................................. 33 2.11.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 33 2.11.2 Operate and Reset Level ........................................................................................................ 33 2.11.3 Operate and Reset Time ......................................................................................................... 34 51G Time Delayed Measured Earth Fault ............................................................................................. 35 2.12.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 35 2.12.2 Operate and Reset Level ........................................................................................................ 35 2.12.3 Operate and Reset Time ......................................................................................................... 36 59N Neutral Voltage Displacement ....................................................................................................... 40 2.13.1 Reference (59NDT) ................................................................................................................. 40 2.13.2 Operate and Reset Level (59NDT) ......................................................................................... 40 2.13.3 Operate and Reset Time (59NDT) .......................................................................................... 40 2.13.4 Reference (59NIT) .................................................................................................................. 40 2.13.5 Operate and Reset Level (59NIT) ........................................................................................... 40 2.13.6 Operate and Reset Time (59NIT)............................................................................................ 41 64H Restricted Earth Fault Protection ................................................................................................... 42 2.14.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 42 2.14.2 Operate and Reset Level ........................................................................................................ 42 2.14.3 Operate and Reset Time ......................................................................................................... 42 2.14.4 Harmonic Rejection................................................................................................................. 42 81Under/Over Frequency...................................................................................................................... 43 2.15.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 43 2.15.2 Operate and Reset Level ........................................................................................................ 43 2.15.3 Operate and Reset Time ......................................................................................................... 43 87 Biased Differential ............................................................................................................................ 44 2.16.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 44 2.16.2 Operate and Reset Level ........................................................................................................ 45 2.16.3 Operate Time .......................................................................................................................... 45 87HS High-Set Differential .................................................................................................................... 46 2.17.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 46 2.17.2 Operate and Reset Level ........................................................................................................ 46 2.17.3 Operate and Reset Time ......................................................................................................... 46 Section 3: Supervision Functions ........................................................................................................................... 47 3.1 50BF Circuit Breaker Fail ...................................................................................................................... 47 3.1.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 47 3.1.2 Operate and Reset Level ........................................................................................................ 47 3.1.3 Operate and Reset Time ......................................................................................................... 47 3.2 74TCS/CCS Trip/Close Circuit Supervision .......................................................................................... 48 3.2.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 48 3.2.2 Operate and Reset Time ......................................................................................................... 48 3.3 81HBL2 Inrush Detector........................................................................................................................ 49 3.3.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 49 3.3.2 Operate and Reset Level ........................................................................................................ 49 3.3.3 Operate and Reset Time ......................................................................................................... 49 3.4 81HBL5 Overfluxing Detector ............................................................................................................... 50 3.4.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 50 3.4.2 Operate and Reset Level ........................................................................................................ 50 3.4.3 Operate and Reset Time ......................................................................................................... 50 (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 4 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification List of Figures Figure 1-1: Binary Input Configurations Providing Compliance with EATS 48-4 Classes ESI 1 and ESI 2................................................................................................................................................ 12 Figure 2-1 Thermal Overload Protection Curves .............................................................................................. 27 Figure 2-2 IEC IDMTL Curves (Time Multiplier=1)............................................................................................ 37 Figure 2-3 ANSI IDMTL Operate Curves (Time Multiplier=1) ........................................................................... 38 Figure 2-4 ANSI Reset Curves (Time Multiplier=1)........................................................................................... 39 (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 5 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 6 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification Section 1: Common Functions 1.1 General 1.1.1 CE Conformity This product is CE compliant to relevant EU directives. 1.1.2 Reference 1.1.2.1 Accuracy Reference Conditions This product has been tested under the following conditions, unless specifically stated otherwise. Parameter Value Auxiliary supply Nominal AC Voltage Nominal AC Current Nominal Frequency Nominal Ambient temperature 20 C 1.1.3 Dimensions and Weights 1.1.3.1 Dimensions Parameter Width Value 7SR2422, E8 case 208 mm 7SR2423, E10 case 260 mm 7SR2424, E12 case 312 mm Height 177 mm Depth behind panel (including clearance for wiring and fibre) 241.5 mm Projection (from front of panel) 31 mm See appropriate case outline and panel drilling drawing, as specified in Diagrams and Parameters document, for complete dimensional specifications. 1.1.3.2 Weights Parameter Net weight Value 7SR2422, E8 case 5.2 kg 7SR2423, E10 case 6.8 kg 7SR2424, E12 case 8.4 kg Additional weights to the above (typical):Optional fibre optic, RS485 or RS232 communication interface: add 0.165 kg. Optional EN100 Ethernet communication interface: add 0.5 kg. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 7 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification 1.2 Energising Quantities 1.2.1 Auxiliary Power Supply 1.2.1.1 Nominal V AUX 1.2.1.2 Rating Operating Range 30, 48, 110, 220 VDC 24 to 290 VDC Burden Battery loading can be estimated from the following approximate figures: Attribute Watts 30V 48V 110V 220V Quiescent Relay (inc. `PROT HEALTHY' LED) 6.0 5.7 5.0 4.9 Backlight 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 Each LED 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 LED - Yellow Each LED 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 Binary Output Each Output 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 Optional F.O. / RS485 / RS232 Data Comms Interface 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 Optional IEC 61850 Comms Interface 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 LED - Red or Green) (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 8 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification 1.2.2 AC Current Nominal Measuring Range In 1, 5 A Phase and earth 80 x In fn 50, 60Hz 47 to 62Hz Note. 1 A and 5 A nominal inputs are user selectable on each model. 1.2.2.1 Burden Value - Phase and Earth Attribute AC Burden 1.2.2.2 1A 5A 0.1 VA 0.3 VA Thermal Withstand Current Overload Period Phase and Earth 1A 5A Continuous 3.0 x In 10 minutes 3.5 x In 5 minutes 4.0 x In 3 minutes 5.0 x In 2 minutes 6.0 x In 3 seconds 57.7A 202A 2 seconds 70.7A 247A 1 second 100A 350A 1 cycle 700A 2500A (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 9 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification 1.2.3 AC Voltage Nominal Operating Range Vn 40 to 160 V Up to 270 V fn 50, 60Hz 47 to 62Hz 1.2.3.1 Attribute Burden AC Burden 1.2.3.2 Thermal Withstand Overload Period Continuous (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Value 0.1 VA at 110 V Voltage 300 V RMS Chapter 3 Page 10 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification 1.2.4 Binary (Digital) Outputs Contact rating to IEC 60255-0-2 Attribute Value Carry continuously 5A AC or DC Make and carry (L/R 40 ms and V 300 V) Break ( 5 A and 300 V) for 0.5 s 20A AC or DC for 0.2 s 30A AC or DC AC resistive 1250 VA AC inductive 250 VA at p.f. 0.4 DC resistive 75 W DC inductive 30 W at L/R 40ms 50 W at L/R 10ms Contact Operate / Release Time 6ms / 3ms Minimum number of operations 1000 at maximum load Minimum recommended load 0.5 W at minimum of 10mA or 5V 1.2.5 Binary (Digital) Inputs Nominal V BI 1.2.5.1 Attribute Operating Range 19 VDC 17 to 290 VDC 88 VDC 74 to 290 VDC Performance Maximum DC current for operation Value V BI = 19 V 1.5mA V BI = 88 V 1.5mA Reset/Operate voltage ratio 90 % Response time < 7ms Response time when programmed to energise an output relay contact (i.e. includes output relay operation) < 20ms The binary inputs are opto couplers having a low minimum operate current and may be set for high speed operation. Where a binary input is both used to influence a control function (e.g. provide a tripping function) and it is considered to be susceptible to mal-operation due to capacitive currents, the external circuitry can be modified to provide immunity to such disturbances. To comply with EATS 48-4, classes ESI 1 and ESI 2, external components / BI pick-up delays are required as shown in fig. 1-1. To achieve immunity from AC interference, a BI pick-up delay of typically one-cycle can be applied. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 11 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification ESI-1 + 470 + ESI-2 30V DC Nominal (24 - 37.5V Operative) IOP > 10mA 220 30V DC Nominal (24 - 37.5V Operative) IOP > 20mA BI (19V) 1K5 BI (19V) 820 - + 1K6 - + 48V DC Nominal (37.5 - 60V Operative) IOP > 10mA 820 48V DC Nominal (37.5 - 60V Operative) IOP > 20mA BI (19V) BI (19V) 820 1K5 - - BI DTL = 10ms (10F, 60V Capacitance discharge) + 2K0 110V DC Nominal (87.5 - 137.5V Operative) IOP > 25mA + 110V DC Nominal (87.5 - 137.5V Operative) IOP > 50mA 1K2 BI (19V) BI (19V) 560 330 - - BI DTL = 10ms (10F, 150V Capacitance discharge) + 110V DC Nominal (87.5 - 137.5V Operative) IOP > 25mA + 110V DC Nominal (87.5 - 137.5V Operative) IOP > 50mA BI (88V) BI (88V) 1K3 2K7 - - BI DTL = 10ms (10F, 150V Capacitance discharge) Resistor power ratings: 30V DC Nominal 48V DC Nominal 110V DC Nominal 110V DC Nominal >3W >3W >10W (ESI- 1) >20W (ESI-2) Resistors must be wired with crimped connections as they may run hot Figure 1-1: Binary Input Configurations Providing Compliance with EATS 48-4 Classes ESI 1 and ESI 2 (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 12 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification 1.3 Functional Performance 1.3.1 Instrumentation Instrument Value Reference Typical accuracy I Current 0.1In to 2.0In 1 % or 1 % In V Voltage 0.1Vn to 1.2Vn 1 % or 1 % Vn 1.3.2 Data Communication 1.3.2.1 Attribute USB Data Communication Interface Value Physical layer Electrical Connectors USB-Type B 1.3.2.2 Attribute Fibre optic Data Communication Interface (Optional Rear Mounted Port COM3 / COM4) Value Physical layer Fibre-optic Connectors ST Recommended fibre 62.5/125 m glass fibre with ST connector Optical wavelength 820nm Launch power (into recommended fibre) -16 dBm Receiver sensitivity -24 dBm 1.3.2.3 Attribute TM (BFOC/2.5) RS485 Data Communication Interface (Standard Rear Port) Value Physical layer Electrical Connectors 4mm Ring Crimp 1.3.2.4 Attribute RS485 Data Communication Interface (Optional Rear Mounted Port COM3) Value Physical layer Electrical Connectors 4-way Plug 1.3.2.5 Attribute RS232 Data Communication Interface (Optional Rear Mounted Port COM3)) Value Physical layer Electrical Connectors 9-way D-plug (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 13 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification 1.3.2.6 Attribute Fibre Optic Ethernet Data Communication Interface (IEC 61850 Option) Value Physical Layer Fibre Optic Connectors Duplex LC 100BaseF in acc. With IEEE802.3 Recommended Fibre 62.5/125 m glass fibre with Duplex-LC connector Transmission Speed 100MBit/s Optical Wavelength 1300nm Bridgeable distance 2km 1.3.2.7 Attribute Electrical Ethernet Data Communication Interface (IEC 61850 Option) Value Physical Layer Electrical Connectors RJ45 100BaseF in acc. With IEEE802.3 Transmission Speed 100MBit/s Test Voltage (with regard to socket) 500 VAC 50 Hz Bridgeable distance 20m 1.3.3 Real Time Clock 1.3.3.1 Internal Clock The specification below applies only while no external synchronisation signal (e.g. IRIG-B, IEC 60870-5-103) is being received. Attribute Value o Accuracy (-40 to +85 C) 1.3.3.2 Attribute 3.5 ppm (No auxiliary supply connected) 100 ppm (Auxiliary supply connected) IRIG-B Value Connector BNC Signal Type IRIG-B 120, 122 or 123 Applied signal level minimum 3 V, maximum 6 V, peak-to-peak Signal : carrier ratio 3 Input Impedance 4k Ohms Approx. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 14 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification 1.4 Environmental Performance 1.4.1 General 1.4.1.1 Temperature IEC 60068-2-1/2 Type Level Operating range -10 C to +55 C Storage range -25 C to +70 C 1.4.1.2 Humidity IEC 60068-2-78 Type Operational test 1.4.1.3 Level Between all terminals and earth, or between any two independent circuits 5.0 kV, 1.2/50 s 0.5j Insulation IEC 60255-5 Type Level Between any terminal and earth Between independent circuits Across normally open contacts 1.4.1.5 56 days at 40 C and 93 % relative humidity Transient Overvoltage IEC 60255-5 Type 1.4.1.4 Level 2.0 kV AC RMS for 1 min 1.0 kV AC RMS for 1 min Enclosure Protection IEC 60529 Type Level Installed with cover on IP 51 from front Installed with cover removed IP 20 from front (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 15 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification 1.4.2 Emissions IEC 60255-25 1.4.2.1 Type Radiated Radio Frequency Limits at 10 m, Quasi-peak 30 to 230 MHz 40 dB(V/m) 230 to 10000 MHz 47 dB(V/m) 1.4.2.2 Conducted Radio Frequency Limits Type Quasi-peak Average 0.15 to 0.5 MHz 79 dB(V) 66 dB(V) 0.5 to 30 MHz 73 dB(V) 60 dB(V) 1.4.3 1.4.3.1 Immunity Auxiliary DC Supply Variation Quantity Value Allowable superimposed ac component 12% of DC voltage Allowable breaks/dips in supply (collapse to zero from nominal voltage) 20ms 1.4.3.2 High Frequency Disturbance IEC 60255-22-1 Type Level Variation Case, Aux Power & I/O common (longitudinal) mode 2.5 kV Case, Aux Power & I/O Series (transverse) mode 1.0 kV RS485 Metallic Comms 1.0kV No data loss Level Variation 8.0 kV 5% Level Variation 10 V/m 5% 1.4.3.3 Electrostatic Discharge IEC 60255-22-2 Class IV Type Contact discharge 1.4.3.4 10 % Radiated Immunity IEC 60255-22-3 Class III Type 80 MHz to 1000 MHz (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 16 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification 1.4.3.5 Electrical Fast Transient / Burst Immunity IEC 60255-22-4 Class A (2002) Type Level Variation Case, Aux Power & I/O 4.0 kV 10 % RS485 Metallic Comms 2.0 kV No data loss Level Variation 1.4.3.6 Surge Immunity IEC 60255-22-5, IEC 61000-4-5 Type Analog Inputs Line to Earth 4.0 kV Case, Aux Power & I/O Line to Earth 2.0 kV Analog Inputs Line to Line 1.0 kV Case, Aux Power & I/O Line to Line 1.0 kV* RS485 Comms port Line to Earth 1.0 kV No data loss IEC 60255-22-6 Type Level Variation 0.15 to 80 MHz 10 V 5% 10 % * Note 45ms pick up delay applied to binary inputs 1.4.3.7 1.4.3.8 Conducted Radio Frequency Interference Magnetic Field with Power Frequency IEC 6100-4-8 Level 5 100A/m, (0.126mT) continuous 1000A/m, (1.26mT) for 3s (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 50Hz Chapter 3 Page 17 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification 1.4.4 Mechanical 1.4.4.1 Vibration (Sinusoidal) IEC 60255-21-1 Class I Type Level Vibration response 0.5 gn Vibration endurance 1.0 gn 1.4.4.2 Variation 5% Shock and Bump IEC 60255-21-2 Class I Type Level Variation Shock response 5 gn, Shock withstand 15 gn, 11 ms Bump test 10 gn, 16 ms 1.4.4.3 5% Seismic IEC 60255-21-3 Class I Type Seismic response 1.4.4.4 Type Durability 11 ms Level Variation 1 gn 5% Mechanical Classification (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Level 6 > 10 operations Chapter 3 Page 18 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification Section 2: Protection Functions 2.1 2.1.1 24 Over Fluxing Reference (24DT) Parameter Value V/f s Setting 0.10, 0.11... 2.0 x Nominal Voltage / Nominal Frequency Hyst Hysteresis setting 0, 0.1... 80.0% td Delay setting 0.00, 0.01...20.00, 20.50... 100, 101... 1000, 1010... 10000, 10100... 14400 s 2.1.2 V/f op 2.1.3 Operate and Reset Level (24DT) Attribute Value Operate level 100% x V/f s , 2 % or 0.02 Reset level 95% of V/f op Repeatability 1% Variation 5% -10 C to +55 C Operate and Reset Time (24DT) Attribute Value 0.9 to 1.1 x V/f s : 400 ms 200ms t basic Element basic operate time t op Operate time following delay t basic + t d , 1 % or 200ms Repeatability 1% Disengaging time < 250ms 2.1.4 t reset 2.1.5 V/f op 0.9 to 2.0 x V/f s : 320 ms 200ms Reference (24IT) Parameter Value Reset setting 0, 1... 1000 s Operate and Reset Level (24IT) Attribute Value Operate level 100% x V/f s , 2 % or 0.02 Reset level 95% of V/f op Repeatability 1% Variation 5% -10 C to +55 C (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 19 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification 2.1.6 Operate and Reset Time (24IT) Attribute Value t basic Element basic operate time 500ms 300ms t op Operate time following delay t basic + t d , 1 % or 2s Repeatability 1% Disengaging time < 250ms (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 20 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification 2.2 27/59 Under/Over Voltage 2.2.1 Reference Parameter Value Vs Setting 5, 5.5...200V hyst Hysteresis setting 0, 0.1... 80.0% td Delay setting 0.00, 0.01...20.00, 20.50... 100, 101... 1000, 1010... 10000, 10100... 14400 s 2.2.2 Operate and Reset Level Attribute V op Value 100 % Vs, 1 % or 0.25V Operate level Reset level Overvoltage = (100 % - hyst) x V op, 1 % Undervoltage = (100 % + hyst) x V op, 1 % 1% Repeatability Variation 2.2.3 -10 C to +55 C f nom - 3 Hz to f nom + 2 Hz 5 % Operate and Reset Time Attribute t basicE Element basic operate time Value Overvoltage Undervoltage t op 5% 0 to 1.1 x Vs: 73 ms 10ms 0 to 2.0 xVs: 63 ms 10ms 1.1 to 0.5 xVs: 58 ms 10ms Operate time following delay t basic + t d , 1 % or 10ms Repeatability 1 % or 10ms Disengaging time < 80 ms (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 21 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification 2.3 37,37G Undercurrent 2.3.1 Reference Parameter Value Is 37-n Setting 0.05, 0.10...5.0 xIn td 37-n Delay setting 0.00, 0.01...20.00, 20.50... 100, 101... 1000, 1010... 10000, 10100... 14400 s Is 37-n U/I Guard Setting 0.05, 0.10...5.0 xIn Parameter Value Is 37G-n Setting 0.05, 0.10...5.0 xIn td 37G-n Delay setting 0.00, 0.01...20.00, 20.50... 100, 101... 1000, 1010... 10000, 10100... 14400 s 2.3.2 I op Operate and Reset Level Attribute Value Operate level 100 % Is, 5 % or 1% In Reset level 105 % I op Repeatability 1% Variation 2.3.3 -10 C to +55 C 5% f nom - 3 Hz to f nom + 2 Hz 5 % Operate and Reset Time Attribute Value t basic Element basic operate time 1.1 to 0.5 xIs: 35 ms, 10ms t op Operate time following delay t basic + t d , 1 % or 10ms Repeatability 1 % or 10ms Overshoot time < 40 ms Disengaging time < 60 ms (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 22 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification 2.4 2.4.1 46BC Open Circuit Reference Parameter Value I set NPS to PPS ratio 20,21...100% tf Delay setting 0.03,04,20.0,20.1,100,101,1000,1010.....14400 s Is 46BC-n U/I Guard Setting 0.05, 0.10...5.0 xIn 2.4.2 I curr I op Operate and Reset Level Attribute Value Operate level: NPS to PPS ratio 100 % I set 5 % Reset level 90 % I curr , 5 % Repeatability 1% Variation -10 C to +55 C 5% f nom - 3 Hz to f nom + 2 Hz 5% harmonics to f cutoff Attribute Value Operate level: 46BC-n U/I Guard Setting 100 % Is, 5 % or 1% In Reset level 105 % I op Repeatability 1% Variation 2.4.3 t basic -10 C to +55 C 5% f nom - 3 Hz to f nom + 2 Hz 5 % Operate and Reset Time Attribute Basic operate time 1x In to 0 A Operate time Value 40 ms t f + t basic , 1 % or 20ms Repeatability 1 % or 20ms f nom - 3 Hz to f nom + 2 Hz 5% Variation harmonics to f cutoff (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 23 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification 2.5 46NPS Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent 2.5.1 Reference (46DT) Parameter Value Is Setting 0.05, 0.06... 4.0xIn td Delay setting 0.00, 0.01...20.00, 20.50... 100, 101... 1000, 1010... 10000, 10100... 14400 s 2.5.2 I op Operate and Reset Level (46DT) Attribute Value Operate level 100 % Is, 5 % or 1% In Reset level 95 % I op Repeatability 1% Transient overreach (X/R 100) -5 % Variation 2.5.3 5% -10 C to +55 C f nom - 3 Hz to f nom + 2 Hz 5 % Operate and Reset Time (46DT) Attribute Value 0 to 2 xIs: 40 ms, 10ms t basic Element basic operate time t op Operate time following delay t basic + t d , 1 % or 10ms Repeatability 1 % or 10ms Overshoot time <40 ms Disengaging time < 60 ms 2.5.4 0 to 5 xIs: 30 ms, 10ms Reference (46IT) Parameter Value char Characteristic setting IEC-NI, -VI, -EI, -LTI; ANSI-MI, -VI, -EI; DTL Tm Time Multiplier setting 0.025, 0.030... 1.6, 1.7... 5, 6... 100 Is Setting 0.05, 0.06... 2.5xIn td Delay setting 0, 0.01... 20 s t res Reset setting ANSI DECAYING, 0, 1... 60 s 2.5.5 I op Operate and Reset Level (46IT) Attribute Value Operate level 105 % Is, 4 % or 1% In Reset level 95 % I op Repeatability 1% Variation -10 C to +55 C 5% f nom - 3 Hz to f nom + 2 Hz 5 % (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 24 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification 2.5.6 Operate and Reset Time (46IT) Attribute Value Starter operate time ( 2xIs) 35 ms, 10ms t op = char = IEC-NI, IEC-VI, IEC-EI, IEC-LTI t op Operate time char = ANSI-MI, ANSI-VI, ANSI-EI char = DTL [IsI ] - 1 for char = t op = ANSI DECAYING x Tm , 5 % absolute or 50 ms, IEC-NI : IEC-VI : IEC-EI : IEC-LTI : A [IsI ]P K = 0.14, = 0.02 K = 13.5, = 1.0 K = 80.0, = 2.0 K = 120.0, = 1.0 + B x Tm , 5 % absolute or 50 ms, -1 for char = ANSI-MI : A = 0.0515, B = 0.114, P = 0.02 ANSI-VI : A = 19.61, B = 0.491, P = 2.0 ANSI-EI : A = 28.2, B = 0.1217, P = 2.0 t d , 1 % or 20ms t res = Reset time K R [] I 2 Is -1 x Tm , 5 % absolute or 50 ms, for char = ANSI-MI : R = 4.85 ANSI-VI : R = 21.6 ANSI-EI : R = 29.1 t res t res , 1 % or 20ms Repeatability 1 % or 20ms Overshoot time < 40 ms Disengaging time < 60 ms (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 25 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification 2.6 49 Thermal Overload 2.6.1 Reference Parameter Value Is Overload setting 0.10, 0.11... 3 xIn Time constant setting 1, 1.5... 1000 min 2.6.2 I ol Operate and Reset Level Attribute Value Overload level 100 % Is, 5 % or 1% In Reset level 95 % I ol Repeatability 1% Variation 2.6.3 -10 C to +55 C f nom - 3 Hz to f nom + 2 Hz 5 % Operate and Reset Time Attribute t op 5% Overload trip operate time Value I 2 - I 2P t = x ln 2 2 I - (k x I B ) 5 % absolute or 100ms, (Is: 0.3 - 3 x In) where I P = prior current Repeatability 100ms Figure 2-1 shows the thermal curves for various time constants. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 26 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification 100000 10000 = 1000 mins 1000 Time (sec) = 100 mins 100 = 10 mins 10 = 1 min 1 0.1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Current (multiple of setting) Figure 2-1 (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Thermal Overload Protection Curves Chapter 3 Page 27 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification 2.7 50 instantaneous overcurrent 2.7.1 Reference Parameter Value Is Setting 0.05, 0.10... 25, 25.5... 50 xIn td Delay setting 0.00, 0.01...20.00, 20.50... 100, 101... 1000, 1010... 10000, 10100... 14400 s 2.7.2 I op Operate and Reset Level Attribute Value Operate level 100 % Is, 5 % or 1% In Reset level 95 % I op Repeatability 1% Transient overreach (X/R 100) -5 % Variation 2.7.3 -10 C to +55 C 5% f nom - 3 Hz to f nom + 2 Hz 5 % Operate and Reset Time Attribute Value 0 to 2 xIs: 35 ms, 10ms t basic Element basic operate time t op Operate time following delay t basic + t d , 1 % or 10ms Repeatability 1 % or 10ms Overshoot time < 40 ms Disengaging time < 50 ms (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 0 to 5 xIs: 25 ms, 10ms Chapter 3 Page 28 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification 2.8 50N instantaneous Derived Earth Fault 2.8.1 Reference Parameter Value Is Setting 0.05, 0.10... 25, 25.5... 50 xIn td Delay setting 0.00, 0.01...20.00, 20.50... 100, 101... 1000, 1010... 10000, 10100... 14400 s 2.8.2 I op Operate and Reset Level Attribute Value Operate level 100 % Is, 5 % or 1% In Reset level 95 % I op Repeatability 1% Transient overreach (X/R 100) -5 % Variation 2.8.3 -10 C to +55 C 5% f nom - 3 Hz to f nom + 2 Hz 5 % Operate and Reset Time Attribute Value 0 to 2 xIs: 35 ms, 10ms t basic Element basic operate time t op Operate time following delay t basic + t d , 1 % or 10ms Repeatability 1 % or 10ms Overshoot time < 40 ms Disengaging time < 50 ms (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 0 to 5 xIs: 30 ms, 10ms Chapter 3 Page 29 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification 2.9 50G Instantaneous Measured Earth Fault 2.9.1 Reference Parameter Value Is Setting 0.005...25.0 xIn td Delay setting 0.00, 0.01...20.00, 20.50... 100, 101... 1000, 1010... 10000, 10100... 14400 s 2.9.2 I op Operate and Reset Level Attribute Value Operate level 100 % Is, 5 % or 1% In Reset level 95 % I op Repeatability 1% Transient overreach (X/R 100) -5 % Variation 2.9.3 -10 C to +55 C 5% f nom - 3 Hz to f nom + 2 Hz 5 % Operate and Reset Time Attribute Value 0 to 2 xIs: 35 ms, 10ms t basic Element basic operate time t op Operate time following delay t basic + t d , 1 % or 10ms Repeatability 1 % or 10ms Overshoot time < 40 ms Disengaging time < 50 ms (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 0 to 5 xIs: 25 ms, 10ms Chapter 3 Page 30 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification 2.10 51 Time Delayed Overcurrent 2.10.1 Reference Parameter Value Is Setting 0.05, 0.1... 2.5 xIn char Characteristic setting IEC-NI, -VI, -EI, -LTI; ANSI-MI, -VI, -EI; DTL Tm Time Multiplier setting 0.025, 0.030... 1.6, 1.7... 5, 6... 100 td Delay setting 0, 0.01... 20 s t res Reset setting ANSI DECAYING, 0, 1... 60 s 2.10.2 Operate and Reset Level I op Attribute Value Operate level 105 % Is, 4 % or 1% In Reset level 95 % I op Repeatability 1% Variation -10 C to +55 C 5% f nom - 3 Hz to f nom + 2 Hz 5 % (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 31 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification 2.10.3 Operate and Reset Time Attribute Value Starter operate time ( 2xIs) 20 ms, 20ms t op = char = IEC-NI, IEC-VI, IEC-EI, IEC-LTI t op Operate time char = ANSI-MI, ANSI-VI, ANSI-EI char = DTL [IsI ] - 1 for char = t op = ANSI DECAYING x Tm , 5 % absolute or 30 ms, IEC-NI : IEC-VI : IEC-EI : IEC-LTI : A [IsI ]P K = 0.14, = 0.02 K = 13.5, = 1.0 K = 80.0, = 2.0 K = 120.0, = 1.0 + B x Tm , 5 % absolute or 30 ms, -1 for char = ANSI-MI : A = 0.0515, B = 0.114, P = 0.02 ANSI-VI : A = 19.61, B = 0.491, P = 2.0 ANSI-EI : A = 28.2, B = 0.1217, P = 2.0 t d , 1 % or 20ms t res = Reset time K R [] I 2 Is -1 x Tm , 5 % absolute or 30 ms, for char = ANSI-MI : R = 4.85 ANSI-VI : R = 21.6 ANSI-EI : R = 29.1 t res t res , 1 % or 20ms Repeatability 1 % or 20ms Overshoot time < 40 ms Disengaging time < 50 ms Figure 2-2 shows the operate times for the four IEC IDMTL curves with a time multiplier of 1. Figure 2-3 and figure 2.4 show the ANSI operate and reset curves. These operate times apply to non-directional characteristics. Where directional control is applied then the directional element operate time should be added to give total maximum operating time. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 32 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification 2.11 51N Time Delayed Derived Earth Fault 2.11.1 Reference Parameter Value Is Setting 0.05, 0.1... 2.5 xIn char Characteristic setting IEC-NI, -VI, -EI, -LTI; ANSI-MI, -VI, -EI; DTL Tm Time Multiplier setting 0.025, 0.030... 1.6, 1.7... 5, 6... 100 td Delay setting 0, 0.01... 20 s t res Reset setting ANSI DECAYING, 0, 1... 60 s 2.11.2 Operate and Reset Level I op Attribute Value Operate level 105 % Is, 4 % or 1% In Reset level 95 % I op Repeatability 1% Variation -10 C to +55 C 5% f nom - 3 Hz to f nom + 2 Hz 5 % (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 33 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification 2.11.3 Operate and Reset Time Attribute Value Starter operate time ( 2xIs) 20 ms, 20ms t op = char = IEC-NI, IEC-VI, IEC-EI, IEC-LTI t op Operate time char = ANSI-MI, ANSI-VI, ANSI-EI char = DTL [IsI ] - 1 for char = t op = ANSI DECAYING x Tm , 5 % absolute or 30 ms, IEC-NI : IEC-VI : IEC-EI : IEC-LTI : A [IsI ]P K = 0.14, = 0.02 K = 13.5, = 1.0 K = 80.0, = 2.0 K = 120.0, = 1.0 + B x Tm , 5 % absolute or 30 ms, -1 for char = ANSI-MI : A = 0.0515, B = 0.114, P = 0.02 ANSI-VI : A = 19.61, B = 0.491, P = 2.0 ANSI-EI : A = 28.2, B = 0.1217, P = 2.0 t d , 1 % or 20ms t res = Reset time K R [] I 2 Is -1 x Tm , 5 % absolute or 30 ms, for char = ANSI-MI : R = 4.85 ANSI-VI : R = 21.6 ANSI-EI : R = 29.1 t res t res , 1 % or 20ms Repeatability 1 % or 20ms Overshoot time < 40 ms Disengaging time < 50 ms Figure 2-2 shows the operate times for the four IEC IDMTL curves with a time multiplier of 1. Figure 2-3 and figure 2.4 show the ANSI operate and reset curves. These operate times apply to non-directional characteristics. Where directional control is applied then the directional element operate time should be added to give total maximum operating time. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 34 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification 2.12 51G Time Delayed Measured Earth Fault 2.12.1 Reference Parameter Value Is Setting 0.005, 0.10... 1.0 xIn Char Characteristic setting IEC-NI, -VI, -EI, -LTI; ANSI-MI, -VI, -EI; DTL Tm Time Multiplier setting 0.025, 0.030... 1.6, 1.7... 5, 6... 100 td Delay setting (DTL) 0, 0.01... 20 s t res Reset setting ANSI DECAYING, 0, 1... 60 s I Applied current (for operate time) IDMTL 2 to 20 xIs DTL 5 xIs 2.12.2 Operate and Reset Level I op Attribute Value Operate level 105 % Is, 4 % or 1% In Reset level 95 % I op Repeatability 1% Variation -10 C to +55 C 5% f nom - 3 Hz to f nom + 2 Hz 5 % (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 35 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification 2.12.3 Operate and Reset Time Attribute Value Starter operate time ( 2xIs) 20 ms, 20ms t op = char = IEC-NI, IEC-VI, IEC-EI, IEC-LTI t op Operate time char = ANSI-MI, ANSI-VI, ANSI-EI char = DTL [IsI ] - 1 for char = t op = ANSI DECAYING x Tm , 5 % absolute or 30 ms, IEC-NI : IEC-VI : IEC-EI : IEC-LTI : A [IsI ]P K = 0.14, = 0.02 K = 13.5, = 1.0 K = 80.0, = 2.0 K = 120.0, = 1.0 + B x Tm , 5 % absolute or 30 ms, -1 for char = ANSI-MI : A = 0.0515, B = 0.114, P = 0.02 ANSI-VI : A = 19.61, B = 0.491, P = 2.0 ANSI-EI : A = 28.2, B = 0.1217, P = 2.0 t d , 1 % or 20ms t res = Reset time K R [] I 2 Is -1 x Tm , 5 % absolute or 30 ms, for char = ANSI-MI : R = 4.85 ANSI-VI : R = 21.6 ANSI-EI : R = 29.1 t res t res , 1 % or 20ms Repeatability 1 % or 20ms Overshoot time < 40 ms Disengaging time < 50 ms Figure 2-2 shows the operate times for the four IEC IDMTL curves with a time multiplier of 1. Figure 2-3 and figure 2.4 show the ANSI operate and reset curves. These operate times apply to non-directional characteristics. Where directional control is applied then the directional element operate time should be added to give total maximum operating time. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 36 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification 1000 100 Time (sec) 10 Long Time Inverse Normal Inverse 1 Very Inverse Extremely Inverse 0.1 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 Current (multiples of setting) Figure 2-2 (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited IEC IDMTL Curves (Time Multiplier=1) Chapter 3 Page 37 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification 1000 100 Time (sec) 10 Moderately Inverse 1 Very Inverse Extremely Inverse 0.1 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 Current (multiples of setting) Figure 2-3 ANSI IDMTL Operate Curves (Time Multiplier=1) (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 38 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification 1000 500 100 50 Extremely Inverse Very Inverse Time (sec) 10 Moderately Inverse 5 1 0.2 0.1 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 Current (multiples of setting) Figure 2-4 ANSI Reset Curves (Time Multiplier=1) (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 39 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification 2.13 59N Neutral Voltage Displacement 2.13.1 Reference (59NDT) Parameter Value Vs Setting 1, 1.5... 100V td Delay setting 0.00, 0.01...20.00, 20.50... 100, 101... 1000, 1010... 10000, 10100... 14400 s 2.13.2 Operate and Reset Level (59NDT) V op Attribute Value Operate level 100 % Vs, 2 % or 0.5 V Reset level 95 % V op Repeatability 1% Variation -10 C to +55 C 5% f nom - 3 Hz to f nom + 2 Hz 5% 2.13.3 Operate and Reset Time (59NDT) Attribute Value 0V to 1.5 xVs, 76 ms, 20ms t basic Element basic operate time t op Operate time following delay t basic + t d , 1 % or 20ms Repeatability 1 % or 20ms Overshoot time < 40 ms Disengaging time < 50 ms 0V to 10 xVs, 63 ms, 20ms 2.13.4 Reference (59NIT) Parameter Value M Multiplier setting 0.1, 0.2... 10, 10.5... 140 Vs Setting 1, 1.5... 100V td Delay setting 0, 0.01... 20 s t res Reset setting 0, 1...60 s 2.13.5 Operate and Reset Level (59NIT) V op Attribute Value Operate level 105 % Vs, 2 % or 0.5 V Reset level 95 % V op Repeatability 1% Variation -10 C to +55 C 5% f nom - 3 Hz to f nom + 2 Hz 5% (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 40 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification 2.13.6 Operate and Reset Time (59NIT) t basic t op Attribute Value Starter operate time ( 2xVs) 65 ms, 20ms Operate time Reset Time char = IDMTL t op = M [ ]-1 3V0 Vs , 5 % or 65 ms char = DTL t d , 1 % or 40ms char = IDMTL t res , 5 % or 65ms char = DTL t res , 1 % or 40ms Repeatability 1 % or 20ms Overshoot time < 40 ms Disengaging time < 50 ms (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 41 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification 2.14 64H Restricted Earth Fault Protection 2.14.1 Reference Parameter Value Is Setting 0.005, 0.010... 0.95 xIn td Delay setting 0.00, 0.01... 20.0, 20.1... 100.0, 101....1000, 1010 ... 10000 , 10100 ... 14400 s 2.14.2 Operate and Reset Level I op Attribute Value Operate level 100 % Is, 5 % or 1% xIn Reset level 95 % I op , 5 % or 0.1% xIn Repeatability 1% Transient overreach (X/R 100) -5 % Variation -10 C to +55 C 5% f nom - 3 Hz to f nom + 2 Hz 5 % 2.14.3 Operate and Reset Time Attribute Value 0 to 2 xIs, 40 ms, 10ms t basic Element basic operate time t op Operate time following delay t basic + t d , 1% or 10ms Repeatability 1% or 10ms Overshoot time < 40 ms Disengaging time < 50 ms 0 to 5 xIs, 30 ms, 10ms 2.14.4 Harmonic Rejection Harmonic Rejection 2 nd th to 15 harmonic (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 40:1 minimum (50/60Hz) Chapter 3 Page 42 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification 2.15 81Under/Over Frequency 2.15.1 Reference Parameter Value Fs Setting 40, 40.01... 69.99 Hz Hyst Hysteresis setting 0, 0.1... 80% td Delay setting 0.00, 0.01... 20.0, 20.1... 100.0, 101....1000, 1010 ... 10000 , 10100 ... 14400 s 2.15.2 Operate and Reset Level F op Attribute Value Operate level 100 % F s , 10mHz Reset level overfrequency (100 % - hyst) xF op, 10mHz underfrequency (100 % + hyst) xF op, 10mHz 1% Repeatability Variation -10 C to +55 C 5% 2.15.3 Operate and Reset Time Attribute Value Typically < 110ms t basic Element basic overfrequency operate time (for ROCOF between 0.1 underfrequency and 5.0 Hz/sec) t op Operate time following delay t basic + t d , 1 % or 10ms Repeatability 1 % or 10ms Disengaging time < 100 ms (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Maximum < 150ms Typically < 110ms Maximum < 150ms Chapter 3 Page 43 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification 2.16 87 Biased Differential 2.16.1 Reference Parameter Value ICT Multiplier 1.00x I init Initial Setting 0.1, 0.15... 2 xIn I B1 I B1L st 0.1, 0.15... 0.7 x st 1, 2... 20 xIn 1 Bias Slope setting 1 Bias Slope Limit 2 nd Bias Slope setting 1, 1.05... 2 x I B2T 2 nd Bias Slope Type setting Line, Curve ts Delay setting I B2 (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 0, 0.005... 1s Chapter 3 Page 44 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification 2.16.2 Operate and Reset Level Attribute Value IOPERATE > I87 INITIAL SETTING and IOPERATE > M1 x IRESTRAIN and IOPERATE > M 2 x IRESTRAIN (for IRESTRAIN > B) Where I OPERATE = I1 + I 2 Operate level nd 2 Bias Slope Type = Line IRESTRAIN = I OP I1 + I 2 2 st B = 87BD 1 Bias slope limit st M 1 = 87BD 1 Bias slope M 2 = 87BD 2nd Bias slope I OPERATE > I 87 INITIAL SETTING and I OPERATE > M1 x IRESTRAIN and Operate level nd 2 Bias Slope Type = Curve I OPERATE > 2 IRESTRAIN -K2 (for IRESTRAIN > B) 2 Where 2 2 2 2 K = B - 2M 1 B 87BD Operate Level 10% of I OP or 0.1In Reset level 90% of I OP Repeatability 2% Transient overreach 5% Variation 2.16.3 -10 C to +55 C f nom - 3 Hz to f nom + 2 Hz Operate Time Attribute Value Element basic operate time Switched from 0 to x I OP (Inrush Action: Enabled) 3 x I OP , 35 ms, 10ms t basic t op Operate time following delay t basic + t d , 1% or 10ms (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 10 x I OP , 30 ms, 10ms Chapter 3 Page 45 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification 2.17 87HS High-Set Differential 2.17.1 Reference Parameter Value ICT Multiplier 1.00x Is Setting 1, 2 ... 30 xIn ts Delay setting 0, 0.005... 1s 2.17.2 Operate and Reset Level I op Attribute Value Operate level 5% of setting or 0.01In Reset level 95% of I OP Repeatability 2% Transient overreach 5% Variation -10 C to +55 C f nom - 3 Hz to f nom + 2 Hz 2.17.3 Operate and Reset Time Attribute Value t basic Element basic operate time Switched from 0 to x I OP 3 x I OP , 30 ms, 10ms t op Operate time following delay t basic + t d , 1% or 10ms (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 5 x I OP , 25 ms, 10ms Chapter 3 Page 46 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification Section 3: Supervision Functions 3.1 50BF Circuit Breaker Fail 3.1.1 Reference Parameter Value Is Setting: 50BF-n 0.050, 0.055... 2.0 xIn Is Setting: 50BF-n-I4 0.005, 0.010... 2.0 xIn t CBF1 Stage 1 Delay setting 0, 5... 60000ms t CBF2 Stage 2 Delay setting 0, 5... 60000ms 3.1.2 Operate and Reset Level Attribute Value I op Operate level 100 % Is, 5 % or 1% In I reset Reset level <100 % I op , 5 % or 1% In Repeatability 1% Variation -10 C to +55 C 5% f nom - 3 Hz to f nom + 2 Hz 5 % 3.1.3 Operate and Reset Time t basic t op Attribute Value Element basic operate time < 20ms Stage 1 t CBF1 , 1 % or 20ms Stage 2 t CBF2 , 1 % or 20ms Repeatability 1 % or 20ms Overshoot < 2 x 20ms Disengaging time < 20ms (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 47 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification 3.2 74TCS/CCS Trip/Close Circuit Supervision 3.2.1 Reference td Parameter Value Delay setting 0, 0.02...60 s 3.2.2 Operate and Reset Time Attribute Value t basic Element basic operate time 30ms 10ms t op Operate time following delay t basic + t d , 1 % or 10ms Repeatability 1 % or 10ms Variation -10 C to +55 C 5% f nom - 3 Hz to f nom + 2 Hz 5 % (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 48 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification 3.3 81HBL2 Inrush Detector 3.3.1 Reference I Parameter Value Setting (Ratio of 2nd Harmonic current to Fundamental component current) 0.10, 0.11... 0.5 3.3.2 Operate and Reset Level I op Attribute Value Operate level 100 % I, 4 % or 1% In Reset level 100 % I op , 4 % or 1% In Repeatability 1% Variation -10 C to +55 C 5% f nom - 3 Hz to f nom + 2 Hz 5 % 3.3.3 Operate and Reset Time t basic Attribute Value Element basic operate time Will pick-up before operation of any protection element due to magnetic inrush Reset Time Will operation until drop-off of any protection element due to magnetic inrush (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 49 of 50 Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification 3.4 81HBL5 Overfluxing Detector 3.4.1 Reference I Parameter Value Setting (Ratio of 5th Harmonic current to Fundamental component current) 0.10, 0.11... 0.5 3.4.2 Operate and Reset Level I op Attribute Value Operate level 100 % I, 4 % or 1% In Reset level 100 % I op , 4 % or 1% In Repeatability 1% Variation -10 C to +55 C 5% f nom - 3 Hz to f nom + 2 Hz 5 % 3.4.3 Operate and Reset Time t basic Attribute Value Element basic operate time Will pick-up before operation of any protection element due to overfluxing Reset Time Will operation until drop-off of any protection element due to overfluxing (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 50 of 50 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications 7SR242 Duobias Multi-Function 2-Winding Transformer Protection Relay Document Release History This document is issue 2017/08. The list of revisions up to and including this issue is: 2017/08 Software revision 2662H85001 R8c-7d 2013/01 Software revision 2662H85001 R7c-7b 2012/08 Addition of optional IEC 61850 communication protocol and Ethernet Interface. 2010/06 Additional Comms modules option of (RS485 + IRIG-B) and (RS232 + IRIG-B) and typographical revisions 2010/02 Document reformat due to rebrand 2010/02 Software revision 2662H80001 R4c-3 2008/07 Software revision 2662H80001R3d-2c. 2008/05 First issue Software Revision History 2017/08 2662H85001 R8c-7d Phase currents added to 61850. 5A metering corrected 2013/01 2662H85001 R7c-7b Revised file handling during shutdown 2012/08 2662H85001 R7b-7a Addition of optional IEC 61850 communication protocol and Ethernet. 2010/02 2662H80001 R4c-3 Revisions to: VT ratio settings, 87BD 1 bias slope limit setting increments, CB fail function, LED CONFIG menu, DATA STORAGE menu. Added: Open circuit detection (46BC), CONTROL MODE menu, Close circuit supervision (74CCS), Measured earth fault undercurrent (37G), Pulsed output contacts. 2008/07 2662H80001R3d-2c. Demand metering. Optional DNP3.0 data comms. 2008/05 2662H80001R3-2b First Release st The copyright and other intellectual property rights in this document, and in any model or article produced from it (and including any registered or unregistered design rights) are the property of Siemens Protection Devices Limited. No part of this document shall be reproduced or modified or stored in another form, in any data retrieval system, without the permission of Siemens Protection Devices Limited, nor shall any model or article be reproduced from this document unless Siemens Protection Devices Limited consent. While the information and guidance given in this document is believed to be correct, no liability shall be accepted for any loss or damage caused by any error or omission, whether such error or omission is the result of negligence or any other cause. Any and all such liability is disclaimed. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 2 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications Contents Document Release History ...................................................................................................................................... 1 Software Revision History ........................................................................................................................................ 1 Section 1: Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 4 Section 2: Physical Connection................................................................................................................................ 5 2.1 Communication ports .............................................................................................................................. 6 2.1.1 USB Interface (COM2) .............................................................................................................. 6 2.1.2 RS485 Interface (COM1) .......................................................................................................... 7 2.1.3 Optional Rear Fibre Optic Interfaces (COM3 and COM4) ......................................................... 8 2.1.4 Optional Rear RS485 (COM3) ................................................................................................ 12 2.1.5 Optional Rear RS232 (COM3) ................................................................................................ 12 2.1.6 Optional Rear EN100 Ethernet Module (COM3) ..................................................................... 13 Section 3: IEC 60870-5-103 Definitions ................................................................................................................. 14 3.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................... 14 Section 4: Modbus Definitions................................................................................................................................ 22 4.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................... 22 Event Format ......................................................................................................................................................... 30 Section 5: DNP3.0 Definitions ................................................................................................................................ 31 5.1 Device Profile ........................................................................................................................................ 31 5.2 Implementation Table............................................................................................................................ 34 5.3 Point List ............................................................................................................................................... 44 5.3.1 Double Bit Binary Input Points ................................................................................................ 49 5.3.2 Binary Counters ...................................................................................................................... 53 5.3.3 Frozen Counters ..................................................................................................................... 54 Section 6: IEC61850 Protocol Support .................................................................................................................. 58 Section 7: Modems ................................................................................................................................................ 59 7.1.1 Connecting a Modem to the Relay(s)...................................................................................... 59 7.1.2 Setting the Remote Modem .................................................................................................... 59 7.1.3 Connecting to the Remote Modem ......................................................................................... 59 Section 8: Glossary ................................................................................................................................................ 60 List of Figures Figure 2-1 Figure 2-2 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-4 Figure 2-5 Figure 2-6 Figure 2-7 Figure 2-8 Communication to Front USB Port .................................................................................................... 6 Communication to Multiple Devices using RS485 (Standard Port) .................................................... 7 Communication to Multiple Devices using Fibre-optic Ring Network ............................................... 11 Communication to Multiple Devices from Control System and Laptop using Fibreoptic Star Network ........................................................................................................................... 11 Additional (Optional) Rear RS485 + IRIG-B Connection to a PC .................................................... 12 Additional (Optional) Rear RS232 + IRIG-B Connection to a PC .................................................... 12 RS232 Data Comms Pin Connections............................................................................................. 12 EN100 Ethernet Module .................................................................................................................. 13 (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 3 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications Section 1: Introduction This section provides information on the use of the Communication Interface with a control system or interrogating computer. Appropriate software within the control system or on the interrogating computer (e.g. Reydisp Evolution) is required to access the interface. The relay data communication facility incorporates user selectable protocols to provide compatibility with control and automation systems. This section specifies connection details and lists the events, commands and measurands available in the IEC60870-5-103, Modbus RTU, DNP3.0 and optional IEC61850 protocols. When IEC60870-5-103 protocol is selected the relay can communicate with PCs running Reydisp software which provides operational information, post-fault analysis, settings interrogation and editing facilities etc. Reydisp software can be downloaded from our website www.energy.siemens.com. (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 4 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications Section 2: Physical Connection As standard the relay provides one `Front' USB communication interface (COM2) located on the fascia and one RS485 (COM1) located on the `Rear'. Optionally additional fibre optic (x2), RS232 (x1), RS485 (x1) or Ethernet comms ports can be provided on the rear, these are designated COM3 or COM4 as detailed below. 1. COM1-RS485: this port can be used for IEC60870-5-103, MODBUS RTU or optionally DNP3 communications to a substation SCADA or integrated control system or engineer remote access. 2. COM2-USB: this port is used for IEC60870-5-103 (default setting) communication with Reydisp software. MODBUS RTU or optional DNP3 are also available via COM2. An ASCII protocol, the main use of which is to allow firmware to be updated from the front connection, is also available through this port. Access to COM2 settings is only available from the relay front fascia via the COMMUNICATIONS MENU 3. COM3: Located on the rear of the relay this optional port can be used for IEC60870-5-103, MODBUS RTU, DNP 3 or optional IEC6185 communications to a substation SCADA, integrated control system or for engineer remote access. 4. COM4: Located on the rear of the relay thise optional port can be used for IEC60870-5-103, MODBUS RTU or DNP3 communications to a substation SCADA or integrated control system or engineer remote access. SPDL can provide a range of interface devices, please refer to product portfolio catalogue. Full details of the interface devices can be found by referring to the website www.siemens.com/energy. (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 5 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications 2.1 Communication ports To allow communication to the relay the Station Address setting must be within the range of the selected protocol i.e. 0 - 254 for IEC60870-5-103, 0 - 247 for MODBUS-RTU or 0 - 65520 for DNP3. Setting name Range 0 ... 65534 Station Address 2.1.1 Default Setting Notes An address within the range of the relevant protocol must be given to identify the relay. Each relay must have a unique address. 0 USB Interface (COM2) The USB communication port is connected using a standard USB cable with a type B connection to the relay and type A to the PC. The PC will require a suitable USB driver to be installed, this will be carried out automatically when the Reydisp software is installed. When the Reydisp software is running with the USB cable connected to a device an additional connection is shown. Connections to these devices are not shown when they are not connected. The USB communication interface on the relay is labelled Com 2 and its associated settings are located in the Data communications menu. To enable communication with Reydisp via the USB port the following setting changes must be made from the relay fascia. Setting name Range Default Setting Station Address 0 ... 65534 0 0 - 254 COM2-USB Protocol OFF, IEC60870-5-103, MODBUS-RTU, ASCII, DNP3 IEC60870-5103 IEC608705-103 COM2-USB Mode Local, Local or Remote, Remote Local Local Notes Reydisp software is compatible with IEC608705-103. USB Type A socket on PC USB Data Cable Local Engineer Access USB Type B USB Type A Figure 2-1 (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Communication to Front USB Port Chapter 4 Page 6 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications 2.1.2 RS485 Interface (COM1) The RS485 communication port is located on the rear of the relay and can be connected using a suitable RS485 120 Ohm screened twisted pair cable. The RS485 electrical connection can be used in a single or multi-drop configuration. The RS485 master must support and use the Auto Device Enable (ADE) feature. The last device in the connection must be terminated correctly in accordance with the master device driving the connection. The relays are fitted with an internal terminating resistor which can be connected between A and B by fitting an external wire loop between terminals 18 and 20 on the power supply module. The maximum number of relays that can be connected to the bus is 64. Each relay has an internal terminating resistor - this can be connected in circuit where necessary. The following settings must be configured when using the RS485 interface. Setting name Range OFF, IEC60870-5-103, COM1-RS485 Protocol MODBUS-RTU, DNP3.0 Default Setting Notes IEC60870-5103 Sets the protocol used to As Required communicate on the standard RS485 connection. 75 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 19200 38400 The baud rate set on all of the relays connected to the As Required control system must be the same as the one set on the master device. COM1-RS485 Parity NONE, ODD, EVEN EVEN The parity set on all of the relays connected to the As Required control system must be the same and in accordance with the master device. COM1-RS485 Mode Local, Local or Remote, Remote Remote Unsolicited Mode DISABLED ENABLED DISABLED Setting is only visible when As Required COM1 Protocol is set to DNP3 Destination Address 0 ... 65520 0 Setting is only visible when As Required DNP3 Unsolicited Events set to Enabled. COM1-RS485 Baud Rate Rear terminals To Control System Rear terminals 14 16 18 RS485 Screened twisted pair 14 16 18 RS485 Screened twisted pair 14 16 18 20 Ext Wire loop (terminating resistance) added where permanent drive from master station available To Control System 16 18 20 Term. 14 +ve -ve 20 GND 18 -ve 14 +ve Term. 20 16 18 Term. RS485 RS485 Figure 2-2 GND 16 -ve 14 +ve GND RS 485 Twisted pair Cable RS485 Communication to Multiple Devices using RS485 (Standard Port) (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 7 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications 2.1.3 Optional Rear Fibre Optic Interfaces (COM3 and COM4) When connecting via the optional fibre optic interface the selection of fibre-optic cable is important. Fibres must TM be terminated with ST (BFOC/2.5) connectors. The recommended type is 62.5/125m glass fibre. Communication distances over 1 km are achievable using this type of fibre. The fibre optic data comms link will be interrupted if the relay element is withdrawn from the case. A budget loss calculation should be made for all installations. The following table gives the launch power and receiver sensitivity of each of the fibre optic communication ports on the Argus M relay when used with specific fibre optic types. Fibre Type Tx Launch Power (dB) RX Receive Sensitivity (dB) Min Max Min Max 62.5/125m -11.7 -15.7 -24 -9.2 1mm Polymer -6.4 -10.4 -24 -9.2 200m PCS -2.8 -6.8 -24 -9.2 Factors to be considered when calculating fibre-optic transmission distances: * Transmitter launch power * Attenuation, based on light frequency, fibre material and fibre diameter * Number of intermediate connectors and splices * Receiver sensitivity * The light power at the receiver must be above the sensitivity of the receiver in order that effective communication can occur. * Fibre cables are supplied on reels of finite length which may necessitate additional jointing. * Typical losses at connectors are 0.5-1.0dB each. This allows for normal age related deterioration. Consult manufacturers data for actual values. * Typical Splice losses are <0.3dB. * A 3dB safety margin is usually allowed after the budget calculation is performed. Following installation and prior to putting into service the actual losses should be measured for each fibre using a calibrated light source and meter. Measured and calculated values can be compared. (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 8 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications The following table can be used to record budget calculations: A Launch power B Fibre Type C Loss (dB/km) D Length km E Total fibre loss (CxD) dB F No. of Splices G Loss at each splice dB H Total loss at splices (FxG) dB I No. of connectors J Loss per connector dB K Total loss at connectors (IxJ) dB L Total losses (E+H+K) dB M Receive power budget (A-L) dB N Safety Margin dB O Device Receive Sensitivity dB (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited dB dB/km Chapter 4 Page 9 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications Setting name Range Default Station Address 1 - 254 for IEC60870-5-103 0 - 247 for Modbus RTU 0 - 65520 for DNP3.0 0 As Required COM3 Protocol OFF, IEC60870-5-103, MODBUS-RTU, DNP3.0 IEC60870-5103 As Required COM3 Baud Rate 75 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 19200 Setting Notes An address within the range of the relevant protocol must be given to identify the relay. Each relay must have a unique address. Sets the protocol used to communicate on the connection - Com3 As Required The baud rate set on all of the relays connected to the control system must be the same as the one set on the master device. COM3 Parity NONE, ODD, EVEN EVEN As Required The parity set on all of the relays connected to the control system must be the same and in accordance with the master device. COM3 Line Idle* LIGHT ON, LIGHT OFF LIGHT OFF As Required Sets the idle state of the line in accordance with master device COM3 Data Echo* ON,OFF OFF As Required Set to ON when relays are connected in a ring configuration. COM4 Protocol** OFF, IEC60870-5-103, MODBUS-RTU, DNP3.0 IEC60870-5103 As Required Sets the protocol used to communicate on the connection - Com4. COM4 Baud Rate** 75 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 As Required The baud rate set on all of the relays connected to the control system must be the same as the one set on the master device. 19200 COM4 Parity** NONE, ODD, EVEN EVEN As Required The parity set on all of the relays connected to the control system must be the same and in accordance with the master device. COM4 Line Idle** LIGHT ON, LIGHT OFF LIGHT OFF As Required Sets the idle state of the line in accordance with master device COM4 Data Echo** ON,OFF OFF As Required Set to ON when relays are connected in a ring configuration. *Not applicable for RS 485 or RS 232 options **COM 4 is fibre optic only (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 10 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications Rx Rx Tx Tx RS232 to Fibre Optic Converter RS232 straight through cable Computer or Control System USB or 9 pin male D connector Figure 2-3 Tx Rx Rx Tx 62.5/125m fibre optic with ST connectors 25 pin male D connector Communication to Multiple Devices using Fibre-optic Ring Network To Control System Sigma 1 Tx Master Rx Rx Rx Tx Tx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx RS232 straight through cable Tx Rx Computer or Control System 62.5/125m fibre optic with ST connectors USB or 9 pin male D connector Figure 2-4 Rx Tx 25 pin male D connector Communication to Multiple Devices from Control System and Laptop using Fibre-optic Star Network (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 11 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications 2.1.4 Optional Rear RS485 (COM3) 7SR24 COMMS MODULE IRIG-B COM3 RS485 Screened twisted pair GND TERM USB or 9 pin male D connector Laptop computer A RS232 straight through cable Figure 2-5 2.1.5 B Additional (Optional) Rear RS485 + IRIG-B Connection to a PC Optional Rear RS232 (COM3) 7SR24 COMMS MODULE IRIG-B COM3 USB or 9 pin male D connector Laptop computer RS232 cross-over cable or RS232 to USB converter cable Figure 2-6 Additional (Optional) Rear RS232 + IRIG-B Connection to a PC Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Relay Function Not Connected Receive Data (RXD) Transmit Data (TXD) Output Supply +5V 50mA Signal Ground (GND) Output Supply +5V 50mA Linked to 8 (volts free) Linked to 7 (volts free) Output Supply +5V 50mA Figure 2-7 (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited RS232 Data Comms Pin Connections Chapter 4 Page 12 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications 2.1.6 Optional Rear EN100 Ethernet Module (COM3) The optional ethernet interface is primarily provided for support of IEC 61850 protocol. Support for IEC 60870-5-103 is also provided over this interface to allow connection with Reydisp Evolution and Reydisp Manager software for interrogation, editing and download of relay settings and other data. Ordering options are available with two RJ45 electrical connectors or with two duplex LC fibre optic connectors. Setting name Range Default Setting LAN Protocol OFF, IEC60870-5-103 IEC60870-5-103 Notes If this setting is set to Off, access to relay data using Reydisp Evolution and Reydisp Manager software via the Ethernet interface is not available. Connections to the optional EN100 ethernet module are made on the rear underside of the relay. Connections are made to either RJ45 sockets (electrical) or Duplex LC (fibre optic) connectors. Ethernet - EN100-E Ethernet - EN100-O Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 1 LED yellow LED yellow LED green Ch 2 LED green EN100 Module - RJ45 Interface EN100 Module - Duplex-LC Interface Green LED (Physical Link) Off - No link On - Link present Yellow LED (Activity) Off - No traffic On/flashing - Traffic Figure 2-8 (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited EN100 Ethernet Module Chapter 4 Page 13 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications Section 3: IEC 60870-5-103 Definitions 3.1 Introduction This section describes the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol implementation in the relays. This protocol is used for the communication with REYDISP software and can also be used for communication with a suitable control system. The control system or local PC acts as the master in the system with the relay operating as a slave responding to the master's commands. The implementation provides event information, time synchronising, commands and measurands and also supports the transfer of disturbance records. This protocol can be set to use any or all of the relays hardware interfaces (USB, Fibre Optic and RS485) and is the standard protocol used by the USB port. The relay can communicate simultaneously on all ports regardless of protocol used. Each relay must be given an address to enable communication and can be set by the Communication Interface:Relay Address. Valid settings are within the range 1 - 254, a relay with the default address of 0 will not be able to communicate. Cause of Transmission The cause of transmission (COT) column of the `Information Number and Function' table lists possible causes of transmission for these frames. The following abbreviations are used: Abbreviation Description SE spontaneous event T test mode GI general interrogation Loc local operation Rem remote operation Ack command acknowledge Nak Negative command acknowledge Note: Events listing a GI cause of transmission can be raised and cleared; other events are raised only. Function Type Abbreviation Description 1 Time tagged message (monitor direction) 2 Time tagged message (relative time) (monitor direction) 3.1 Measurands I 4 Time-tagged measurands with relative time 5 Identification message 6 Time synchronisation 7 General Interrogation Initialization 9 Measurands II 20 General command Information Number and Function The following table lists information number and function definitions together with a description of the message and function type and cause of transmission that can result in that message. Definitions with shaded area are not available on all relay models. (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 14 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications Function Information Number 60 4 60 60 5 6 Description Remote Mode Out of Service Mode Local Mode Function Type Cause of Transmission 1 SE, GI, 20 Ack, Nak 1 SE, GI, 20 Ack, Nak 1 SE, GI, 20 Ack, Nak 1 SE, GI, 20 Ack, Nak 60 7 Local & Remote Mode 60 12 Control Received 1 SE 60 13 Command Received 1 SE 60 128 Cold Start 1 SE 60 129 Warm Start 1 SE 60 130 Re-start 1 SE 60 131 Expected Restart 1 SE, GI 60 132 Unexpected Restart 1 SE, GI 60 135 Trigger Storage 1 SE 60 136 Clear Waveform Records 1 SE 60 137 Clear Fault Records 1 SE 60 138 Clear Event Records 1 SE 60 140 Demand metering reset 1 SE 60 170 General Alarm 1 1 SE, GI, 60 171 General Alarm 2 1 SE, GI, 60 172 General Alarm 3 1 SE, GI, 60 173 General Alarm 4 1 SE, GI, 60 174 General Alarm 5 1 SE, GI, 60 175 General Alarm 6 1 SE, GI, 60 176 General Alarm 7 1 SE, GI, 60 177 General Alarm 8 1 SE, GI, 60 178 General Alarm 9 1 SE, GI, 60 179 General Alarm 10 1 SE, GI, 60 180 General Alarm 11 1 SE, GI, 60 181 General Alarm 12 1 SE, GI, 60 182 Quick Logic E1 1 SE, GI, 60 183 Quick Logic E2 1 SE, GI, 60 184 Quick Logic E3 1 SE, GI, 60 185 Quick Logic E4 1 SE, GI, 60 186 Quick Logic E5 1 SE, GI, 60 187 Quick Logic E6 1 SE, GI, 60 188 Quick Logic E7 1 SE, GI, 60 189 Quick Logic E8 1 SE, GI, 60 190 Quick Logic E9 1 SE, GI, 60 191 Quick Logic E10 1 SE, GI, 60 192 Quick Logic E11 1 SE, GI, 60 193 Quick Logic E12 1 SE, GI, 60 194 Quick Logic E13 1 SE, GI, 60 195 Quick Logic E14 1 SE, GI, 60 196 Quick Logic E15 1 SE, GI, 60 197 Quick Logic E16 1 SE, GI, 70 5 Binary Input 5 1 SE, GI, 70 6 Binary Input 6 1 SE, GI, (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 15 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications Function Information Number Description Function Type 70 70 7 Binary Input 7 1 SE, GI, 8 Binary Input 8 1 SE, GI, 70 9 Binary Input 9 1 SE, GI, 70 10 Binary Input 10 1 SE, GI, 70 11 Binary Input 11 1 SE, GI, 70 12 Binary Input 12 1 SE, GI, 70 13 Binary Input 13 1 SE, GI, 70 14 Binary Input 14 1 SE, GI, 70 15 Binary Input 15 1 SE, GI, 70 16 Binary Input 16 1 SE, GI, 70 17 Binary Input 17 1 SE, GI, 70 18 Binary Input 18 1 SE, GI, 70 19 Binary Input 19 1 SE, GI, 75 1 Virtual Input 1 1 SE, GI 75 2 Virtual Input 2 1 SE, GI 75 3 Virtual Input 3 1 SE, GI 75 4 Virtual Input 4 1 SE, GI 75 5 Virtual Input 5 1 SE, GI 75 6 Virtual Input 6 1 SE, GI 75 7 Virtual Input 7 1 SE, GI 75 8 Virtual Input 8 1 SE, GI 75 9 Virtual Input 9 1 SE, GI 75 10 Virtual Input 10 1 SE, GI 75 11 Virtual Input 11 1 SE, GI 75 12 Virtual Input 12 1 SE, GI 75 13 Virtual Input 13 1 SE, GI 75 14 Virtual Input 14 1 SE, GI 75 15 Virtual Input 15 1 SE, GI 75 16 Virtual Input 16 1 SE, GI 1 SE, GI, 20 Ack, Nak 1 SE, GI, 20 Ack, Nak 1 SE, GI, 20 Ack, Nak 1 SE, GI, 20 Ack, Nak 1 SE, GI, 20 Ack, Nak 1 SE, GI, 20 Ack, Nak 1 SE, GI, 20 Ack, Nak 1 SE, GI, 20 Ack, Nak 1 SE, GI, 20 Ack, Nak 1 SE, GI, 20 Ack, Nak 1 SE, GI, 80 1 Binary Output 1 80 2 Binary Output 2 80 3 Binary Output 3 80 4 Binary Output 4 80 80 5 6 Binary Output 5 Binary Output 6 80 7 Binary Output 7 80 8 Binary Output 8 80 9 Binary Output 9 80 10 Binary Output 10 80 11 Binary Output 11 (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Cause of Transmission Chapter 4 Page 16 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications Function Information Number Description Function Type Cause of Transmission 20 Ack, Nak 1 SE, GI, 20 Ack, Nak 1 SE, GI, 20 Ack, Nak 1 SE, GI, 20 Ack, Nak 80 12 Binary Output 12 80 13 Binary Output 13 80 14 Binary Output 14 90 1 Led 1 1 SE, GI 90 2 Led 2 1 SE, GI 90 3 Led 3 1 SE, GI 90 4 Led 4 1 SE, GI 90 5 Led 5 1 SE, GI 90 6 Led 6 1 SE, GI 90 7 Led 7 1 SE, GI 90 8 Led 8 1 SE, GI 90 9 Led 9 1 SE, GI 90 10 Led 10 1 SE, GI 90 11 Led 11 1 SE, GI 90 12 Led 12 1 SE, GI 90 13 Led 13 1 SE, GI 90 14 Led 14 1 SE, GI 90 15 Led 15 1 SE, GI 90 16 Led 16 1 SE, GI 90 17 Led 17 1 SE, GI 90 18 Led 18 1 SE, GI 90 19 Led 19 1 SE, GI 90 20 Led 20 1 SE, GI 90 21 Led 21 1 SE, GI 90 22 Led 22 1 SE, GI 90 23 Led 23 1 SE, GI 90 24 Led 24 1 SE, GI 91 1 Led PU 1 1 SE, GI 91 2 Led PU 2 1 SE, GI 91 3 Led PU 3 1 SE, GI 91 4 Led PU 4 1 SE, GI 91 5 Led PU 5 1 SE, GI 91 6 Led PU 6 1 SE, GI 91 7 Led PU 7 1 SE, GI 91 8 Led PU 8 1 SE, GI 91 9 Led PU 9 1 SE, GI 91 10 Led PU 10 1 SE, GI 91 11 Led PU 11 1 SE, GI 91 12 Led PU 12 1 SE, GI 91 13 Led PU 13 1 SE, GI 91 14 Led PU 14 1 SE, GI 91 15 Led PU 15 1 SE, GI 91 16 Led PU 16 1 SE, GI 91 17 Led PU 17 1 SE, GI 91 18 Led PU 18 1 SE, GI 91 19 Led PU19 1 SE, GI (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 17 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications Function Information Number Description Function Type 91 20 Led PU 20 1 SE, GI 91 21 Led PU 21 1 SE, GI 91 22 Led PU 22 1 SE, GI 91 23 Led PU 23 1 SE, GI 91 24 Led PU 24 1 SE, GI 176 0 Data lost 5 Data lost 176 2 Reset FCB 5 Reset FCB 176 3 Reset CU 5 Reset CU 176 4 Start/Restart 5 Start/Restart 176 5 Power On 5 SE 176 19 LEDs reset (Reset Flag & Outputs) 1 SE 20 Ack, Nak 176 22 Settings changed 1 SE 176 23 Settings Group 1 Select 1 SE, GI 20 Ack, Nak 176 24 Settings Group 2 Select 1 SE, GI 20 Ack, Nak 1 SE, GI 20 Ack, Nak 1 SE, GI 176 25 Settings Group 3 Select Cause of Transmission 176 26 Settings Group 4 Select 20 Ack, Nak 176 27 Binary Input 1 1 SE, GI 176 28 Binary Input 2 1 SE, GI 176 29 Binary Input 3 1 SE, GI 176 30 Binary Input 4 1 SE, GI 176 36 Trip circuit fail 1 SE, GI 176 48 EF L1 2 SE 176 49 EF L2 2 SE 176 50 EF L3 2 SE 176 64 Starter/Pick Up L1 1 SE, GI 176 65 Starter/Pick Up L2 1 SE, GI 176 66 Starter/Pick Up L3 1 SE, GI 176 67 Starter/Pick Up N 1 SE, GI 176 68 General Trip 2 SE 176 69 Trip L1 2 SE 176 70 Trip L2 2 SE 176 71 Trip L3 2 SE 176 84 General Starter/Pick Up 1 SE, GI 177 8 87BD 2 SE, GI 177 9 87HS 2 SE, GI 177 10 51-1 2 SE, GI 177 11 50-1 2 SE, GI 177 12 51N-1 2 SE, GI 177 13 50N-1 2 SE, GI 177 14 51G-1 2 SE, GI 177 15 50G-1 2 SE, GI 177 16 51-2 2 SE, GI 177 17 50-2 2 SE, GI 177 18 51N-2 2 SE, GI 177 19 50N-2 2 SE, GI (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 18 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications Function Information Number Description Function Type 177 177 20 51G-2 2 SE, GI 21 50G-2 2 SE, GI 177 26 51G-3 2 SE, GI 177 32 51G-4 2 SE, GI 177 34 50BF-1-1 2 SE, GI 177 35 50BF-1-2 2 SE, GI 177 36 50BF-2-1 2 SE, GI 177 37 50BF-2-2 2 SE, GI 177 38 Thermal Alarm 2 SE, GI 177 39 Thermal Trip 2 SE, GI 177 41 46IT-1 2 SE, GI 177 42 46DT-1 2 SE, GI 177 43 46IT-2 2 SE, GI 177 44 46DT-2 2 SE, GI 177 45 64H-1 2 SE, GI 177 46 64H-2 2 SE, GI 177 48 37-1 2 SE, GI 177 49 37-2 2 SE, GI 177 52 27/59-1 2 SE, GI 177 53 27/59-2 2 SE, GI 177 54 27/59-3 2 SE, GI 177 55 27/59-4 2 SE, GI 177 56 59NIT 2 SE, GI 177 57 59NDT 2 SE, GI 177 58 81-1 2 SE, GI 177 59 81-2 2 SE, GI 177 60 81-3 2 SE, GI 177 61 81-4 2 SE, GI 177 62 81-5 2 SE, GI 177 63 81-6 2 SE, GI 177 64 24DT-1 2 SE, GI 177 65 24DT-2 2 SE, GI 177 66 24IT 2 SE, GI 177 67 Trip Circuit Fail 1 2 SE, GI 177 68 Trip Circuit Fail 2 2 SE, GI 177 69 Trip Circuit Fail 3 2 SE, GI 177 70 Trip Circuit Fail 4 2 SE, GI 177 71 Trip Circuit Fail 5 2 SE, GI 177 72 Trip Circuit Fail 6 2 SE, GI 1 SE, GI 20 Ack, Nak 1 SE, GI 20 Ack, Nak 1 SE, GI 20 Ack, Nak 1 SE, GI 20 Ack, Nak 177 77 Settings Group 5 Selected Cause of Transmission 177 78 Settings Group 6 Selected 177 79 Settings Group 7 Selected 177 80 Settings Group 8 Selected 177 83 CB 1 Total Trip Count 1 SE, GI 177 84 CB 1 Delta Trip Count 1 SE, GI 177 86 Reset CB 1 Total Trip Count 1 SE, GI (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 19 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications Function 177 177 Information Number 87 89 Description Reset CB 1 Delta Trip Count 2 I t CB 1 Wear 2 177 90 Reset I t CB 1 Wear 177 91 I t CB 2 Wear 2 2 Function Type Cause of Transmission 20 Ack, Nak 1 SE, GI 20 Ack, Nak 1 SE, GI 1 SE, GI 20 Ack, Nak 1 SE, GI 1 SE, GI 177 92 Reset I t CB 2 Wear 20 Ack, Nak 177 93 CB 2 Total Trip Count 1 SE, GI 177 94 CB 2 Delta Trip Count 1 SE, GI 1 SE, GI 20 Ack, Nak 1 SE, GI 20 Ack, Nak 177 96 Reset CB 2 Total Trip Count 177 97 Reset CB 2 Delta Trip Count 177 99 81HBL2 2 SE, GI 177 100 81HBL5 2 SE, GI 177 101 CB 1 Total Trip Count 2 SE, GI 177 102 CB 1 Delta Trip Count 2 SE, GI 177 103 37G-1 2 SE, GI 177 104 37G-2 2 SE, GI 177 105 Close CB1 2 SE, GI 177 106 CB1 Fail To Close 2 SE, GI 177 107 CB1 DBI 2 SE, GI 177 108 Open CB1 2 SE, GI 177 109 CB1 Fail To Open 2 SE, GI 177 110 Close CB2 2 SE, GI 177 111 CB2 Fail To Close 2 SE, GI 177 112 CB2 DBI 2 SE, GI 177 113 Open CB2 2 SE, GI 177 114 CB2 Fail To Open 2 SE, GI 177 115 Close Circuit Fail 1 2 SE, GI 177 116 Close Circuit Fail 2 2 SE, GI 177 117 Close Circuit Fail 3 2 SE, GI 177 118 Close Circuit Fail 4 2 SE, GI 177 119 Close Circuit Fail 5 2 SE, GI 177 120 Close Circuit Fail 6 2 SE, GI 177 125 CB1 Trip Time Alarm 2 SE, GI 177 126 CB2 Trip Time Alarm 2 SE, GI 177 127 E/F Out 2 SE, GI 177 128 CB 2 Total Trip Count 2 SE, GI 177 129 CB 2 Delta Trip Count 2 SE, GI 178 63 Trip General 2 SE, GI 178 64 Trip Phase A 2 SE, GI 178 65 Trip Phase B 2 SE, GI 178 66 Trip Phase C 2 SE, GI 178 70 W1 Ia 4 SE, GI 178 71 W1 Ib SE, GI 178 72 W1 Ic 4 4 178 73 W2 Ia 4 SE, GI (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited SE, GI Chapter 4 Page 20 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications Function Information Number 178 74 W2 Ib 178 75 W2 Ic Function Cause of Transmission Type 4 SE, GI 4 SE, GI 178 76 V 4 SE, GI 178 77 Ig-1 4 SE, GI 178 78 Ig-2 4 SE, GI 200 1 CB1 1 SE, GI 20 Ack, Nak 1 SE, GI 20 Ack, Nak 200 2 200 255 255 255 255 Description CB2 Blocked by Interlocking 1 0 GI Initiation 7 End of GI 0 GI End 8 End of GI 0 Time Synchronisation 6 Time Synchronisation Measurand Function Information Description Number Function Type Cause of Transmission W1 I L1,2,3 178 I L1 (2.4 x) 230 I L2 (2.4 x) 9 Cyclic - Refresh rate 5 seconds or value change greater than 1%. 9 Cyclic - Refresh rate 5 seconds or value change greater than 1%. 9 Cyclic - Refresh rate 5 seconds or value change greater than 1%. I L3 (2.4 x) W2 I L1,2,3 178 I L1 (2.4 x) 231 I L2 (2.4 x) I L3 (2.4 x) V,f 178 220 V (1.2 x) f (1.2 x) Disturbance Recorder Actual Channel (ACC) Numbers Function 183 183 ACC Number 0 1 W1 Ia 183 2 W1 Ib 183 3 W1 Ic 183 4 IG1 183 5 W2 Ia 183 6 W2 Ib 183 7 W2 Ic 183 8 IG2 183 9 Vx (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Description Global Chapter 4 Page 21 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications Section 4: Modbus Definitions 4.1 Introduction This section describes the MODBUS-RTU protocol implementation in the relays. communication with a suitable control system. This protocol is used for This protocol can be set to use the Fibre Optic and RS485 ports. The relay can communicate simultaneously on all ports regardless of protocol used. Each relay must be given an address to enable communication and can be set by the Communication Interface:Relay Address. Valid settings are within the range 1 - 247, a relay with the default address of 0 will not be able to communicate. Definitions with shaded area are not available on all relay models. Coils (Read Write Binary values) Address 00001 00002 00003 00004 00005 00006 00007 00008 00009 00010 00011 00012 00013 00014 00100 00101 00102 00103 00104 00105 00106 00107 00108 00109 00110 00111 00112 00113 00114 00115 00116 00117 00118 00119 00120 00121 00122 00123 00124 Description Binary Output 1 Binary Output 2 Binary Output 3 Binary Output 4 Binary Output 5 Binary Output 6 Binary Output 7 Binary Output 8 Binary Output 9 Binary Output 10 Binary Output 11 Binary Output 12 Binary Output 13 Binary Output 14 LED Reset (Write only location) Settings Group 1 Settings Group 2 Settings Group 3 Settings Group 4 Settings Group 5 Settings Group 6 Settings Group 7 Settings Group 8 CB1 CB2 Reset CB1 Total Trip Count, write only location. Reset CB1 Delta Trip Count, write only location. Reset CB1 Lockout Trip Count, write only location. Reset I^2t CB1 Wear, write only location. Reset I^2t CB2 Wear, write only location. Reset CB2 Total Trip Count, write only location. Reset CB2 Delta Trip Count, write only location. Reset CB2 Lockout Trip Count, write only location. Demand Metering Reset Local Mode Remote Mode Service Mode Local & Remote Mode E/F Out Inputs (Read Only Binary values) (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 22 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications Address 10001 10002 10003 10004 10005 10006 10007 10008 10009 10010 10011 10012 10013 10014 10015 10016 10017 10018 10019 10101 10102 10103 10104 10105 10106 10107 10108 10109 10110 10111 10120 10121 10122 10123 10130 10131 10132 10133 10134 10135 10200 10201 10202 10203 10204 10205 10206 10207 10208 10209 10210 10220 10221 10223 10224 10225 10226 10230 10231 10233 10234 10242 Description Binary Input 1 Binary Input 2 Binary Input 3 Binary Input 4 Binary Input 5 Binary Input 6 Binary Input 7 Binary Input 8 Binary Input 9 Binary Input 10 Binary Input 11 Binary Input 12 Binary Input 13 Binary Input 14 Binary Input 15 Binary Input 16 Binary Input 17 Binary Input 18 Binary Input 19 General Start/Pick-up General Trip Start/Pick-up L1 Start/Pick-up L2 Start/Pick-up L3 Start/Pick-up N Trip/Operation L1 Trip/Operation L2 Trip/Operation L3 Trip/Operation N Trip Circuit Fail LOCAL Mode REMOTE Mode SERVICE Mode Local & Remote Trip Cct Fail 1 Trip Cct Fail 2 Trip Cct Fail 3 Trip Cct Fail 4 Trip Cct Fail 5 Trip Cct Fail 6 87 Operated A 87 Operated B 87 Operated C 87 Harmonic Detector A 87 Harmonic Detector B 87 Harmonic Detector C 87 BD 87HS Operated A 87HS Operated B 87HS Operated C 87HS Trip 64H-1 Operated 64H-1 Starter 64H-2 Operated 64H-2 Starter 64H-3 Operated 64H-3 Starter 51G-1 Starter 51G-1 Operated 51G-2 Starter 51G-2 Operated UVGuardBlock (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 23 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications 10243 10244 10246 10247 10249 10250 10252 10253 10260 10261 10263 10264 10266 10267 10269 10270 10272 10273 10275 10276 10280 10281 10283 10284 10286 10287 10290 10291 10310 10311 10320 10321 10333 10334 10336 10337 10501 10502 10503 10504 10505 10506 10507 10508 10509 10510 10511 10512 10513 10514 10515 10516 10601 10602 10603 10604 10605 10606 10607 10608 10609 10610 10611 10612 27/59-1 Operated 27/59-1 Starter 27/59-2 Operated 27/59-2 Starter 27/59-3 Operated 27/59-3 Starter 27/59-4 Operated 27/59-4 Starter 81-1 Operated 81-1 Starter 81-2 Operated 81-2 Starter 81-3 Operated 81-3 Starter 81-4 Operated 81-4 Starter 81-5 Operated 81-5 Starter 81-6 Operated 81-6 Starter 24DT-1 Operated 24DT-1 Starter 24DT-2 Operated 24DT-2 Starter 24IT Starter 24IT Operated 49 Trip 49 Alarm 50G-1 Operated 50G-1 Starter 50G-2 Operated 50G-2 Starter 51G-3 Starter 51G-3 Operated 51G-4 Starter 51G-4 Operated Virtual Input 1 Virtual Input 2 Virtual Input 3 Virtual Input 4 Virtual Input 5 Virtual Input 6 Virtual Input 7 Virtual Input 8 Virtual Input 9 Virtual Input 10 Virtual Input 11 Virtual Input 12 Virtual Input 13 Virtual Input 14 Virtual Input 15 Virtual Input 16 Led 1 Led 2 Led 3 Led 4 Led 5 Led 6 Led 7 Led 8 Led 9 Led 10 Led 11 Led 12 (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 24 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications 10613 10614 10615 10616 10617 10618 10619 10620 10621 10622 10623 10624 10701 10702 10703 10704 10705 10706 10707 10708 10709 10710 10711 10712 10713 10714 10715 10716 10717 10718 10719 10720 10721 10722 10723 10724 10800 10801 10802 10803 10804 10805 10806 12100 12101 12102 12103 12104 12105 12107 12108 12109 12110 12111 12112 12114 12115 12117 12118 12120 12121 12200 12201 12202 Led 13 Led 14 Led 15 Led 16 Led 17 Led 18 Led 19 Led 20 Led 21 Led 22 Led 23 Led 24 Led PU 1 Led PU 2 Led PU 3 Led PU 4 Led PU 5 Led PU 6 Led PU 7 Led PU 8 Led PU 9 Led PU 10 Led PU 11 Led PU 12 Led PU 13 Led PU 14 Led PU 15 Led PU 16 Led PU 17 Led PU 18 Led PU 19 Led PU 20 Led PU 21 Led PU 22 Led PU 23 Led PU 24 Cold Start Warm Start Re-Start Power On SW Forced Restart Unexpected Restart Reset Start Count 51-1 Starter A 51-1 Starter B 51-1 Starter C 51-1 Operated A 51-1 Operated B 51-1 Operated C 50-1 Starter A 50-1 Starter B 50-1 Starter C 50-1 Operated A 50-1 Operated B 50-1 Operated C 51N-1 Starter 51N-1 Operated 50N-1 Starter 50N-1 Operated 51-1 50-1 51-2 Starter A 51-2 Starter B 51-2 Starter C (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 25 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications 12203 12204 12205 12207 12208 12209 12210 12211 12212 12214 12215 12217 12218 12220 12221 12400 12401 12402 12403 12405 12406 12407 12408 12410 12411 12412 12413 12414 12415 12416 12417 12418 12419 12500 12501 12502 12503 12504 12505 12506 12507 12508 12509 12510 12511 12512 12513 12514 12515 12516 12517 12518 12519 12520 12521 12522 12523 12524 12525 12526 12527 12544 12545 12546 51-2 Operated A 51-2 Operated B 51-2 Operated C 50-2 Starter A 50-2 Starter B 50-2 Starter C 50-2 Operated A 50-2 Operated B 50-2 Operated C 51N-2 Starter 51N-2 Operated 50N-2 Starter 50N-2 Operated 51-1 50-1 50BF-1 ReTrip 50BF-1 BackTrip 50BF-2 ReTrip 50BF-2 BackTrip 59NIT Starter 59NDT Starter 59NIT Operated 59NDT Operated 46IT-1 Starter 46IT-2 Starter 46IT-1 Operated 46IT-2 Operated 46DT-1 Operated 46DT-2 Operated 37-1 Starter 37-2 Starter 37-1 Operated 37-2 Operated General Alarm 1 General Alarm 2 General Alarm 3 General Alarm 4 General Alarm 5 General Alarm 6 General Alarm 7 General Alarm 8 General Alarm 9 General Alarm 10 General Alarm 11 General Alarm 12 Quick Logic E1 Quick Logic E2 Quick Logic E3 Quick Logic E4 Quick Logic E5 Quick Logic E6 Quick Logic E7 Quick Logic E8 Quick Logic E9 Quick Logic E10 Quick Logic E11 Quick Logic E12 Quick Logic E13 Quick Logic E14 Quick Logic E15 Quick Logic E16 Close Circuit Fail 1 Close Circuit Fail 2 Close Circuit Fail 3 (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 26 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications 12547 12548 12549 12560 12561 12562 12563 12565 12566 12567 12568 12570 12571 12572 12573 12574 12575 12576 12577 12578 12579 12580 12581 12582 12583 12584 12585 12820 12821 Close Circuit Fail 4 Close Circuit Fail 5 Close Circuit Fail 6 46BC-1 46BC-2 CB1 Total Trip Count CB1 Delta Trip Count I^2t CB1 Wear I^2t CB2 Wear CB2 Total Trip Count CB2 Delta Trip Count 81HBL2 81HBL5 37G-1 37G-2 Close CB1 CB1 Fail To Close CB1 DBI Alarm Open CB1 CB1 Fail To Open Close CB2 CB2 Fail To Close CB2 DBI Alarm Open CB2 CB2 Fail To Open CB1 Trip Time Alarm CB2 Trip Time Alarm CB1 CB2 (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 27 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications Registers Address 30001 30002 30010 30012 30014 Format 1 Register 3 8 Registers UINT16 UINT16 UINT16 30016 30018 Name No.of Events In Store Event Record Number of Fault Records Number of Event Records Number of Waveform Records Number of CPU resets Number of CPU warmstarts 30100 30102 30104 30106 30108 30110 30112 30114 30116 30118 30120 30122 Operate Ia Operate Ib Operate Ic Restrain Ia Restrain Ib Restrain Ic nd W1 2 Harmonic Ia nd W1 2 Harmonic Ib nd W1 2 Harmonic Ic nd W2 2 Harmonic Ia nd W2 2 Harmonic Ib nd W2 2 Harmonic Ic FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 Ia x Inom 30200 30202 30204 30206 30208 30210 Primary Ig-1 Secondary Ig-1 Nominal Ig-1 Primary Ig-2 Seondary Ig-2 Nominal Ig-2 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 Ig kA Ig A Ig x Inom Ig kA Ig A Ig x Inom 30400 30402 30404 30406 Primary Voltage kV Secondary Voltage V Nominal Voltage xVn Frequency Hz FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 kV V X Vnom 30420 30421 30422 30423 30424 30425 30426 30430 30431 30432 30433 30434 30435 30436 CB1 Wear A CB1 Wear B CB1 Wear C CB1 Wear A Remaining CB1 Wear B Remaining CB1 Wear C Remaining CB1 Wear Minimum CB2 Wear A CB2 Wear B CB2 Wear C CB2 Wear A Remaining CB2 Wear B Remaining CB2 Wear C Remaining CB2 Wear Minimum FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 30502 30504 V/f Value xVn/fn V/f IDMTL Status % FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 30602 30604 30606 Thermal Status Ph A Thermal Status Ph B Thermal Status Ph C FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP % % % 30610 30612 30614 30616 CB1 Total Trip Count CB1 Delta Trip Count CB2 Total Trip Count CB2 Delta Trip Count UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 CB1 Total Trip Count CB1 Delta Trip Count CB2 Total Trip Count CB2 Delta Trip Count 30700 W1 Ia Last Trip FP_32BITS_3DP (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Multiplier 0 0 Description UINT16 UINT16 1 0.000001 0.000001 0.000001 0.000001 0.000001 0.000001 CB1 Wear A CB1 Wear B CB1 Wear C CB1 Wear A Remaining CB1 Wear B Remaining CB1 Wear C Remaining CB1 Wear Minimum CB2 Wear A CB2 Wear B CB2 Wear C CB2 Wear A Remaining CB2 Wear B Remaining CB2 Wear C Remaining CB2 Wear Minimum 1 1 1 Ia Fault Chapter 4 Page 28 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications Address 30702 30704 30706 30708 30710 30714 30716 Name W1 Ib Last Trip W1 Ic Last Trip W2 Ia Last Trip W2 Ib Last Trip W2 Ic Last Trip Ig-1 Last Trip Ig-2 Last Trip Format 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 31100 31102 31104 31106 31108 31110 31112 31114 31116 31118 31120 31122 31124 31126 31128 W1 Primary Ia W1 Primary Ib W1 Primary Ic W1 Secondary Ia W1 Secondary Ib W1 Secondary Ic W1 Nominal Ia W1 Nominal Ib W1 Nominal Ic W1 Line Ia W1 Line Ib W1 Line Ic W1 Relay Ia W1 Relay Ib W1 Relay Ic FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 31200 31202 31204 31206 31208 31210 31212 31214 31216 31218 31220 31222 31224 31226 31228 31300 31302 31304 31306 31308 31310 31312 31314 31316 31318 31320 31322 31324 31326 31328 32400 32402 32404 32406 32408 32410 32412 32414 32416 W2 Primary Ia W2 Primary Ib W2 Primary Ic W2 Secondary Ia W2 Secondary Ib W2 Secondary Ic W2 Nominal Ia W2 Nominal Ib W2 Nominal Ic W2 Line Ia W2 Line Ib W2 Line Ic W2 Relay Ia W2 Relay Ib W2 Relay Ic W3 Primary Ia W3 Primary Ib W3 Primary Ic W3 Secondary Ia W3 Secondary Ib W3 Secondary Ic W3 Nominal Ia W3 Nominal Ib W3 Nominal Ic W3 Line Ia W3 Line Ib W3 Line Ic W3 Relay Ia W3 Relay Ib W3 Relay Ic W1 I Phase A Max W1 I Phase B Max W1 I Phase C Max W2 I Phase A Max W2 I Phase B Max W2 I Phase C Max W3 I Phase A Max W3 I Phase B Max W3 I Phase C Max FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Multiplier Description Ib Fault Ic Fault Ia Fault Ib Fault Ic Fault In Fault In Fault 1 A A A A A A x Inom x Inom x Inom kA kA kA x Inom x Inom x Inom 1 A A A A A A x Inom x Inom x Inom kA kA kA x Inom x Inom x Inom W3 Ia kA W3 Ib kA W3 Ic kA W3 Ia A W3 Ib A W3 Ic A W3 Ia xIn W3 Ib xIn W3 Ic xIn W3 Line Ia xIn W3 Line Ib xIn W3 Line Ic xIn W3 Relay Ia xIn W3 Relay Ib xIn W3 Relay Ic xIn Max Current W1 Ia Max Current W1 Ib Max Current W1 Ic Max Current W2 Ia Max Current W2 Ib Max Current W2 Ic W3 Max Current Ia W3 Max Current Ib W3 Max Current Ic Chapter 4 Page 29 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications 1) FP_32BITS_3DP: 2 registers - 32 bit fixed point, a 32 bit integer containing a value to 3 decimal places e.g. 50000 sent = 50.000 2) UINT16: 1 register - standard 16 bit unsigned integer 3) Sequence of 8 registers containing an event record. Read address 30002 for 8 registers (16 bytes), each read returns the earliest event record and removes it from the internal store. Repeat this process for the number of events in the register 30001, or until no more events are returned. (the error condition exception code 2) Holding Registers (Read Write values) Address 40001 Description Time Meter Event Format The format of the event record is defined by the zero byte. It signifies the type of record which is used to decode the event information. The zero byte can be one of the following. Type 1 2 4 Description Event Event with Relative Time Measurand Event with Relative Time (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 30 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications Section 5: DNP3.0 Definitions 5.1 Device Profile The following table provides a "Device Profile Document" in the standard format defined in the DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions Document. While it is referred to in the DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions as a "Document," it is in fact a table, and only a component of a total interoperability guide. The table, in combination with the Implementation Table provided in Section 5.2 (beginning on page 34), and the Point List Tables provided in Section 5.3 (beginning on page 44), should provide a complete configuration/interoperability guide for communicating with a device implementing the Triangle MicroWorks, Inc. DNP 3.0 Slave Source Code Library. DNP V3.0 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT (Also see the DNP 3.0 Implementation Table in Section 5.2, beginning on page 34.) Vendor Name: Siemens Protection Devices Ltd. Device Name: 7SR242, using the Triangle MicroWorks, Inc. DNP3 Slave Source Code Library, Version 3. Highest DNP Level Supported: Device Function: For Requests: Level 3 Master For Responses: Level 3 Slave Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported (the complete list is described in the attached table): For static (non-change-event) object requests, request qualifier codes 07 and 08 (limited quantity), and 17 and 28 (index) are supported. Static object requests sent with qualifiers 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. Output Event Object 11 is supported. Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets): Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets): Transmitted: 256 Received 256 Maximum Data Link Re-tries: Transmitted: 2048 Received 2048 Maximum Application Layer Re-tries: None Fixed (3) Configurable from 0 to 65535 Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation: None Configurable Never Always Sometimes Configurable as: Never, Only for multi-frame messages, or Always Requires Application Layer Confirmation: Never Always When reporting Event Data (Slave devices only) When sending multi-fragment responses (Slave devices only) Sometimes Configurable as: "Only when reporting event data", or "When reporting event data or multi-fragment messages." (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 31 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications DNP V3.0 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT (Also see the DNP 3.0 Implementation Table in Section 5.2, beginning on page 34.) Timeouts while waiting for: Data Link Confirm: Complete Appl. Fragment: Application Confirm: Complete Appl. Response: None None None None Fixed - 2sec Fixed at ____ Fixed - 10sec Fixed at ____ Variable Variable Variable Variable Configurable. Configurable Configurable. Configurable Others: Transmission Delay, (0 sec) Select/Operate Arm Timeout, (5 sec) Need Time Interval, (30 minutes) Application File Timeout, (60 sec) Unsolicited Notification Delay, (5 seconds) Unsolicited Response Retry Delay, (between 3 - 9 seconds) Unsolicited Offline Interval, (30 seconds) Binary Change Event Scan Period, (Polled, Not Applicable) Double Bit Change Event Scan Period, (Unsupported - Not Applicable) Analog Change Event Scan Period, (Unsupported - Not Applicable) Counter Change Event Scan Period, (Unsupported - Not Applicable) Frozen Counter Change Event Scan Period, (Unsupported - Not Applicable) String Change Event Scan Period, (Unsupported - Not Applicable) Virtual Terminal Event Scan Period, (Unsupported - Not Applicable) Sends/Executes Control Operations: WRITE Binary Outputs SELECT/OPERATE DIRECT OPERATE DIRECT OPERATE - NO ACK Never Never Never Never Always Always Always Always Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable Count > 1 Pulse On Pulse Off Latch On Latch Off Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable Queue Clear Queue Never Never Never Never Never Never Never Always Always Always Always Always Always Always Sometimes Configurable Sometimes Configurable Attach explanation if 'Sometimes' or 'Configurable' was checked for any operation. Reports Binary Input Change Events when no Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events specific variation requested: when no specific variation requested: Never Only time-tagged Only non-time-tagged Configurable to send one or the other Sends Unsolicited Responses: Never Configurable Only certain objects Sometimes (attach explanation) ENABLE/DISABLE UNSOLICITED Function codes supported Default Counter Object/Variation: No Counters Reported Configurable Default Object Default Variation: Point-by-point list attached (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Never Binary Input Change With Time Binary Input Change With Relative Time Configurable Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses: Never When Device Restarts When Status Flags Change No other options are permitted. Counters Roll Over at: No Counters Reported Configurable (attach explanation) 16 Bits 32 Bits Other Value: _____ Point-by-point list attached Chapter 4 Page 32 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications DNP V3.0 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT (Also see the DNP 3.0 Implementation Table in Section 5.2, beginning on page 34.) Sends Multi-Fragment Responses: Yes No Configurable Sequential File Transfer Support: File Transfer Support Append File Mode Custom Status Code Strings Permissions Field File Events Assigned to Class File Events Send Immediately Multiple Blocks in a Fragment Max Number of Files Open Yes No 0 (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No Chapter 4 Page 33 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications 5.2 Implementation Table The following table identifies which object variations, function codes, and qualifiers the Triangle MicroWorks, Inc. DNP 3.0 Slave Source Code Library supports in both request messages and in response messages. For static (non-change-event) objects, requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. Requests sent with qualifiers 17 or 28 will be responded with qualifiers 17 or 28. For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded. In the table below, text shaded as 00, 01 (start stop) indicates Subset Level 3 functionality (beyond Subset Level 2). In the table below, text shaded as 07, 08 (limited qty) indicates functionality beyond Subset Level 3. REQUEST RESPONSE (Library will parse) (Library will respond with) OBJECT Object Variation Number Number Description Function Codes Function Qualifier Qualifier Codes (hex) (dec) Codes (dec) Codes (hex) 1 1 0 Binary Input - Any Variation (read) 22 (assign class) 00, 01(start-stop) 06(no range, or all) 07, 08(limited qty) 17, 27, 28(index) 00, 01(start-stop) 1 1 (default - see note 1) Binary Input 1 (read) 06(no range, or all) 07, 08(limited qty) 00, 01(start-sto 17, 28(index - 129 (response) see note 2) 17, 27, 28(index) 00, 01(start-stop) 1 2 Binary Input with Status 1 (read) 06(no range, or all) 07, 08(limited qty) 00, 01(start-sto 17, 28(index - 129 (response) see note 2) 17, 27, 28(index) 2 2 2 0 Binary Input Change - Any Variation 1 Binary Input Change without Time 2 Binary Input Change with Time 1 (read) 06(no range, or all) 07, 08(limited qty) 1 1 (read) (read) 06(no range, or all) 07, 08(limited qty) 06(no range, or all) 07, 08(limited qty) 3 2 (default - see note 1) Binary Input Change with Relative Time 1 (read) 1 (read) 06(no range, or all) 07, 08(limited qty) 00, 01 3 0 Double Bit Input - Any Variation 06 22 129 (response) 130 (unsol. resp) 129 (response) 130 (unsol. resp) 129 (response) 130 (unsol. resp) 17, 28 (index) 17, 28 (index) 17, 28 (index) (start-stop) (no range, or all) (assign class) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 27, 28 (index) (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 34 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications REQUEST RESPONSE (Library will parse) (Library will respond with) OBJECT Object Variation Number Number Description Function Codes Function Qualifier Qualifier Codes (hex) (dec) Codes (dec) Codes (hex) 00, 01 1 3 (default - Double Bit Input see note 1) 1 (read) 06 2 Double Bit Input with Status 17, 28 (no range, or all) 129 07, 08 (start-stop) (index - (response) see note 1) (limited qty) 17, 27, 28 (index) 00, 01 3 00, 01 (start-stop) 1 (read) 06 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 129 (response) (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp) (no range, or all) 129 (response) (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp) (no range, or all) 129 (response) 130 (unsol. resp) 07, 08 (start-stop) (index - see note 1) (limited qty) 17, 27, 28 (index) 4 4 4 0 1 2 3 4 (default - see note 1) Double Bit Input Change - Any Variation 1 Double Bit Input Change without Time 1 Double Bit Input Change with Time 1 Double Bit Input Change with Relative Time 1 0 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (read) 06 (read) 06 07, 08 (read) 06 07, 08 (read) Binary Output - Any 22 (assign Variation class) (limited qty) (no range, or all) 07, 08 1 10 (read) (limited qty) 17, 28 (index ) 17, 28 (index ) 17, 28 (index ) 00, 01(start-stop) 06(no range, or all) 07, 08(limited qty) 17, 27, 28(index) 00, 01(start-stop) 1 10 1 (read) 07, 08(limited qty) Binary Output (write 11 0 00, 01(start-stop) 00, 01(start-stop) 2 (default - see note 1) Binary Output Status 1 (read) 06(no range, or all) 07, 08(limited qty) (default - see note 1) 00, 01(start-sto 17, 28(index - 129 (response) see note 2) 17, 27, 28(index) Binary Output Change - Any Variation 1 (read) 06(no range, or all) 07, 08(limited qty) 1 11 17, 28(index - 129 (response) see note 1) 17, 27, 28(index) 1 10 06(no range, or all) 00, 01(start-sto Binary Output Change without Time 1 (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited (read) 06(no range, or all) 07, 08(limited qty) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index ) 130 (unsol. resp) Chapter 4 Page 35 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications REQUEST RESPONSE (Library will parse) (Library will respond with) OBJECT Object Variation Number Number 11 2 Description Binary Output Change with Time Function Codes Function Qualifier Qualifier Codes (hex) (dec) Codes (dec) Codes (hex) 1 (read) 06(no range, or all) 07, 08(limited qty) 129 (response) 130 (unsol. resp) 17, 28 (index ) 00, 01(start-stop) 12 0 Control Relay Output Block 22 (assign class) 06(no range, or all) 07, 08(limited qty) 17, 27, 28(index) 3 12 1 Control Relay Output Block (select) 4 (operate) 5 (direct op) 17, 28 (index) 129 echo of (response) request 7(limited quantity) 129 echo of (response) request 00, 01(start-stop) 129 echo of (response) request 6(dir. op, noack) 3 12 2 Pattern Control Block (select) 4 (operate) 5 (direct op) 6(dir. op, noack) 3 12 3 Pattern Mask (select) 4 (operate) 5 (direct op) 6(dir. op, noack) 13 13 13 20 0 1 2 0 Binary Output Command Event - Any Variation 1 Binary Output Command Event without Time 1 Binary Output Command Event with Time 1 Binary Input - Any Variation (read) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (read) 06 129 (response) (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp) (no range, or all) 129 (response) 130 (unsol. resp) (no range, or all) 07, 08 1 (read) (read) 22 (assign class) 06 (limited qty) 07, 08 (limited qty) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 17, 28 (index ) 17, 28 (index ) 00, 01 (start-stop) (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty 17, 27, 28 (index) 7 (freeze) 8 (freeze noack) 00, 01 06 9 (start-stop) (no range, or all) (freeze clear) 07, 08 (limited qty) 00, 01 (start-stop) 10 (frz. cl. noack) 1 20 1 32-Bit Binary Counter (with Flag) (read) 06 17, 28 (no range, or all) 129 07, 08 (limited qty) (index - (response) see note 2) 17, 27, 28 (index) (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 36 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications OBJECT Object Variation Number Number Description REQUEST RESPONSE (Library will parse) (Library will respond with) Function Codes Function Qualifier Qualifier Codes (hex) (dec) Codes (dec) Codes (hex) 00, 01 1 20 2 00, 01 (start-stop) (start-stop) (read) 06 16-Bit Binary Counter (with Flag) 17, 28 (no range, or all) 129 07, 08 (index - (response) see note 2) (limited qty) 17, 27, 28 (index) 20 3 32-Bit Delta Counter (with Flag) 20 4 16-Bit Delta Counter (with Flag) 5 00, 01 1 20 (default - see note 1) 06 32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag 07, 08 (start-stop) (index - (response) see note 2) (limited qty) 17, 27, 28 (index) 00, 01 6 17, 28 (no range, or all) 129 1 20 00, 01 (start-stop) (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) (start-stop) (read) 06 16-Bit Binary Counter without Flag 17, 28 (no range, or all) 129 07, 08 (index - (response) see note 2) (limited qty) 17, 27, 28 (index) 20 7 32-Bit Delta Counter without Flag 20 8 16-Bit Delta Counter without Flag 00, 01 1 21 0 Frozen Counter - Any Variation 06 22 (start-stop) (read) (no range, or all) (assign class) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 27, 28 (index) 00, 01 21 1 32-Bit Frozen Counter (with Flag) 1 (read) 06 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (no range, or all) 129 07, 08 (start-stop) (index - (response) see note 2) (limited qty) 17, 27, 28 (index) 00, 01 21 2 16-Bit Frozen Counter (with Flag) 1 (read) 06 (start-stop) 00, 01 (start-stop) (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index - 129 07, 08 (limited qty) (response) see note 2) 17, 27, 28 (index) 21 3 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter (with Flag) 21 4 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter (with Flag) (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 37 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications OBJECT Object Variation Number Number Description REQUEST RESPONSE (Library will parse) (Library will respond with) Function Codes Function Qualifier Qualifier Codes (hex) (dec) Codes (dec) Codes (hex) 00, 01 21 5 32-Bit Frozen Counter with Time Of Freeze 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 00, 01(start-stop (start-stop) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index - see note 1) (limited qty) 17, 27, 28 (index) 00, 01 21 6 16-Bit Frozen Counter with Time Of Freeze 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 00, 01(start-stop (start-stop) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index - see note 1) (limited qty) 17, 27, 28 (index) 21 7 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter with Time Of Freeze 21 8 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter with Time Of Freeze 00, 01 9 21 (default - see note 1) 32-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 1 (read) 06 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 17, 28 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (start-stop) (response) (index - see note 2) (limited qty) 17, 27, 28 (index) 00, 01 21 10 16-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 1 (read) 06 (start-stop) (no range, or all) 07, 08 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index - see note 2) (limited qty) 17, 27, 28 (index) 21 11 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter without Flag 21 12 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter without Flag 22 0 Counter Change Event - Any Variation 1 22 (default - see note 1) 2 22 06 1 07, 08 32-Bit Counter Change Event without Time 1 16-Bit Counter Change Event without Time 1 06 (read) 06 32-Bit Delta Counter Change Event without Time 22 4 16-Bit Delta Counter Change Event without Time 22 5 32-Bit Counter Change Event with Time 1 16-Bit Counter Change Event with Time 1 (read) 06 129 (response) (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp) (no range, or all) 129 (response) (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp) (no range, or all) 129 (response) (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp) (no range, or all) 129 (response) 130 (unsol. resp) 07, 08 (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited (read) 06 (limited qty) (no range, or all) 07, 08 3 6 (read) 07, 08 22 22 (no range, or all) (read) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 17, 28 (index) 17, 28 (index) 17, 28 (index) Chapter 4 Page 38 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications OBJECT Object Variation Number Number Description 7 32-Bit Delta Counter Change Event with Time 22 8 16-Bit Delta Counter Change Event with Time 0 Frozen Counter Event (Variation 0 is used to request default variation) 1 32-Bit Frozen Counter Event 1 16-Bit Frozen Counter Event 1 1 23 23 (default - see note 1) 2 06 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event 23 5 32-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time 1 16-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time 1 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event with Time 23 8 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event with Time 0 Analog Input - Any Variation (response) (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp) (no range, or all) 17,28 (index) 129 (response) (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp) 17,28 (index) (no range, or all) 129 (response) (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp) (no range, or all) 129 (response) 130 (unsol. resp) (read) (read) 06 07, 08 (read) 06 07, 08 1 30 129 (no range, or all) 07, 08 4 (limited qty) (read) 07, 08 23 7 (no range, or all) (read) 06 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event 23 (Library will respond with) 07, 08 3 6 (Library will parse) 06 23 23 RESPONSE Function Codes Function Qualifier Qualifier Codes (hex) (dec) Codes (dec) Codes (hex) 22 23 REQUEST (read) 22(assign class) (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01(start-stop) 06(no range, or all) 07, 08(limited qty) 17, 27, 28(index) 00, 01(start-stop) 30 1 32-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 06(no range, or all) 07, 08(limited qty) 00, 01(start-sto 17, 28(index - 129 (response) see note 2) 17, 27, 28(index) 00, 01(start-stop) 30 2 16-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 06(no range, or all) 07, 08(limited qty) 00, 01(start-sto 17, 28(index - 129 (response) see note 2) 17, 27, 28(index) (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 39 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications OBJECT Object Variation Number Number Description (default - see note 1) RESPONSE (Library will parse) (Library will respond with) Function Codes Function Qualifier Qualifier Codes (hex) (dec) Codes (dec) Codes (hex) 00, 01(start-stop) 3 30 REQUEST 32-Bit Analog Input without Flag 1 (read) 06(no range, or all) 07, 08(limited qty) 00, 01(start-sto 17, 28(index - 129 (response) see note 2) 17, 27, 28(index) 00, 01(start-stop) 30 4 16-Bit Analog Input without Flag 1 (read) 06(no range, or all) 07, 08(limited qty) 00, 01(start-sto 17, 28(index - 129 (response) see note 2) 17, 27, 28(index) 00, 01(start-stop) 30 5 short floating point 1 (read) 06(no range, or all) 07, 08(limited qty) 00, 01(start-sto 17, 28(index - 129 (response) see note 2) 17, 27, 28(index) 00, 01(start-stop) 30 6 long floating point 1 (read) 06(no range, or all) 07, 08(limited qty) 00, 01(start-sto 17, 28(index - 129 (response) see note 1) 17, 27, 28(index) 31 0 Frozen Analog Input - Any Variation 31 1 32-Bit Frozen Analog input 31 2 16-Bit Frozen Analog input 31 3 32-Bit Frozen Analog input with Time of freeze 31 4 16-Bit Frozen Analog input with Time of freeze 31 5 32-Bit Frozen Analog input without Flag 31 6 16-Bit Frozen Analog input without Flag 32 0 Analog Change Event - Any Variation 1 32 32 (default - see note 1) 2 06 1 (no range, or all) (read) 07, 08 32-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 1 16-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 1 32-Bit Analog Change Event with Time 1 (read) 06 129 (response) (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp) (no range, or all) 129 (response) 130 (unsol. resp) (no range, or all) 07, 08 (read) 06 (limited qty) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 17, 28 (index) 129 32 3 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) (response) 17, 28 (index) 130 (unsol. resp) (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 40 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications REQUEST RESPONSE (Library will parse) (Library will respond with) OBJECT Object Variation Number Number Description Function Codes Function Qualifier Qualifier Codes (hex) (dec) Codes (dec) Codes (hex) 129 32 4 16-Bit Analog Change Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) (response) 17, 28 (index) 130 (unsol. resp) 129 32 5 short floating point Analog Change Event without Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) (response) 17, 28 (index) 130 (unsol. resp) 129 32 6 long floating point Analog Change Event without Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) (response) 17, 28 (index) 130 (unsol. resp) 32 32 7 8 short floating point Analog Change Event with Time 1 long floating point Analog Change Event with Time 1 33 0 Frozen Analog Event - Any Variation 33 1 32-Bit Frozen Analog Event without Time 33 2 16-Bit Frozen Analog Event without Time 33 3 32-Bit Frozen Analog Event with Time 33 4 16-Bit Frozen Analog Event with Time 33 5 Short Floating Point Frozen Analog Event 33 6 Long Floating Point Frozen Analog Event 33 7 Extended Floating Point Frozen Analog Event 0 Analog Input Deadband (Variation 0 is used to request default variation) 34 (read) 06 129 (response) (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp) (no range, or all) 129 (response) 130 (unsol. resp) (no range, or all) 07, 08 1 (read) (read) 06 07, 08 (limited qty) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 27, 28 (index) 1 (read) 06 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 16 bit Analog Input Deadband 17, 28 (no range, or all) 07, 08 1 17, 28 (index) (no range, or all) 00, 01 34 17, 28 (index) (limited qty) (start-stop) (index - (response) see note 2) 17, 27, 28 (index) 2 (write) 00, 01 (start-stop) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 27, 28 (index) (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 41 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications REQUEST RESPONSE (Library will parse) (Library will respond with) OBJECT Object Variation Number Number Description Function Codes Function Qualifier Qualifier Codes (hex) (dec) Codes (dec) Codes (hex) 00, 01 1 (read) 07, 08 (default - 32 bit Analog Input see note Deadband 1) 17, 28 (no range, or all) 129 2 34 06 00, 01 (start-stop) (start-stop) (index - (response) see note 2) (limited qty) 17, 27, 28 (index) 2 (write) 00, 01 (start-stop) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 27, 28 (index) 00, 01 1 (read) 06 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 34 3 07, 08 Short Floating Point Analog Input Deadband 17, 28 (no range, or all) (start-stop) (index - (response) see note 2) (limited qty) 17, 27, 28 (index) 2 (write) 00, 01 (start-stop) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 27, 28 (index) 50 0 Time and Date 1 50 50 51 (default - see note 1) 3 1 (read) 2 (write) 07 (limited qt 07, (limited qty = 1) Time and Date Time and Date Last 2 Recorded Time (write) 129 (response) 07(limited qty = 1) 07(limited qty) 129 (response) 07(limited qty) 1 Time and Date CTO 51 2 Unsynchronized Time and Date CTO 52 1 Time Delay Coarse 07(limited qty) 129 (response) (qty = 1) 52 2 Time Delay Fine 07(limited qty) 129 (response) (qty = 1) 60 0 Not Defined 60 1 Class 0 Data 130 (unsol. resp) (qty = 1) 129 (response) 07(limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp) 1 (read) 06(no range, or all) 1 (read) 06(no range, or all) (qty = 1) 07, 08(limited qty) 60 2 Class 1 Data 20(enbl. unsol.) 21(dab. unsol.) 06(no range, or all) 22(assign class) (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 42 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications REQUEST RESPONSE (Library will parse) (Library will respond with) OBJECT Object Variation Number Number Description Function Codes Function Qualifier Qualifier Codes (hex) (dec) Codes (dec) Codes (hex) 1 60 3 Class 2 Data (read) 20(enbl. unsol.) 21(dab. unsol.) 06(no range, or all) 07, 08(limited qty) 06(no range, or all) 22(assign class) 1 (read) 06(no range, or all) 07, 08(limited qty) 60 4 Class 3 Data 20(enbl. unsol.) 21(dab. unsol.) 06(no range, or all) 22(assign class) 1 80 1 (read) Internal Indications 2 (write) (see note 3) No Object (function code only) 13(cold restart) No Object (function code only) 14(warm restart) No Object (function code only) 23(delay meas.) No Object (function code only) 00, 01(start-stop) 129(respons 00, 01 (startstop) 00 (start-stop) index=7 24 (record current time) Note 1: A Default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. Default variations are configurable; however, default settings for the configuration parameters are indicated in the table above. Note 2: For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28, respectively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. (For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.) Note 3: Writes of Internal Indications are only supported for index 7 (Restart IIN1-7) (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 43 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications 5.3 Point List The tables below identify all the default data points provided by the implementation of the Triangle MicroWorks, Inc. DNP 3.0 Slave Source Code Library. BinaryInput Points The default binary input event buffer size is set to allow 100 events. Note, not all points listed here apply to all builds of devices. Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input 2 with status) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 3 (Binary Input Change with Relative Time) Default Variation Event Object 2 Name/Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Binary Input 1 Binary Input 2 Binary Input 3 Binary Input 4 Binary Input 5 Binary Input 6 Binary Input 7 Binary Input 8 Binary Input 9 Binary Input 10 Binary Input 11 Binary Input 12 Binary Input 13 Binary Input 14 Binary Input 15 Binary Input 16 Binary Input 17 Binary Input 18 Binary Input 19 Binary Input 20 Binary Input 21 Binary Input 22 Binary Input 23 Binary Input 24 Binary Input 25 Binary Input 26 Binary Input 27 Binary Input 28 Binary Input 29 Binary Input 30 Binary Input 31 Binary Input 32 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 35 36 37 38 Remote mode Service mode Local mode Local & Remote 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 40 41 42 43 General Trip Trip Circuit Fail A-Starter B-Starter 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Default Class Default Variation Static Object 1 Point Index Chapter 4 Page 44 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input 2 with status) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 3 (Binary Input Change with Relative Time) Default Variation Event Object 2 Name/Description 44 45 C-Starter General Starter 2 2 2 2 2 2 47 48 49 50 Trip L1 Trip L2 Start/Pick-up N Trip L3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 87BD 87HS 51-1 50-1 51N-1 50N-1 51G-1 50G-1 51-2 50-2 51N-2 50N-2 51G-2 50G-2 51-3 50-3 51N-3 50N-3 51G-3 50G-3 50BF-1-1 50BF-1-2 50BF-2-1 50BF-2-2 49-Alarm 49-Trip 60 CTS 46IT-1 46DT-1 46IT-2 46DT-2 64H-1 64H-2 64H-3 37-1 37-2 46BC-1 46BC-2 27/59-1 27/59-2 27/59-3 27/59-4 59NIT 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Default Class Default Variation Static Object 1 Point Index Chapter 4 Page 45 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input 2 with status) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 3 (Binary Input Change with Relative Time) Point Index Name/Description 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 121 122 124 125 126 127 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 59NDT 81-1 81-2 81-3 81-4 81-5 81-6 24DT-1 24DT-2 24IT Trip Circuit Fail 1 Trip Circuit Fail 2 Trip Circuit Fail 3 Trip Circuit Fail 4 Trip Circuit Fail 5 Trip Circuit Fail 6 CB1 Total Trip Count CB1 Delta Trip Count I^2t CB1 Wear I^2t CB2 Wear CB2 Total Trip Count CB2 Delta Trip Count General Alarm 1 General Alarm 2 General Alarm 3 General Alarm 4 General Alarm 5 General Alarm 6 General Alarm 7 General Alarm 8 General Alarm 9 General Alarm 10 General Alarm 11 General Alarm 12 Quick Logic E1 Quick Logic E2 Quick Logic E3 Quick Logic E4 Quick Logic E5 Quick Logic E6 Quick Logic E7 Quick Logic E8 Quick Logic E9 Quick Logic E10 Quick Logic E11 Quick Logic E12 Quick Logic E13 Quick Logic E14 Quick Logic E15 Quick Logic E16 (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Default Class 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Default Variation Static Object 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Default Variation Event Object 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Chapter 4 Page 46 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input 2 with status) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 3 (Binary Input Change with Relative Time) Default Variation Event Object 2 Name/Description 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 81HBL2 81HBL5 37G-1 37G-2 Close Circuit Fail 1 Close Circuit Fail 2 Close Circuit Fail 3 Close Circuit Fail 4 Close Circuit Fail 5 Close Circuit Fail 6 Close Circuit Fail 7 Close Circuit Fail 8 Close Circuit Fail 9 Close Circuit Fail 10 CB1 Trip Time Alarm CB2 Trip Time Alarm Close CB1 CB1 Fail To Close CB1 DBI Open CB1 CB1 Fail To Open Close CB2 CB2 Fail To Close CB2 DBI Open CB2 CB2 Fail To Open E/F Out 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 RL 1 RL 2 RL 3 RL 4 RL 5 RL 6 RL 7 RL 8 RL 9 RL 10 RL 11 RL 12 RL 13 RL 14 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 Setting G1 selected Setting G2 selected Setting G3 selected Setting G4 selected Setting G5 selected Setting G6 selected Setting G7 selected Setting G8 selected 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Default Class Default Variation Static Object 1 Point Index Chapter 4 Page 47 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input 2 with status) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 3 (Binary Input Change with Relative Time) Default Variation Event Object 2 Name/Description 262 263 CB 1 CB 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 268 269 Reset I^2t CB1 Wear Reset I^2t CB2 Wear 2 2 2 2 2 2 277 278 279 CB 3 CB 4 CB 5 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 Virtual Input 1 Virtual Input 2 Virtual Input 3 Virtual Input 4 Virtual Input 5 Virtual Input 6 Virtual Input 7 Virtual Input 8 Virtual Input 9 Virtual Input 10 Virtual Input 11 Virtual Input 12 Virtual Input 13 Virtual Input 14 Virtual Input 15 Virtual Input 16 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 Led 1 Led 2 Led 3 Led 4 Led 5 Led 6 Led 7 Led 8 Led 9 Led 10 Led 11 Led 12 Led 13 Led 14 Led 15 Led 16 Led 17 Led 18 Led 19 Led 20 Led 21 Led 22 Led 23 Led 24 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Default Class Default Variation Static Object 1 Point Index Chapter 4 Page 48 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input 2 with status) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 3 (Binary Input Change with Relative Time) Point Index Name/Description 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 Led PU1 Led PU 2 Led PU 3 Led PU 4 Led PU 5 Led PU 6 Led PU 7 Led PU 8 Led PU 9 Led PU 10 Led PU 11 Led PU 12 Led PU 13 Led PU 14 Led PU 15 Led PU 16 Led PU 17 Led PU 18 Led PU 19 Led PU 20 Led PU 21 Led PU 22 Led PU 23 Led PU 24 5.3.1 Default Class 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Default Variation Static Object 1 Default Variation Event Object 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Double Bit Binary Input Points Double Bit Binary Inputs are by default returned in a class zero interrogation. Double Bit Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 3 Change Event Object Number: 4 Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Double Bit Binary Input packed format) Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 3 (Double Bit Binary Input Event with relative time) Default Point Change Event Name/Description Index Assigned Class (1, 2, 3 or none) 0 CB 1 2 1 CB 2 2 (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 49 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications Binary Output Status Points and Control Relay Output Blocks The following table lists both the Binary Output Status Points (Object 10) and the Control Relay Output Blocks (Object 12). While Binary Output Status Points are included here for completeness, they are not often polled by DNP 3.0 Masters. It is recommended that Binary Output Status points represent the most recent DNP "commanded" value for the corresponding Control Relay Output Block (CROB) point. Because many, if not most, Control Relay Output Block points are controlled through pulse mechanisms, the value of the output status may in fact be meaningless. Binary Output Status points are not recommended to be included in class 0 polls. As an alternative, it is recommended that "actual" status values of Control Relay Output Block points be looped around and mapped as Binary Inputs. (The "actual" status value, as opposed to the "commanded" status value, is the value of the actuated control. For example, a DNP control command may be blocked through hardware or software mechanisms; in this case, the actual status value would indicate the control failed because of the blocking. Looping Control Relay Output Block actual status values as Binary Inputs has several advantages: * it allows actual statuses to be included in class 0 polls, * it allows change event reporting of the actual statuses, which is a more efficient and time-accurate method of communicating control values, * and it allows reporting of time-based information associated with controls, including any delays before controls are actuated, and any durations if the controls are pulsed. The default select/control buffer size is large enough to hold 10 of the largest select requests possible. Default Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status) Control Relay Output Blocks Object Number: 12 Default Default Default Supported Default Point Name/ Class Static Event CROB CROB Index Description Object 10 Object 11 Fields Fields Variation Variation Pulse On 1 Binary Output 1 0 2 2 Pulse On Latch On Pulse On 2 Binary Output 2 0 2 2 Pulse On Latch On Pulse On 3 Binary Output 3 0 2 2 Pulse On Latch On Pulse On 4 Binary Output 4 0 2 2 Pulse On Latch On Pulse On 5 Binary Output 5 0 2 2 Pulse On Latch On Pulse On 6 Binary Output 6 0 2 2 Pulse On Latch On Pulse On 7 Binary Output 7 0 2 2 Pulse On Latch On Pulse On 8 Binary Output 8 0 2 2 Pulse On Latch On Pulse On 9 Binary Output 9 0 2 2 Pulse On Latch On Pulse On 10 Binary Output 10 0 2 2 Pulse On Latch On Pulse On 11 Binary Output 11 0 2 2 Pulse On Latch On Pulse On 12 Binary Output 12 0 2 2 Pulse On Latch On Pulse On 13 Binary Output 13 0 2 2 Pulse On Latch On Pulse On 14 Binary Output 14 0 2 2 Pulse On Latch On 0 Pulse On 33 LED reset 0 2 2 Pulse On Latch On Pulse On 34 Settings Group 1 0 2 2 Latch On Latch On Pulse On 35 Settings Group 2 0 2 2 Latch On Latch On (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 50 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications Default Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status) Control Relay Output Blocks Object Number: 12 Default Default Default Point Name/ Class Static Event Index Description Object 10 Object 11 Variation Variation 36 Settings Group 3 0 2 2 37 Settings Group 4 0 2 2 38 Settings Group 5 0 2 2 39 Settings Group 6 0 2 2 40 Settings Group 7 0 2 2 41 Settings Group 8 0 2 2 42 CB 1 0 2 2 43 CB 2 0 2 2 0 2 2 0 2 2 0 2 2 0 2 2 44 45 46 47 Demand metering reset, write only location. Reset CB1 Total Trip Count, write only location. Reset CB1 Delta Trip Count, write only location. Reset CB1 Lockout Trip Count, write only location. 48 Reset I^2t CB1 Wear 0 2 2 49 Reset I^2t CB2 Wear 0 2 2 0 2 2 0 2 2 0 2 2 50 51 52 Reset CB2 Total Trip Count, write only location. Reset CB2 Delta Trip Count, write only location. Reset CB2 Lockout Trip Count, write only location. 53 Remote mode 0 2 2 54 Service mode 0 2 2 55 Local mode 0 2 2 56 Local & Remote 0 2 2 60 E/F Out 0 2 2 96 User SP Command 1 0 2 2 97 User SP Command 2 0 2 2 98 User SP Command 3 0 2 2 99 User SP Command 4 0 2 2 (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Supported CROB Fields Pulse On Latch On Pulse On Latch On Pulse On Latch On Pulse On Latch On Pulse On Latch On Pulse On Latch On Pulse On Pulse Off Latch On Latch Off Pulse On Pulse Off Latch On Latch Off Pulse On Latch On Pulse On Latch On Pulse On Latch On Pulse On Latch On Pulse On Latch On Pulse On Latch On Pulse On Latch On Pulse On Latch On Pulse On Latch On Pulse On Latch On Pulse On Latch On Pulse On Latch On Pulse On Latch On Pulse On Pulse Off Latch On Latch Off Pulse On Latch On Pulse On Latch On Pulse On Latch On Pulse On Latch On Default CROB Fields Latch On Latch On Latch On Latch On Latch On Latch On Pulse On Pulse Off Pulse On Pulse Off Pulse On Pulse On Pulse On Pulse On Pulse On Pulse On Pulse On Pulse On Pulse On Pulse On Pulse On Pulse On Pulse On Pulse On Pulse Off Pulse On Pulse On Pulse On Pulse On Chapter 4 Page 51 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications Default Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status) Control Relay Output Blocks Object Number: 12 Default Default Default Point Name/ Class Static Event Index Description Object 10 Object 11 Variation Variation 100 User SP Command 5 0 2 2 101 User SP Command 6 0 2 2 102 User SP Command 7 0 2 2 103 User SP Command 8 0 2 2 104 User DP Command 1 0 2 2 105 User DP Command 2 0 2 2 106 User DP Command 3 0 2 2 107 User DP Command 4 0 2 2 108 User DP Command 5 0 2 2 109 User DP Command 6 0 2 2 110 User DP Command 7 0 2 2 111 User DP Command 8 0 2 2 (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Supported CROB Fields Pulse On Latch On Pulse On Latch On Pulse On Latch On Pulse On Latch On Pulse On Pulse Off Latch On Latch Off Pulse On Pulse Off Latch On Latch Off Pulse On Pulse Off Latch On Latch Off Pulse On Pulse Off Latch On Latch Off Pulse On Pulse Off Latch On Latch Off Pulse On Pulse Off Latch On Latch Off Pulse On Pulse Off Latch On Latch Off Pulse On Pulse Off Latch On Latch Off Default CROB Fields Pulse On Pulse On Pulse On Pulse On Pulse On Pulse Off Pulse On Pulse Off Pulse On Pulse Off Pulse On Pulse Off Pulse On Pulse Off Pulse On Pulse Off Pulse On Pulse Off Pulse On Pulse Off Chapter 4 Page 52 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications 5.3.2 Binary Counters The following table lists both the Counters (Object 20) and Counter change events (Onbject 22). The "Default Deadband," and the "Default Change Event Assigned Class" columns are used to represent the absolute amount by which the point must change before a Counter change event will be generated, and once generated in which class poll (1, 2, 3, or none) will the change event be reported. Counters are by default returned in a class zero interrogation. Counters Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 20 Change Event Object Number: 22 Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 5 (32-Bit Counter without Flag) Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Change Event with Flag) Default Default Default Point # Static Event Name Deadband Class Variant Variant 0 3 5 1 Waveform Records 1 1 3 5 1 Fault Records 1 2 3 5 1 Event Records 1 3 3 5 1 Data Log Records 1 4 3 5 1 Number User Files 1 5 3 5 1 Start Count 1 6 3 5 1 Start Count Target 1 7 3 5 1 Active Setting Group 1 21 3 5 1 E1 Counter 1 22 3 5 1 E2 Counter 1 23 3 5 1 E3 Counter 1 24 3 5 1 E4 Counter 1 25 3 5 1 E5 Counter 1 26 3 5 1 E6 Counter 1 27 3 5 1 E7 Counter 1 28 3 5 1 E8 Counter 1 29 3 5 1 E9 Counter 1 30 3 5 1 E10 Counter 1 31 3 5 1 E11 Counter 1 32 3 5 1 E12 Counter 1 33 3 5 1 E13 Counter 1 34 3 5 1 E14 Counter 1 35 3 5 1 E15 Counter 1 36 3 5 1 1 42 3 5 1 E16 Counter CB1 Total Open Count 1 CB1 Delta Open Count 1 1 1 43 3 5 44 3 5 1 CB2 Total Open Count 45 3 5 1 CB2 Delta Open Count (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 1 Chapter 4 Page 53 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications 5.3.3 Frozen Counters The following table lists both the Frozen Counters (Object 21) and Frozen Counter Change Events (Object 23). The "Default Change Event Assigned Class" column is used to define which class poll (1, 2, 3, or none) the change event will be reported. Note the point number of the Frozen Counter must match that of the corresponding Counter. Frozen Counters are by default not returned in a class zero interrogation. Frozen Counters Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 21 Change Event Object Number: 23 Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 9 (32-Bit Counter without Flag) Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Change Event with Flag) Default Default Default Point # Static Event Name Resettable Class Variant Variant 0 2 9 1 Waveform Records 1 2 9 1 Fault Records 2 2 9 1 Event Records 3 2 9 1 Data Log Records 4 2 9 1 Number User Files 5 2 9 1 Start Count 6 2 9 1 Start Count Target 7 2 9 1 Active Setting Group 21 2 9 1 E1 Counter 22 2 9 1 E2 Counter 23 2 9 1 E3 Counter 24 2 9 1 E4 Counter 25 2 9 1 E5 Counter 26 2 9 1 E6 Counter 27 2 9 1 E7 Counter 28 2 9 1 E8 Counter 29 2 9 1 E9 Counter 30 2 9 1 E10 Counter 31 2 9 1 E11 Counter 32 2 9 1 E12 Counter 33 2 9 1 E13 Counter 34 2 9 1 E14 Counter 35 2 9 1 E15 Counter 36 2 9 1 42 2 9 1 E16 Counter CB1 Total Open Count 43 2 9 1 CB1 Delta Open Count 44 2 9 1 CB2 Total Open Count 45 2 9 1 CB2 Delta Open Count (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 54 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications Analog Inputs The following table lists Analog Inputs (Object 30). It is important to note that 16-bit and 32-bit variations of Analog Inputs, Analog Output Control Blocks, and Analog Output Statuses are transmitted through DNP as signed numbers. The "Default Deadband," and the "Default Change Event Assigned Class" columns are used to represent the absolute amount by which the point must change before an analog change event will be generated, and once generated in which class poll (1, 2, 3, or none) will the change event be reported. The default analog input event buffer size is set 30. Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 3 (32-Bit Analog Input w/o Flag), 4 (16-Bit Analog Input w/o Flag) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Change Event w/o Time) Default Default Point Default Static Event Name/Description Multiplier Deadband Index Class Object 30 Object 32 Variation Variation 0 Frequency (Hz) 3 2 4 100 1 1 V Primary (kV) 3 2 4 0.001 1000 2 Voltage Secondary 3 2 4 100 1 3 Voltage Nominal 3 2 4 100 1 4 Operate Ia 3 2 4 100 1 5 Operate Ib 3 2 4 100 1 6 Operate Ic 3 2 4 100 1 7 Restrain Ia 3 2 4 100 1 8 Restrain Ib 3 2 4 100 1 9 Restrain Ic 3 2 4 100 1 nd 10 W1 2 Harmonic Ia 3 2 4 100 1 nd 11 W1 2 Harmonic Ib 3 2 4 100 1 nd 12 W1 2 Harmonic Ic 3 2 4 100 1 nd 13 W2 2 Harmonic Ia 3 2 4 100 1 nd 14 W2 2 Harmonic Ib 3 2 4 100 1 nd 15 W2 2 Harmonic Ic 3 2 4 100 1 16 Primary Ig-1 3 2 4 100 1 17 Secondary Ig-1 3 2 4 100 1 18 Nominal Ig-1 3 2 4 100 1 19 Primary Ig-2 3 2 4 100 1 20 Secondary Ig-2 3 2 4 100 1 21 Nominal Ig-2 3 2 4 100 1 22 V/f V 3 2 4 100 1 23 V/f 3 2 4 100 1 24 V/f 24IT 3 2 4 100 1 25 Thermal Status Ph A 3 2 4 100 1 26 Thermal Status Ph B 3 2 4 100 1 27 Thermal Status Ph C 3 2 4 100 1 28 W1 Primary Ia 3 2 4 0.001 1000 29 W1 Primary Ib 3 2 4 0.001 1000 30 W1 Primary Ic 3 2 4 0.001 1000 31 W1 Secondary Ia 3 2 4 100 1 32 W1 Secondary Ib 3 2 4 100 1 33 W1 Secondary Ic 3 2 4 100 1 34 W1 Nominal Ia 3 2 4 100 1 35 W1 Nominal Ib 3 2 4 100 1 36 W1 Nominal Ic 3 2 4 100 1 37 W1 Line Ia 3 2 4 100 1 38 W1 Line Ib 3 2 4 100 1 39 W1 Line Ic 3 2 4 100 1 40 W1 Relay Ia 3 2 4 100 1 (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 55 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 3 (32-Bit Analog Input w/o Flag), 4 (16-Bit Analog Input w/o Flag) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Change Event w/o Time) Default Default Point Static Event Default Multiplier Deadband Name/Description Index Object 30 Object 32 Class Variation Variation 41 W1 Relay Ib 3 2 4 100 1 42 W1 Relay Ic 3 2 4 100 1 43 W2 Primary Ia 3 2 4 0.001 1000 44 W2 Primary Ib 3 2 4 0.001 1000 45 W2 Primary Ic 3 2 4 0.001 1000 46 W2 Secondary Ia 3 2 4 100 1 47 W2 Secondary Ib 3 2 4 100 1 48 W2 Secondary Ic 3 2 4 100 1 49 W2 Nominal Ia 3 2 4 100 1 50 W2 Nominal Ib 3 2 4 100 1 51 W2 Nominal Ic 3 2 4 100 1 52 W2 Line Ia 3 2 4 100 1 53 W2 Line Ib 3 2 4 100 1 54 W2 Line Ic 3 2 4 100 1 55 W2 Relay Ia 3 2 4 100 1 56 W2 Relay Ib 3 2 4 100 1 57 W2 Relay Ic 3 2 4 100 1 58 W3 Primary Ia A 3 2 4 0.001 1000 59 W3 Primary Ib A 3 2 4 0.001 1000 60 W3 Primary Ic A 3 2 4 0.001 1000 61 W3 Secondary Ia A 3 2 4 100.0 1 62 W3 Secondary Ib A 3 2 4 100.0 1 63 W3 Secondary Ic A 3 2 4 100.0 1 64 W3 Ia xIn 3 2 4 100.0 1 65 W3 Ib xIn 3 2 4 100.0 1 66 W3 Ic xIn 3 2 4 100.0 1 67 W3 Line Ia xIn 3 2 4 100.0 1 68 W3 Line Ib xIn 3 2 4 100.0 1 69 W3 Line Ic xIn 3 2 4 100.0 1 70 W3 Relay Ia xIn 3 2 4 100.0 1 71 W3 Relay Ib xIn 3 2 4 100.0 1 72 W3 Relay Ic xIn 3 2 4 100.0 1 73 Fault Records 3 4 4 1 1 74 Event Records 3 4 4 1 1 75 Waveform Records 3 4 4 1 1 76 W1 I Phase A Max 3 2 4 100 1 77 W1 I Phase B Max 3 2 4 100 1 78 W1 I Phase C Max 3 2 4 100 1 79 W2 I Phase A Max 3 2 4 100 1 80 W2 I Phase B Max 3 2 4 100 1 81 W2 I Phase C Max 3 2 4 100 1 82 W3 Max Current Ia 3 2 4 100.0 1 83 W3 Max Current Ib 3 2 4 100.0 1 84 W3 Max Current Ic 3 2 4 100.0 1 91 92 Data Log Records Number User Files 3 3 4 4 4 4 110 111 112 W1 Ia Fault W1 Ib Fault W1 Ic Fault 3 3 3 2 2 2 4 4 4 (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 1 1 1 1 Chapter 4 Page 56 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 3 (32-Bit Analog Input w/o Flag), 4 (16-Bit Analog Input w/o Flag) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Change Event w/o Time) Default Default Point Static Event Default Multiplier Deadband Name/Description Index Object 30 Object 32 Class Variation Variation 113 W2 Ia Fault 114 W2 Ib Fault 115 W2 Ic Fault 116 Ph-Ph Fault Voltage 117 Ig-1 Last 118 Ig-2 Last 119 CB1 Wear A 120 CB1 Wear B 121 CB1 Wear C 122 CB2 Wear A 123 CB2 Wear B 124 CB2 Wear C Data Type Static Variant Description DT1 3 Data is sent as a 32 bit integer in fixed point to 3 decimal places format. E.g. a value of 1023 = 1.023 DT2 4 Data is sent as a 16 bit integer. (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 57 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications Section 6: IEC61850 Protocol Support The relay can optionally be provided with IEC61850 comms. For further details refer to the following publications: Model Implementation Conformance Statement (MICS) Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) Protocol Implementation Extra Information for Testing (PIXIT) (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 58 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications Section 7: Modems The communications interface has been designed to allow data transfer via modems. However, IEC 60870-5-103 defines the data transfer protocol as an 11 bit format of 1 start, 1 stop, 8 data and even parity, which is a mode most commercial modems do not support. High performance modems will support this mode, but are expensive. For this reason, a parity setting is provided to allow use of easily available and relatively inexpensive commercial modems. This will result in a small reduction in data security and the system will not be compatible with true IEC 60870-5-103 control systems. 7.1.1 Connecting a Modem to the Relay(s) RS232C defines devices as being either Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) e.g. computers, or data Communications Equipment (DCE), e.g. modems, where one is designed to be connected to the other. Where two DCE devices e.g. the modem and the fibre-optic converter are being connected together a null terminal connector is required which switches various control lines. The fibre-optic converter is then connected to the relay Network Tx to Relay Rx and Network Rx to Relay Tx. 7.1.2 Setting the Remote Modem The exact settings of the modem are dependent on the type of modem. Although most modems support the basic Hayes `AT' command format, different manufacturers use different commands for the same functions. In addition, some modems use DIP switches to set parameters, others are entirely software configured. Before applying settings, the modem's factory default settings should be applied, to ensure it is in a known state. Several factors must be considered to allow remote dialling to the relays. The first is that the modem at the remote end must be configured as auto answer. This will allow it to initiate communications with the relays. Next, the user should set the data configuration at the local port, i.e. baud rate and parity, so that communication will be at the same rate and format as that set on the relay and the error correction is disabled. Auto-answer usually requires two parameters to be set. The auto-answer setting should be switched on and the number of rings after which it will answer. The Data Terminal Ready (DTR) settings should be forced on. This tells the modem that the device connected to it is ready to receive data. The parameters of the modem's RS232C port are set to match those set on the relay, set baud rate and parity to be the same as the settings on the relay and number of data bits to be 8 and stop bits 1. Note, although the device may be able to communicate with the modem at say 19200 bps, the modem may only be able to transmit over the telephone lines at 14400 bps. Therefore, a baud rate setting on which the modem can transmit should be chosen. In this example, a baud rate of 9600 should be chosen. As the modems are required to be transparent, simply passing on the data sent from the controller to the device and vice versa, error correction and buffering is turned off. If possible, Data Carrier Detect (DCD) should be forced on, as this control line will be used by the Fibre-optic converter. Finally, these settings should be stored in the modem's memory for power on defaults. 7.1.3 Connecting to the Remote Modem Once the remote modem has been configured correctly, it should be possible to make connection to the relay. Where a `dial-up' modem system is installed the settings on the remote modem are fixed so the local modem should negotiate with it on connection, choosing suitable matching settings. Where this is not possible the local modem should be set with settings equivalent to those of the remote modem as described above. (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 59 of 60 Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications Section 8: Glossary Baud Rate Data transmission speed. Bit The smallest measure of computer data. Bits Per Second (bps) Measurement of data transmission speed. Data Bits A number of bits containing the data. Sent after the start bit. Data Echo When connecting relays in an optical ring architecture, the data must be passed from one relay to the next, therefore when connecting in this method all relays must have the Data Echo ON. Half-Duplex Asynchronous Communications Communications in two directions, but only one at a time. Hayes `AT' Modem command set developed by Hayes Microcomputer products, Inc. Line Idle Determines when the device is not communicating if the idle state transmits light. Modem MOdulator / DEModulator device for connecting computer equipment to a telephone line. Parity Method of error checking by counting the value of the bits in a sequence, and adding a parity bit to make the outcome, for example, even. Parity Bit Bit used for implementing parity checking. Sent after the data bits. RS232C Serial Communications Standard. Electronic Industries Association Recommended Standard Number 232, Revision C. RS485 Serial Communications Standard. Electronic Industries Association Recommended Standard Number 485. Start Bit Bit (logical 0) sent to signify the start of a byte during data transmission. Stop Bit Bit (logical 1) sent to signify the end USB Universal Serial Bus standard for the transfer of data. (c)20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 60 of 60 Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide 7SR242 Duobias Multi-Function 2-Winding Transformer Protection Relay Installation Guide Document Release History This document is issue 2017/08. The list of revisions up to and including this issue is: 2017/08 Software revision 2662H85001 R8c-7d 2016/11 Ethernet redundancy added to electrical interface 2015/11 7SR2424 E12 case dimensions (Figure 3.1-3) added, wiring diagram (Figure 5.1-1) revised. 2014/04 Revision to section 1.2 2013/01 Software revision 2662H85001 R7c-7b 2012/08 Addition of optional IEC 61850 communication protocol and Ethernet Interface. 2010/06 Additional Comms modules option of (RS485 + IRIG-B) and (RS232 + IRIG-B) and typographical revisions 2010/02 Document reformat due to rebrand 2010/02 Third issue. Software revision 2662H80001 R4c-3 2008/07 Second issue. Software revision 2662H80001R3d-2c. 2008/05 First issue The copyright and other intellectual property rights in this document, and in any model or article produced from it (and including any registered or unregistered design rights) are the property of Siemens Protection Devices Limited. No part of this document shall be reproduced or modified or stored in another form, in any data retrieval system, without the permission of Siemens Protection Devices Limited, nor shall any model or article be reproduced from this document unless Siemens Protection Devices Limited consent. While the information and guidance given in this document is believed to be correct, no liability shall be accepted for any loss or damage caused by any error or omission, whether such error or omission is the result of negligence or any other cause. Any and all such liability is disclaimed. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 2 of 28 Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide Contents Installation Guide ................................................................................................................................... 1 Document Release History .................................................................................................................... 1 Contents .................................................................................................................................................. 3 List of Figures ......................................................................................................................................... 4 Section 1: Installation ............................................................................................................................ 5 1.1 Packaging ................................................................................................................................. 5 1.2 Unpacking, Storage and Handling ............................................................................................ 5 1.3 Recommended Mounting Position ............................................................................................ 5 1.4 Wiring ........................................................................................................................................ 5 1.5 Earthing ..................................................................................................................................... 5 1.6 Ancillary Equipment .................................................................................................................. 5 1.7 Disposal .................................................................................................................................... 6 Section 2: Equipment Operating Conditions ....................................................................................... 7 Section 3: Dimensions and Panel Fixings ........................................................................................... 8 3.1 Relay Dimensions ..................................................................................................................... 8 3.2 Fixings ..................................................................................................................................... 11 3.2.1 Crimps ........................................................................................................................ 11 3.2.2 Panel Fixings .............................................................................................................. 11 Section 4: Rear Terminal Drawings .................................................................................................... 12 4.1 E8 CASE ................................................................................................................................. 12 4.2 E10 CASE ............................................................................................................................... 14 Section 5: Connection/Wiring/Diagrams ............................................................................................ 17 5.1 Wiring Diagram: 7SR242 Relay .............................................................................................. 17 Section 6: Data Comms Connections ................................................................................................ 19 6.1 RS485 Connection .................................................................................................................. 19 6.2 IRIG-B Connections ................................................................................................................ 19 6.3 Optional Fibre Optic Connections ........................................................................................... 20 6.4 Optional Additional RS485 Connections ................................................................................. 21 6.5 Optional RS232 Connections.................................................................................................. 21 6.6 Additional (Optional) Ethernet Connection for IEC 61850 ...................................................... 22 6.7 Ethernet Network Redundancy IEC 61850 ............................................................................. 23 6.7.1 RSTP - Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol ..................................................................... 24 6.7.2 PRP - Parallel Redundancy Protocol ........................................................................ 25 6.7.3 HSR - High Availability Seamless Redundancy Protocol .......................................... 26 Section 7: Connection Diagrams ........................................................................................................ 27 7.1 Typical AC Connections: 7SR242 .......................................................................................... 27 (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 3 of 28 Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide List of Figures Figure 3.1-1 Overall Dimensions and panel Drilling for Size E8 Epsilon case ........................................ 8 Figure 3.1-2 Overall Dimensions and panel Drilling for Size E10 Epsilon case ...................................... 9 Figure 3.1-3 Overall Dimensions and panel Drilling for Size E12 Epsilon case .................................... 10 Figure 5.1-1 7SR242 Wiring Diagram .................................................................................................... 17 Figure 6.1-1 RS485 Data Comms Connections ..................................................................................... 19 Figure 6.3-1 Data Comms to Multiple Devices Using Sigma 1 and F.O. Star Network ......................... 20 Figure 6.3-2 Data Comms to Multiple Devices Using Sigma 3 and F.O. Ring Network ........................ 20 Figure 6.5-1 RS232 Data Comms Pin Connections............................................................................... 21 Figure 6.6-1 Ethernet connection for IEC 61850 (star connection) ........................................................ 22 Figure 6.6-2 Ethernet connection for Fibre Optic IEC 61850 (ring connection) ..................................... 22 Figure 6.7-1 RSTP Ethernet Network Ring Configuration ..................................................................... 24 Figure 6.7-2 PRP Ethernet Network Configuration ................................................................................ 25 Figure 6.7-3 HSR Ethernet Network Ring Configuration ....................................................................... 26 Figure 7.1-1 7SR24 Typical Connections .............................................................................................. 27 (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 4 of 28 Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide Section 1: Installation 1.1 Packaging Relays are supplied in packaging designed to mechanically protect them while in both transit and storage. This packaging should be recycled where systems exist, or disposed of in a manner which does not provide a threat to health or the environment. All laws and regulations specific to the country of disposal should be adhered to. 1.2 Unpacking, Storage and Handling On receipt remove the relay from the container in which it was received and inspect it for obvious damage. It is recommended that the relay not be removed from its case. If damage has been sustained a claim should be immediately be made against the carrier, also inform Siemens Protection Devices Limited and to the nearest Siemens agent, using the Defect Report Form in the Maintenance section of this manual. When not required for immediate use the relay should be returned to its original carton and stored in a clean, dry place. The relay contains static sensitive devices, which are susceptible to damage due to static discharge. The relay's electronic circuits are protected from damage by static discharge when the relay is housed in its case. The relay element should not be withdrawn or reinserted into the relay case while auxiliary voltage is present. There can be no requirement to disassemble any relay, since there are no user serviceable parts in the relay. If any modules have been tampered with the guarantee will be invalidated. Siemens Protection Devices Limited reserves the right to charge for any subsequent repairs. 1.3 Recommended Mounting Position The relay uses a liquid crystal display (LCD) which is used in the programming and for operation. The LCD has a vertical viewing angle of 30 and is back-lit. However, the best viewing position is at eye level, and this is particularly important given its control features. The relay should be mounted on the circuit breaker (or protection panel) to allow the operator the best access to the relay functions 1.4 Wiring The product should be wired according to the scheme requirements, with reference to the appropriate wiring diagram. Refer to the appropriate Diagrams and Parameters document for a cross reference of wiring diagrams and models. 1.5 Earthing Terminal 28 of the PSU (Power Supply Unit) should be solidly earthed by a direct connection to the panel earth. The relay case earth stud connection should be connected to terminal 28 of the PSU. It is normal practice to additionally 'daisy chain' together the case (safety) earths of all the relays installed in a panel to prevent earth current loops posing a risk to personnel. 1.6 Ancillary Equipment The relay can be interrogated locally or remotely. For local interrogation a portable PC with suitable version of MS Windows and ReydispTM s/w using USB port situated on front of the relay. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 5 of 28 Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide 1.7 Disposal The Relay should be disposed of in a manner which does not provide a threat to health or the environment. All laws and regulations specific to the country of disposal should be adhered to. The relays and protection systems manufactured under the Reyrolle brand currently do not come within the scope of either the European WEEE or RoHS directives as they are equipment making up a fixed installation. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 6 of 28 Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide Section 2: Equipment Operating Conditions General Safety Precautions ! Current Transformer Circuits The secondary circuit of a live CT must not be open circuited. Non-observance of this precaution can result in injury to personnel or damage to equipment. ! External Resistors Where external resistors are fitted to relays, these may present a danger of electric shock or burns, if touched. ! Fibre Optic Communication Where fibre optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed directly. Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or signal level of the device. ! Front Cover The front cover provides additional securing of the relay element within the case. The relay cover should be in place during normal operating conditions. ! Disposal The Relay should be disposed of in a manner which does not provide a threat to health or the environment. All laws and regulations specific to the country of disposal should be adhered to. The relays and protection systems manufactured under the Reyrolle brand currently do not come within the scope of either the European WEEE or RoHS directives as they are equipment making up a fixed installation. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 7 of 28 Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide Section 3: Dimensions and Panel Fixings 3.1 Relay Dimensions Relays are supplied in size E8, E10 and E12 cases. Panel cut-out requirements and case dimensions are shown below. 254.5 11 31 216.5 Optional ethernet comms module 207.5 SIDE VIEW 177 Typical when fitted 151.5 Case Earth connection FRONT VIEW 25mm MIN CLEARANCE FOR TERMINAL WIRING 70mm MIN CLEARANCE FOR F/O COMMS CABLE 75mm MIN CLEARANCE BELOW EN100 MODULE FOR ETHERNET COMMS CONNECTIONS See note 2 PANEL CUT-OUT 159 TOP VIEW 168 Case Earth connection 201.5 Optional ethernet comms module FRONT 182 9.75 Diameter 3.6 - 4 holes (see note 1) NOTES: 1) THE 3.6 HOLES ARE FOR M4 THREAD FORMING (TRILOBULAR) SCREWS. THESE ARE SUPPLIED AS STANDARD AND ARE SUITABLE FOR USE IN FERROUS / ALUMINIUM PANELS 1.6mm THICK AND ABOVE. FOR OTHER PANELS, HOLES TO BE M4 CLEARANCE (TYPICALLY 4.5 DIAMETER) AND RELAYS MOUNTED USING M4 MACHINE SCREWS, NUTS AND LOCKWASHERS (SUPPLIED IN PANEL FIXING KIT). 2) ACCESS CLEARANCE REQUIRED FOR OPTIONAL ETHERNET COMMS MODULE RETAINING SCREW Figure 3.1-1 Overall Dimensions and panel Drilling for Size E8 Epsilon case (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 8 of 28 Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide 254.5 11 31 216.5 Optional ethernet comms module 260 SIDE VIEW 177 Typical when fitted 151.5 Case Earth connection FRONT VIEW 25mm MIN CLEARANCE FOR TERMINAL WIRING 70mm MIN CLEARANCE FOR F/O COMMS CABLE 75mm MIN CLEARANCE BELOW EN100 MODULE FOR ETHERNET COMMS CONNECTIONS See note 2 168 TOP VIEW 252.5 FRONT PANEL CUT-OUT 159 Case Earth connection Optional ethernet comms module 9.25 74.25 178.25 243.25 Diameter 3.6 - 8 holes (see note 1) NOTES: 1) THE 3.6 HOLES ARE FOR M4 THREAD FORMING (TRILOBULAR) SCREWS. THESE ARE SUPPLIED AS STANDARD AND ARE SUITABLE FOR USE IN FERROUS / ALUMINIUM PANELS 1.6mm THICK AND ABOVE. FOR OTHER PANELS, HOLES TO BE M4 CLEARANCE (TYPICALLY 4.5 DIAMETER) AND RELAYS MOUNTED USING M4 MACHINE SCREWS, NUTS AND LOCKWASHERS (SUPPLIED IN PANEL FIXING KIT). 2) ACCESS CLEARANCE REQUIRED FOR OPTIONAL ETHERNET COMMS MODULE RETAINING SCREW Figure 3.1-2 Overall Dimensions and panel Drilling for Size E10 Epsilon case (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 9 of 28 Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide 254.5 11 31 216.5 Optional ethernet comms module 311.5 177 SIDE VIEW 151.5 Case Earth connection Typical when fitted FRONT VIEW 25mm MIN CLEARANCE FOR TERMINAL WIRING 70mm MIN CLEARANCE FOR F/O COMMS CABLE 75mm MIN CLEARANCE BELOW EN100 MODULE FOR ETHERNET COMMS CONNECTIONS See note 2 304.5 PANEL CUT-OUT 159 TOP VIEW FRONT Optional ethernet comms module 168 Case Earth connection 9.25 100.25 204.25 295.25 Diameter 3.6 - 8 holes (see note 1) NOTES: 1) THE 3.6 HOLES ARE FOR M4 THREAD FORMING (TRILOBULAR) SCREWS. THESE ARE SUPPLIED AS STANDARD AND ARE SUITABLE FOR USE IN FERROUS / ALUMINIUM PANELS 1.6mm THICK AND ABOVE. FOR OTHER PANELS, HOLES TO BE M4 CLEARANCE (TYPICALLY 4.5 DIAMETER) AND RELAYS MOUNTED USING M4 MACHINE SCREWS, NUTS AND LOCKWASHERS (SUPPLIED IN PANEL FIXING KIT). 2) ACCESS CLEARANCE REQUIRED FOR OPTIONAL ETHERNET COMMS MODULE RETAINING SCREW Figure 3.1-3 Overall Dimensions and panel Drilling for Size E12 Epsilon case (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 10 of 28 Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide 3.2 Fixings 3.2.1 Crimps M4 Ring tongued crimps with 90 bend are recommended for connection to the standard M4 terminal screws and RS485 port connections. 3.2.2 Panel Fixings Typical mounting screw kit per Relay) Consists of 4 off M4x10mm Screws 4 off M4 Nuts 4 off M4 Lock Washer Typical rear terminal block fixing kit (1kit per terminal block fitted to relay) Consists of: 28 x M4, 8mm Screws 28 x M4 Lock Washer (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 11 of 28 Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide Section 4: Rear Terminal Drawings 4.1 E8 CASE E8 STANDARD COMMS:- USB FRONT PORT,RS485 (SEE NOTE 2) E8 STANDARD COMMS + ADDITIONAL PORTS USB FRONT PORT, RS485 (SEE NOTE 2), 2 X F.O. (S.T. CONNECTORS), IRIG B (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 12 of 28 Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide E8 STANDARD COMMS + ADDITIONAL PORTS USB FRONT PORT, 2 x RS485 (SEE NOTE 2), IRIG B E8 STANDARD COMMS + ADDITIONAL PORTS USB FRONT PORT, RS485 (SEE NOTE 2), RS232, IRIG B Notes 1) Recommended terminations are pre-insulated & must be crimped using approved tooling. 2) RS485 (block "B" terminals 14, 16, 18, 20 and optional COMMS MODULE) connections are by screened, twisted pair RS485 compliant cable. When wiring to the relay ensure that these terminals are not obscured by other wiring runs. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 13 of 28 Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide 4.2 E10 CASE E10 STANDARD COMMS:- USB FRONT PORT,RS485 (SEE NOTE 2) E10 STANDARD COMMS + ADDITIONAL PORTS USB FRONT PORT, RS485 (SEE NOTE 2), 2 X F.O. (S.T. CONNECTORS), IRIG B (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 14 of 28 Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide E10 STANDARD COMMS + ADDITIONAL PORTS USB FRONT PORT, 2 x RS485 (SEE NOTE 2), IRIG B E10 STANDARD COMMS + ADDITIONAL PORTS USB FRONT PORT, RS485 (SEE NOTE 2), RS232, IRIG B (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 15 of 28 Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide E10 STANDARD COMMS + ADDITIONAL ETHERNET PORTS (RJ45 shown, Fibre optic LC similar) Notes 1) Recommended terminations are pre-insulated & must be crimped using approved tooling. 2) RS485 (block "B" terminals 14, 16, 18, 20 and optional COMMS MODULE) connections are by screened, twisted pair cable. Ensure that these terminals are not obscured by other wiring runs. Cable should be RS485 compliant. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 16 of 28 Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide Section 5: Connection/Wiring/Diagrams 5.1 Wiring Diagram: 7SR242 Relay Rear View: Arrangement of terminals and modules 1 22 24 28 1 7SR242 +ve BO 1 -ve 5 +ve Screen 18 B 20 Term. 24 26 28 17 19 21 23 25 27 BO 5 RS485 16 BO 4 BI 3 -ve A 22 -ve C B A Optional I/O Optional I/O PSU CT CT/VT 1A BI 4 W2-Ia -ve 27 1A BI 6 W2-Ib +ve -ve -ve 15 4 5A 1A BI 8 W2-Ic BI 9 5A B 28 27 28 27 28 17 6 19 8 21 10 5A -ve W1-Ia Ig-2 12 27 14 1 16 2 18 3 20 5 22 7 24 9 26 10 28 -ve 5A 17 4 18 6 19 8 20 10 28 14 16 W1-Ic 18 22 Ig-1 A 24 26 BI = Binary Input BO = Binary Output BI 31 -ve +ve BI 22 BI 32 BI 23 BI 33 BI 24 BI 34 BI 25 BI 35 +ve +ve +ve +ve -ve +ve +ve -ve +ve BI 26 BI 36 BI 27 BI 37 BI 28 BI 38 +ve +ve +ve +ve +ve -ve +ve BI 29 E BI 39 +ve -ve 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 -ve 23 25 27 Shows contacts internal to relay case assembly. Contacts close when the relay chassis is withdrawn from case 28 1 BI 10 BO 7 BI 11 BO 8 BI 12 BO 9 BI 13 BO 10 +ve -ve 7 9 +ve 11 13 +ve BI 14 15 BO 11 17 BO 12 19 +ve -ve 3 5 +ve 21 BI 15 +ve BI 16 1A NOTES BI 21 +ve 27 20 5A +ve +ve 1A 16 -ve 11 12 W1-Ib V 5A BI 30 +ve 1A 5A +ve BI 20 12 1A 14 15 27 +ve 8 +ve -ve 2 12 13 28 6 BI 7 +ve 10 11 27 28 4 +ve -ve 5A BI 5 8 9 Data Comms (Optional) 26 C +ve 6 7 2 23 BO 6 4 5 1 D 13 25 +ve 2 3 2 E 2 1 1 11 BO 3 BI 2 -ve 14 20 BI 1 -ve 12 18 2 9 +ve 8 10 1 7 +ve 4 6 2 3 GND. BO 2 2 1 2 BO 13 23 BO 14 25 27 +ve BI 17 +ve BI 18 +ve -ve BI 19 D Figure 5.1-1 7SR242 Wiring Diagram (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 17 of 28 Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 18 of 28 Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide Section 6: Data Comms Connections 6.1 RS485 Connection The RS485 communication port terminals are located on the rear of the relay and can be connected using a suitable RS485 120 screened twisted pair cable. The RS485 electrical connection can be used in a single or multi-drop configuration. When used with Reydisp the RS485 master must support and use the Auto Device Enable (ADE) feature. The last device in the connection must be terminated correctly in accordance with the master driving the connection. A terminating resistor is fitted in each relay, when required this is connected in circuit using an external wire loop between terminals 18 and 20 of the power supply module. Up to 64 relays can be connected to the RS485 bus. Each relay has an internal terminating resistor - this can be connected in circuit where necessary. Rear terminals To Control System Rear terminals 14 16 18 RS485 Screened twisted pair 14 16 18 RS485 Screened twisted pair 14 16 18 20 Ext Wire loop (terminating resistance) added where permanent drive from master station available Bus Termination Polarity To Control System 16 18 20 B Term. 14 A Screen 18 20 Term. 14 A 16 20 B 18 Term. Screen 16 B 14 RS 485 Twisted pair Cable Screen 5V A B A RS485 RS485 RS485 GND Figure 6.1-1 RS485 Data Comms Connections 6.2 IRIG-B Connections A BNC plug is provided to connect a co-axial cable carrying IRIG-B time synchronisation signals. The length of the stub should be minimised by connecting the tee-connector directly to the rear of the relay. A suitable co-axial cable would be type RG 58 50ohms. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 19 of 28 Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide 6.3 Optional Fibre Optic Connections Where fitted rear Data Comms ports 3 and 4 comprise Fibre-Optic STTM (BFOC/2.5) bayonet connectors-4 per product. 62.5 / 125m glass fibre is recommended for all lead lengths. When installing fibre, ensure that the fibres' bend radii comply with the recommended minimum for the fibre usedtypically 50mm is acceptable. The fibre optic data comms link will be interrupted if the relay element is withdrawn from the case. To Control System Sigma 1 Tx Master Rx Rx Rx Tx Tx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx RS232 straight Through cable Computer or Control System Tx Rx Rx Tx 62.5/125m fibre optic with ST connectors USB or 9 pin male D connector 25 pin male D connector Figure 6.3-1 Data Comms to Multiple Devices Using Sigma 1 and F.O. Star Network Rx Rx Tx Tx RS232 to Fibre Optic Converter RS232 straight Through cable Computer or Control System USB or 9 pin male D connector 25 pin male D connector Tx Rx Rx Tx 62.5/125m fibre optic with ST connectors Figure 6.3-2 Data Comms to Multiple Devices Using Sigma 3 and F.O. Ring Network (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 20 of 28 Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide 6.4 Optional Additional RS485 Connections The additional (optional) RS485 communication port is located at the rear of the relay and can be connected using a suitable RS485 120 ohm screened twisted pair cable. The RS485 electrical connection can be used in a single or multi-drop configuration. When used with Reydisp the RS485 master must support and use the Auto Device Enable (ADE) feature. The last device in the connection must be terminated correctly in accordance with the master device driving the connection. The relays are fitted with an internal terminating resistor which can be connected between the A and B by fitting an external wire loop between terminals 18 and 20 on the power supply module. 6.5 Optional RS232 Connections The additional (optional) RS232 (9 pin plug) (DTE) communication port is located at the rear of the relay and can be connected using a suitable RS232 cable. Where there is a requirement for multi-drop RS232 connection, a suitable device to facilitate this should be obtained. Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Relay Function Not Connected Receive Data (RXD) Transmit Data (TXD) Output Supply +5V 50mA Signal Ground (GND) Output Supply +5V 50mA Linked to 8 (volts free) Linked to 7 (volts free) Output Supply +5V 50mA Figure 6.5-1 RS232 Data Comms Pin Connections (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 21 of 28 Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide 6.6 Additional (Optional) Ethernet Connection for IEC 61850 Rear Ethernet Comms port Ch 1 and Ch 2 comprises Fibre-Optic Duplex LC connectors or electrical RJ45 connectors. When installing fibre, ensure that the fibres' bend radii comply with the recommended minimum for the fibre usedtypically 50mm is acceptable, 62.5 / 125m glass fibre is recommended for all distances. To Control System Switch Input Ch 1 Ch 1 Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 2 Ch 2 Ch 3 Ch n Ch 1 62.5/125m fibre optic with Duplex LC connectors or RJ45 electrical connectors Ch 2 Figure 6.6-1 Ethernet connection for IEC 61850 (star connection) To Control System Switch Input Ch 1 Ch 1 Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 2 Ch 2 Ch 3 Ch n Ch 1 Ch 2 62.5/125m fibre optic with Duplex LC connectors or RJ45 electrical connectors Figure 6.6-2 Ethernet connection for Fibre Optic IEC 61850 (ring connection) (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 22 of 28 Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide 6.7 Ethernet Network Redundancy IEC 61850 The EN100+ module is used on current Reyrolle devices (from 7SR242 hardware /DD) to provide Ethernet/IEC61850 functionality and supports RSTP, PRP and HSR redundancy protocols. Earlier 7SR242 (/CC) devices were manufactured with the EN100 (not EN100+) module and the electrical version cannot support redundancy. The optical version can support PRP and HSR redundancy if firmware is updated to version 4.2 or later and FPGA is updated to version 515 or later. Earlier 7SR242 devices do not support the EN100+ module and cannot be updated by simply exchanging the EN100 module. All current 7SR242 IEC61850 variants are delivered with the EN100+ (Plus) module and firmware 4.24 or later. The EN100 module firmware and FPGA can be updated by connecting to the relay via the rear Ethernet port. For more information on connecting to the relay via the Ethernet port, please see the Reydisp Manager Userguide or the Guidance Note available from the product website. Depending on the EN100 module type and Firmware version, the following protocol options are available, Interface Type Electrical RJ45 EN100+ Optical EN100+ Electrical RJ45 EN100+ Optical EN100+ Electrical RJ45 EN100 Optical EN100 Electrical RJ45 EN100 Optical EN100 EN100 Firmware 4.21and later 4.21and later 4.08 or earlier 4.08 or earlier 4.21and later 4.21and later 4.08 or earlier 4.08 or earlier Line Mode RSTP Switch Mode OSM PRP HSR Table 1: EN100 Redundancy availability (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 23 of 28 Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide 6.7.1 RSTP - Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP is a redundancy protocol with a minimal response time that has been standardized in IEEE-802.1D (2004). The reconfiguration time depend on the topology and start at 50ms. RSTP need to be enabled on the device within Reydisp Manager (See Reydisp Manager userguide). Network rings with up to 30 devices is possible. Figure 6.7-1 RSTP Ethernet Network Ring Configuration (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 24 of 28 Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide 6.7.2 PRP - Parallel Redundancy Protocol The HSR redundancy protocol according to the IEC 62439-3 standard is based on double transmission of message frames over ring-topology networks in both directions. In the case of an error, the message frame will be transmitted without any delay. No reconfiguration time is necessary for the network, as is the case for RSTP. PRP need to be enabled on the device within Reydisp Manager (See Reydisp Manager userguide). Figure 6.7-2 PRP Ethernet Network Configuration (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 25 of 28 Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide 6.7.3 HSR - High Availability Seamless Redundancy Protocol The HSR redundancy protocol according to the IEC 62439-3 standard is based on double transmission of message frames over ring-topology networks in both directions. In the case of an error, the message frame will be transmitted without any delay. No reconfiguration time is necessary for the network. HSR needs to be enabled on the device within Reydisp Manager (See Reydisp Manager user guide). Network rings with up to 50 devices is possible. Figure 6.7-3 HSR Ethernet Network Ring Configuration (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 26 of 28 Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide Section 7: Connection Diagrams 7.1 Typical AC Connections: 7SR242 POWER TRANSFORMER A B C A B C NLR 1 1A 17 W1-IL1 (IA) 2 3 5A 18 IG2 5A 4 5 20 1A 6 7 W1-IL2 (IB) 5A 8 9 11 27 V1 (VX) 28 1A 10 NLR RSTAB 19 W1-IL3 (IC) 5A 12 13 RSTAB 1A 14 15 IG1 5A 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 17 19 21 23 25 27 22 24 A +ve 1A BI 4 -ve W2-IL1 (IA) +ve 2 5A BI 5 -ve 1A BI 6 W2-IL2 (IB) +ve BI 7 -ve 3 4 +ve -ve 1 5 6 5A 7 8 +ve 1A BI 8 -ve W2-IL3 (IC) +ve 9 10 5A 11 BI 9 -ve 12 B 1 +ve BO 1 -ve 3 28 GND. 5 BO 2 2 4 6 8 10 12 +ve 9 BI 1 -ve 7 11 +ve BO 3 BI 2 -ve RSTAB 64H Stabilising resistor NLR 64H Voltage limiting resistor 13 15 +ve 17 BI 3 -ve BO 4 19 21 A Screen 18 B 20 Term. BO 5 23 RS485 14 16 25 BO 6 C 26 27 Figure 7.1-1 7SR24 Typical Connections (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 27 of 28 Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 28 of 28 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 7SR242 Duobias Multi-Function 2-Winding Transformer Protection Relay Commissioning and Maintenance Document Release History This document is issue 2017/08. The list of revisions up to and including this issue is: 2017/08 Software release 2662H85001R8C-7b 2013/01 Software revision 2662H85001 R7c-7b 2012/08 Addition of optional IEC 61850 communication protocol and Ethernet Interface. 2010/06 Defect Report Form revised 2010/02 Document reformat due to rebrand 2010/02 Third issue. Software revision 2662H80001 R4c-3 2008/07 Second issue. Software revision 2662H80001R3d-2c. 2008/05 First issue The copyright and other intellectual property rights in this document, and in any model or article produced from it (and including any registered or unregistered design rights) are the property of Siemens Protection Devices Limited. No part of this document shall be reproduced or modified or stored in another form, in any data retrieval system, without the permission of Siemens Protection Devices Limited, nor shall any model or article be reproduced from this document unless Siemens Protection Devices Limited consent. While the information and guidance given in this document is believed to be correct, no liability shall be accepted for any loss or damage caused by any error or omission, whether such error or omission is the result of negligence or any other cause. Any and all such liability is disclaimed. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 2 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Contents Commissioning and Maintenance ........................................................................................................ 1 Document Release History .................................................................................................................... 1 Contents .................................................................................................................................................. 3 Section 1: Common Functions ............................................................................................................. 7 1.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 7 1.2 Before Testing ........................................................................................................................... 7 1.2.1 Safety ........................................................................................................................... 7 1.2.2 Sequence of Tests ....................................................................................................... 7 1.2.3 Test Equipment ............................................................................................................ 8 1.2.4 Precautions .................................................................................................................. 8 1.2.5 Applying Settings ......................................................................................................... 9 1.3 Tests ....................................................................................................................................... 10 1.3.1 Inspection ................................................................................................................... 10 1.3.2 Secondary Injection Tests .......................................................................................... 10 1.3.3 Primary Injection Tests............................................................................................... 10 1.3.4 Putting into Service .................................................................................................... 10 1.4 AC Energising Quantities ........................................................................................................ 11 1.5 Binary Inputs ........................................................................................................................... 12 1.6 Binary Outputs ........................................................................................................................ 13 1.7 Relay Case Shorting Contacts ................................................................................................ 13 Section 2: Protection Functions ......................................................................................................... 15 2.1 Biased Differential (87BD, 87HS) ........................................................................................... 17 2.1.1 Secondary Injection Testing ....................................................................................... 17 2.1.2 Primary Injection Testing............................................................................................ 20 2.1.3 Phase Overcurrent (50, 51)........................................................................................ 21 2.1.4 Definite Time Overcurrent (50) ............................................................................... 22 2.1.5 Inverse Time Overcurrent (51) ................................................................................. 22 2.2 Derived Earth fault (50N,51N)................................................................................................. 24 2.2.1 Definite Time Overcurrent (50N) ............................................................................. 25 2.2.2 Inverse Time Overcurrent (51N) .............................................................................. 25 2.2.3 ANSI Reset................................................................................................................. 26 2.3 Measured Earth fault (50G, 51G)............................................................................................ 27 2.3.1 Definite Time Overcurrent (50G) ............................................................................. 28 2.3.2 Inverse Time Overcurrent (51G) .............................................................................. 28 2.3.3 ANSI Reset................................................................................................................. 29 2.4 Restricted Earth fault (64H) .................................................................................................. 30 2.5 Open Circuit (46BC) .............................................................................................................. 32 2.6 Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent (46NPS) .................................................................. 34 2.6.1 Definite Time NPS Overcurrent (46DT) .................................................................. 35 2.6.2 Inverse Time NPS Overcurrent (46IT) ..................................................................... 35 2.7 Undercurrent (37, 37G) ......................................................................................................... 37 2.7.1 37-n Elements ............................................................................................................ 37 2.7.2 37G-n Elements ......................................................................................................... 38 2.8 Thermal Overload (49) ............................................................................................................ 39 2.9 Under/Over Voltage (27/59) ................................................................................................... 41 2.9.2 Undervoltage Guard (27/59UVG) .............................................................................. 43 2.10 Neutral Over Voltage (59N) .................................................................................................. 44 2.10.1 Definite Time (59NDT) ............................................................................................... 45 2.10.2 Inverse Time (59NIT) ................................................................................................. 45 (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 3 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.11 Under/Over Frequency (81) .................................................................................................... 46 2.12 Overfluxing (24) ...................................................................................................................... 48 2.12.1 definite time (24DT).................................................................................................... 48 2.12.2 inverse time (24IT) ..................................................................................................... 49 Section 3: Supervision Functions ...................................................................................................... 51 3.1 CB Fail (50BF) ........................................................................................................................ 51 3.2 Trip/Close Circuit Supervision (74TCS, 74CCS) .................................................................. 53 3.3 Magnetising Inrush Detector (81HBL2) ................................................................................ 54 3.4 Overfluxing Detector (81HBL5) ............................................................................................. 56 Section 4: Control & Logic Functions ................................................................................................ 57 4.1 Quick Logic ............................................................................................................................. 57 Section 5: Testing and Maintenance .................................................................................................. 59 5.1 Periodic Tests ......................................................................................................................... 59 5.2 Maintenance............................................................................................................................ 59 5.3 Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................................... 60 Section 6: Relay Software Upgrade Instructions .............................................................................. 61 6.1 General ................................................................................................................................... 61 6.2 Replacing firmware on a product installed on site .................................................................. 61 6.2.1 Identify Which Software Is Currently Loaded ............................................................. 61 6.2.2 Overall Software Information...................................................................................... 61 6.2.3 Product Configuration Information ............................................................................. 61 6.2.4 Things To Do Before Loading New Firmware/Software ............................................ 62 6.2.5 Loading Firmware using front USB port ..................................................................... 62 6.2.6 Solving Software Upload Problems ........................................................................... 62 (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 4 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide List of Figures Figure 2-1 Biased Differential .............................................................................................................. 17 Figure 2-2 Secondary Injection using a Variac ................................................................................... 18 Figure 2-3 Phase Overcurrent ............................................................................................................. 21 Figure 2-4 Measured Earth Fault .......................................................................................................... 24 Figure 2-5 Measured Earth Fault .......................................................................................................... 27 Figure 2-6 Restricted Earth Fault .......................................................................................................... 30 Figure 2-7 Open Circuit .......................................................................................................................... 32 Figure 2-8 Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent ............................................................................... 34 Figure 2-9 Undercurrent ......................................................................................................................... 37 Figure 2-10 Thermal Overload ............................................................................................................... 39 Figure 2-11 Phase Under/Over Voltage ................................................................................................. 41 Figure 2-12 Neutral Overvoltage ............................................................................................................ 44 Figure 2-13 Under/Over Frequency ....................................................................................................... 46 Figure 2-14 Under/Over Frequency ....................................................................................................... 48 Figure 3-1 CB Fail .................................................................................................................................. 51 Figure 3-2 Trip Circuit Supervision ......................................................................................................... 53 Figure 3-3 Magnetising Inrush Detector ................................................................................................. 54 Figure 3-4 Magnetising Inrush Detector ................................................................................................. 56 (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 5 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 6 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Section 1: Common Functions 1.1 Overview Commissioning tests are carried out to prove: a) Equipment has not been damaged in transit. b) Equipment has been correctly connected and installed. c) Prove characteristics of the protection and settings which are based on calculations. d) Confirm that settings have been correctly applied. e) To obtain a set of test results for future reference. 1.2 1.2.1 Before Testing Safety The commissioning and maintenance of this equipment should only be carried out by skilled personnel trained in protective relay maintenance and capable of observing all the safety precautions and regulations appropriate to this type of equipment and also the associated primary plant. Ensure that all test equipment and leads have been correctly maintained and are in good condition. It is recommended that all power supplies to test equipment be connected via a Residual Current Device (RCD), which should be located as close to the supply source as possible. The choice of test instrument and test leads must be appropriate to the application. Fused instrument leads should be used when measurements of power sources are involved, since the selection of an inappropriate range on a multi-range instrument could lead to a dangerous flashover. Fused test leads should not be used where the measurement of a current transformer (C.T.) secondary current is involved, the failure or blowing of an instrument fuse or the operation of an instrument cut-out could cause the secondary winding of the C.T. to become an open circuit. Open circuit secondary windings on energised current transformers are a hazard that can produce high voltages dangerous to personnel and damaging to equipment, test procedures must be devised so as to eliminate this risk. 1.2.2 Sequence of Tests If other equipment is to be tested at the same time, then such testing must be co-ordinated to avoid danger to personnel and/or equipment. When all cabling and wiring is completed, a comprehensive check of all terminations for tightness and compliance with the approved diagrams must be carried out. This can then be followed by the insulation resistance tests which, if satisfactory allows the wiring to be energised by either the appropriate station supply or test supply. When primary injection tests are completed satisfactorily, all remaining systems can be functionally tested before the primary circuit is energised. Some circuits may require further tests before being put on load. Protection relay testing will require access to the protection system wiring diagrams, relay configuration information and protection settings. The following sequence of tests is loosely based on the arrangement of the relay menu structure. A test log based on the actual tests completed should be recorded for each relay tested. A typical example of this Site Test Sheet is included. The `Description of Operation' section of this manual provides detailed information regarding the operation of each function of the relay. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 7 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 1.2.3 Test Equipment Required test equipment is: Secondary injection equipment with integral time interval meter Primary injection equipment A d.c. supply with nominal voltage within the working range of the relay's d.c. auxiliary supply rating A d.c. supply with nominal voltage within the working range of the relay's d.c. binary input rating Other equipment as appropriate to the protection being commissioned - this will be specified in the product specific documentation. The secondary injection equipment should be appropriate to the protection functions to be tested. Additional equipment for general tests and for testing the communications channel is: * Portable PC with appropriate interface equipment. * Printer to operate from the above PC (Optional). Use of PC to facilitate testing The functions of ReyDisp Evolution (see Section 2: Settings and Instruments) can be used during the commissioning tests to assist with test procedures or to provide documentation recording the test and test parameters. One method is to clear both the waveform and event records before each test is started, then, after the test upload from the relay the settings, events and waveform files generated as a result of application of the test. These can then be saved off to retain a comprehensive record of that test. Relay settings files can be prepared on the PC (offline) or on the relay before testing commences. These settings should be saved for reference and compared with the settings at the end of testing to check that errors have not been introduced during testing and that any temporary changes to settings to suit the test process are returned to the required service state. A copy of the Relay Settings as a Rich Text Format (.rtf) file suitable for printing or for record purposes can be produced from ReyDisp as follows. From the File menu select Save As, change the file type to Export Default/Actual Setting (.RTF) and input a suitable filename. When testing is completed the event and waveform records should be cleared and the settings file checked to ensure that the required in-service settings are being applied. 1.2.4 Precautions Before electrical testing commences the equipment should be isolated from the current and voltage transformers. The current transformers should be short-circuited in line with the local site procedure. The tripping and alarm circuits should also be isolated where practical. The provision and use of secondary injection test sockets on the panel simplifies the isolation and test procedure. Ensure that the correct auxiliary supply voltage and polarity is applied. See the relevant scheme diagrams for the relay connections. Check that the nominal secondary current rating of the current and voltage transformers has been correctly set in the System Config menu of the relay. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 8 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 1.2.5 Applying Settings The relay settings for the particular application should be applied before any secondary testing occurs. If they are not available then the relay has default settings that can be used for pre-commissioning tests. See the Relay Settings section of this manual for the default settings. Note that the tripping and alarm contacts for any function must be programmed correctly before any scheme tests are carried out. The relay features multiple settings groups, only one of which is active at a time. In applications where more than one settings group is to be used it may be necessary to test the relay in more than one configuration. Note. One group may be used as a `Test' group to hold test-only settings that can be used for regular maintenance testing, eliminating the need for the Test Engineer to interfere with the actual in-service settings in the normally active group. This Test group may also be used for functional testing where it is necessary to disable or change settings to facilitate testing. When using settings groups it is important to remember that the relay need not necessarily be operating according to the settings that are currently being displayed. There is an `active settings group' on which the relay operates and an `edit/view settings group' which is visible on the display and which can be altered. This allows the settings in one group to be altered from the relay fascia while the protection continues to operate on a different unaffected group. The `Active Settings Group' and the `Edit Settings Group' are selected in the `System Configuration Menu'. The currently Active Group and the group currently Viewed are shown at the top of the display in the Settings display screen. If the View Group is not shown at the top of the display, this indicates that the setting is common to all groups. CT/VT ratio, I/O mapping and other settings which are directly related to hardware are common to all groups. If the relay is allowed to trip during testing then the instruments display will be interrupted and replaced by the `Trip Alert' screen which displays fault data information. If this normal operation interferes with testing then this function can be temporarily disabled for the duration of testing by use of the Trip Alert Enabled/Disabled setting in the System Config Menu. After applying a settings change to the relay, which may involve a change to the indication and output contacts, the TEST/RESET key should be pressed to ensure any existing indication and output is correctly cleared. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 9 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 1.3 1.3.1 Tests Inspection Ensure that all connections are tight and correct to the relay wiring diagram and the scheme diagram. Record any deviations. Check that the relay is correctly programmed and that it is fully inserted into the case. Refer to `Section 2: Settings and Instruments' for information on programming the relay. 1.3.2 Secondary Injection Tests Select the required relay configuration and settings for the application. Isolate the auxiliary D.C. supplies for alarm and tripping from the relay and remove the trip and intertrip links. Carry out injection tests for each relay function, as described in this document For all high current tests it must be ensured that the test equipment has the required rating and stability and that the relay is not stressed beyond its thermal limit. 1.3.3 Primary Injection Tests Primary injection tests are essential to check the ratio and polarity of the current transformers as well as the secondary wiring. Primary injection testing of the 87BD Biased Differential protection is recommended to avoid relay operation during first energisation of the transformer if incorrect values are applied to the ICT Connection protection setting. Note. If the current transformers associated with the protection are located in power transformer bushings it may not be possible to apply test connections between the current transformer and the power transformer windings. Primary injection is needed however, to verify the polarity of the CTs. In these circumstances primary current must be injected through the associated power transformer winding. It may be necessary to short circuit another winding in order to allow current to flow. During these primary injection tests the injected current is likely to be small due to the impedance of the transformer. Phase current transformer polarities and connections can be checked by examination of the relay Current Meters and Differential Meters in the Instruments Menu when the protected plant is carrying load but Earth Fault CT polarity can only be checked during primary injection. 1.3.4 Putting into Service After tests have been performed satisfactorily the relay should be put back into service as follows:Remove all test connections. Replace all secondary circuit fuses and links, or close m.c.b. Ensure the Protection Healthy LED is on, steady, and that all LED indications are correct. If necessary press CANCEL until the Relay Identifier screen is displayed, then press TEST/RESET to reset the indication LEDs. The relay meters should be checked in Instruments Mode with the relay on load The relay settings should be downloaded to a computer and a printout of the settings produced. The installed settings should then be compared against the required settings supplied before testing began. Automated setting comparison can be carried out by ReyDisp using the Compare Settings Groups function in the Edit menu. Any modified settings will be clearly highlighted. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 10 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 1.4 AC Energising Quantities Voltage and current measurement for each input channel is displayed in the Instrumentation Mode sub-menus, each input should be checked for correct connection and measurement accuracy by single phase secondary injection at nominal levels. Ensure that the correct instrument displays the applied signal within limits of the Performance Specification. Applied Voltage Applied Current W1-I A W1-I B W1-I C I G1 W2-I A W2-I B W2-I C I G2 V 1 (V X ) Secondary Primary Apply 3P balanced Current at nominal levels and ensure that the measured Zero Phase Sequence and Negative Phase Sequence quantities are approximately zero. ZPS NPS Current (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 11 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 1.5 Binary Inputs The operation of the binary input(s) can be monitored on the `Binary Input Meters' display shown in `Instruments Mode'. Apply the required supply voltage onto each binary input in turn and check for correct operation. Depending on the application, each binary input may be programmed to perform a specific function; each binary should be checked to prove that its mapping and functionality is as set as part of the Scheme Operation tests. Where the pick-up timers associated with a binary input are set these delays should be checked either as part of the scheme logic or individually. To check a binary pick-up time delay, temporarily map the binary to an output relay that has a normally open contact. This can be achieved in the Output Matrix sub-menu by utilising the BI n Operated settings. Use an external timer to measure the interval between binary energisation and closure of the output contacts. Similarly, to measure the drop-off delay, map to an output relay that has a normally closed contact, time the interval between binary de-energisation and closure of the output contacts. Note. The time measured will include an additional delay, typically less than 20ms, due to the response time of the binary input hardware, software processing time and the operate time of the output relay. BI Tested DO Delay Measure d PU Delay Measured Notes (method of initiation) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 12 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 1.6 Binary Outputs A minimum of six output relays are provided. Two of these have change over contacts, BO2 & BO3, one has a normally closed contact, BO1 and the remainder have normally open contacts. Care should be observed with regard to connected devices when forcing contacts to operate for test purposes. Short duration energisation can cause contact failure due to exceeding the break capacity when connected to inductive load such as electrically reset trip relays. Close each output relay in turn from the ReyDisp Evolution PC programme, Relay - Control - Close output relay. This function will energise the output for its minimum operate time. This time is specified in the Output Config Binary Output Config menu for each output relay and may be too short to measure with a continuity tester. An alternative method of energising an output permanently so that wiring can be checked is to temporarily map the relay being tested to the `Protection Healthy' signal in the Output Matrix, as this signal is permanently energised the mapped relay will be held energised, normally open contacts will be closed and vice versa. BO Checked Notes (method of test) 1NC 2NO 2NC 3NO 3NC 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1.7 Relay Case Shorting Contacts CT inputs and terminals C25-C26 (Relay Withdrawn Alarm) are fitted with case mounted shorting contacts which provide a closed contact when the relay is withdrawn from the case. The operation of these contacts should be checked. CT Shorting contacts checked Relay Withdrawn Alarm Checked (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 13 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 14 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Section 2: Protection Functions This section details the procedures for testing each protection function of the 7SR24 relay. These tests are carried out to verify the accuracy of the protection pick-ups and time delays at setting and to confirm correct operation of any associated input and output functionality. Guidance for calculating test input quantities is given in the relevant test description where required. In many cases it may be necessary to disable some functions during the testing of other functions, this prevents any ambiguity caused by the operation of multiple functions from one set of input quantities. The `Function Config' Menu provides a convenient high level point at which all elements of a particular function can be Enabled/Disabled to suit testing. The `Config' tab in `ReyDisp Evolution' can be used to `Enable/Disable' individual elements. Note that this screen disables functions by applying setting changes to the relay and that any changes must be sent to the relay to take effect and settings must be returned to their correct value after testing. Biased Diff. O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Phase OC O O Derived E/F O O O Measured E/F O O O O Restricted E/F O O O O O Open Circuit O O O O NPS OC O O O O O Undercurrent O O O O O O O O Thermal O O O O O O O O O U/O voltage O Neutral OV O U/O Frequency O Overfluxing O O O O CB Fail O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 74TCS/74CCS Inrush Detector O/fluxing Detector The General Pickup LED can be used to assess operation of functions during testing if other functions are disabled or if the setting allocating General Pickup is temporarily modified. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 15 of 62 Overfluxing Detector Inrush Detector O Diff. Highset O Trip cct Supervision CB Fail Overfluxing U/O Frequency Neutral Overvoltage U/O voltage Thermal Undercurrent NPS Overcurrent Open Circuit Restricted E/F Measured E/F Derived E/F Test Phase Overcurrent Under Differential Highset Function Biased Differential The table below indicates functions where function conflicts may occur during testing, consideration should be given to disabling functions to avoid interference. Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Particular care should be taken when testing overcurrent functions that the thermal rating of the current inputs is not exceeded. It should be considered that where several overlapping elements are used simultaneously, the overall protection operate time may be dependent on the operation of different individual elements at the various levels of applied current or voltage. The resulting composite characteristic may be tested by enabling all of the relevant applicable elements or the element operations can be separated or disabled and tested individually. All relay settings should be checked before testing begins. It is recommended that the relay settings are extracted from the relay using ReyDisp Evolution software and a copy of these settings is stored for reference during and after testing. It may be necessary to disable some protection functions during the testing of other functions to allow unambiguous results to be obtained. Care must be taken to reset or re-enable any settings that have been temporarily altered during the testing before the relay can be put into service. At the end of testing the relay settings should be compared to the file extracted at the start to ensure that errors have not been introduced. An example `Test Sheet' summary document is included at the end of this Guide. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 16 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.1 Biased Differential (87BD, 87HS) 7SR242n-2aAn1-0CA0 W1-IL1 (IA) W1-IL2 (IB) W1-IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 50N (x2) 51N (x2) 46 BC (x2) 46 NPS (x4) 50G (x2) 51G (x4) 64H 37G (x2) IG1 50 BF-1 I4 ICT Each function element can be assigned to W1 or W2 CT inputs. NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive 87HS 37G IG2 W2-IL3 (IC) 51G 64H 50N 51N 46 BC 46 NPS 50G 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL 2 81 HBL5 37 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL 2 81 HBL5 24 (x3) 27 59 (x4) 59N (x2) 81 (x6) W2-IL1 (IA) Figure 2-1 87BD ICT 74 CCS (x6) 74 TCS (x6) 37 W2-IL2 (IB) V1 (VX) 50 BF-2 I4 Biased Differential Voltage Inputs: None Current Inputs: W1-I L1 (I A ),W1-I L2 (I B ),W1-I L3 (I C ), and W2-I L1 (I A ),W2-I L2 (I B ),W2-I L3 (I C ), Disable: 46, 49, 50, 51, 50N, 51N, 50BF, Map Pickup LED: 87BD, 87HS - Self Reset The differential elements are subjected to CT multipliers, Vector Group Compensation and Zero Sequence filters when applied to power transformers. The complexity of these features can cause confusion during testing and lead to incorrect relay settings being applied. It is recommended that the accuracy of the differential elements are tested by secondary injection with simplified differential settings applied to avoid ambiguity before reinstating the required site settings which can be tested more thoroughly by primary injection followed by final checking with the protected transformer on load. 2.1.1 Secondary Injection Testing The settings used for Secondary Injection test purposes should be: W1 ICT Multiplier Connection Multiplier Connection 1x Yy0,0deg 1x Yy0,0deg (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited W1 ICT W2 ICT W2 ICT Chapter 6 Page 17 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Secondary testing of the bias characteristic will be greatly simplified by the use of automated numeric protection test equipment such as the Omicron CMC256. This equipment can be programmed using setting which match those of the relay to test for accuracy over the whole operating range and give a clear easy to use graphical display of relay performance against the specified characteristic. The relay characteristic can however be tested manually by recording a sequence of operating points for increasing levels of Restrain current. This can be achieved phase by phase using a single current source such as a Variac with two independently variable current limiting resistors as shown in figure 2-2 or from two independent single or three phase current sources. When two separate sources are used the phase of the two sinusoidal supplies must be the same and the Restrain and Operate currents must be calculated from the sum and difference of the two currents. During manual testing the Operate and Restrain currents can be monitored on the relay in the Differential Meters in the Instruments menu. For manual testing, the bias slope is usually checked for Restrain current up to 250% of nominal current. For testing above this level the continuous current rating of the relay inputs is likely to be exceeded, equipment or test procedure should be arranged in such a way that the short term thermal withstand of the relay current inputs is not exceeded during testing. Winding 2 Current Transformers Winding 1 Current Transformers Phase A IA IRESTRAIN A1 IB Phase B A5 A6 IC Phase C A9 R A2 A10 IG A14 A13 IRESTRAIN IRESTRAIN + IOPERATE B2 B6 IA IB IRESTRAIN IRESTRAIN + IOPERATE Phase C B9 IG A18 A17 R M Neutral IRESTRAIN + IOPERATE IRESTRAIN + IOPERATE A Test Transformer Phase B IC IRESTRAIN IRESTRAIN Phase A B5 B10 M Neutral IRESTRAIN + IOPERATE B1 Relay Terminals are for 1 amp CTs IOPERATE IOPERATE A IRESTRAIN + IOPERATE Figure 2-2 Secondary Injection using a Variac 2.1.1.1 Results for testing 87BD with a Variac 87BD INITIAL 87BD 1ST BIAS SLOPE SETTING SETTING 0.00 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.50 0.50 0.50 Selected Settings 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70 BIAS CURRENT (X I N ) MEASURED ON AMMETER A1 1.00 1.50 2.00 Operate Current Measured on Ammeter A2 0.10 0.11 0.16 0.21 0.20 0.22 0.33 0.44 0.30 0.35 0.53 0.71 0.40 0.50 0.75 1.00 0.50 0.67 1.00 1.33 0.50 0.86 1.29 1.71 0.50 1.08 1.62 2.15 Test Results 0.00 1.00 1.50 2.00 2.50 0.26 0.56 0.88 1.25 1.67 2.14 2.69 2.50 Phase A Pickup Phase B Pickup Phase C Pickup (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 18 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.1.1.2 Results for testing 87BD with 2 current sources 87BD INITIAL SETTING 87BD 1ST BIAS SLOPE SETTING W1 CURRENT (X I N ) 0.00 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.50 0.50 0.50 Selected Settings 1.00 W2 Current (x I n ) 0.1 1.11 0.2 1.22 0.3 1.35 0.4 1.5 0.5 1.67 0.5 1.86 0.5 2.08 Test Results 0.00 1.00 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70 1.50 2.00 2.50 1.66 1.83 2.03 2.25 2.5 2.79 3.12 2.21 2.44 2.71 3.0 3.33 3.71 4.15 2.76 3.06 3.38 3.75 4.17 4.64 5.19 1.50 2.00 2.50 Phase A Pickup Phase B Pickup Phase C Pickup 2.1.1.3 Differential Highset 87HS Differential Highset can be tested by single phase secondary current injection. 87HS settings will usually be higher than the continuous thermal rating of the relay current inputs and equipment or test procedure should be arranged in such a way that the short term thermal withstand of the relay current inputs is not exceeded during testing. 50% of relay setting current can be injected into each of the 2 winding inputs simultaneously to achieve a differential current level of 100% if test current is limited by test equipment capacity. The settings used for Secondary Injection test purposes should be: W1 ICT Multiplier W1 ICT Connection W2 ICT Multiplier W2 ICT Connection 1x Yy0,0deg 1x Yy0,0deg These settings ensure a 1:1 ratio between the injected current and the relay setting. Note that operation of the element can be achieved at a lower level of current if a higher ICT multiplier setting is applied. During testing the Operate current can be monitored on the relay in the Instruments menu. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 19 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.1.2 Primary Injection Testing Primary injection is recommended to prove the relay connections, CT polarity and settings before putting the protection scheme into service. Primary injection is essential to fully prove the connections of the Biased Differential and REF protections. To provide a useful test the relay should have the final site specific settings applied for primary injection tests. WARNING! It is important before carrying out any primary injection to ensure appropriate CTs are shorted to avoid operation of mesh corner or busbar type unit protection. If the injected primary current is large enough, the bus zones protection may operate. Sufficient primary current to prove the connections and settings is required so that a minimum secondary current of about 10mA rms circulates in the relay inputs. This is difficult to achieve using high current primary injection equipment due to the relatively high impedance of the transformer windings. An alternative method is to apply 415 LVAC to one side of the transformer with a short circuit applied to the other side. The external three-phase primary short is usually applied to the HV side so that the LVAC supply is connected to the winding with lowest impedance which will result in a higher current level. The test current that will be produced can be predicted based on the impedance of the transformer and the applied test voltage. The primary test current is injected through all of the biased differential CT's on the LV side. Injection of 3 phase current in this way will simulate balanced load conditions, or through fault. During injection, check that the W1 and W2 relay currents are in anti-phase by examination of the relay `Differential Meters' in `Instruments Mode'. Check each phase in turn, ensuring that the phase angle for `W1 Relay' is in anti-phase with `W2 Relay'. When the transformer is eventually energised and carrying load current, the above examination of the W1 and W2 relay current phase angle should be re-checked for anti-phase to ensure that the correct ICT Connection settings are applied to the differential protection. It should be noted that checking of Vector Grouping by phase alignment between W1 and W2 by 3 phase primary injection or on-load will highlight phase cross-over or connection polarity but will not show incorrect application of zero sequence filters. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 20 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.1.3 Phase Overcurrent (50, 51) 7SR242n-2aAn1-0CA0 W1-IL1 (IA) W1-IL2 (IB) W1-IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 50N (x2) 51N (x2) 46 BC (x2) 46 NPS (x4) 50G (x2) 51G (x4) 64H 37G (x2) IG1 50 BF-1 I4 ICT Each function element can be assigned to W1 or W2 CT inputs. NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive 87HS 37G IG2 W2-IL3 (IC) 50G 51G 50N 51N 46 BC 46 NPS 50 51 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL 2 81 HBL5 37 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL 2 81 HBL5 24 (x3) 27 59 (x4) 59N (x2) 81 (x6) Figure 2-3 ICT 74 CCS (x6) 74 TCS (x6) 50 BF-2 W2-IL1 (IA) 87BD 64H 37 W2-IL2 (IB) V1 (VX) 50 BF-2 I4 Phase Overcurrent Voltage Inputs: None Current Inputs: W1-I L1 (I A ), W1-I L2 (I B ), W1-I L3 (I C ), or W2-I L1 (I A ), W2-I L2 (I B ), W2-I L3 (I C ), Disable: 46, 49, 50BF, 87BD, 87HS Map Pickup LED: 51-n/50-n - Self Reset Other protection functions may overlap with these functions during testing, it may be useful to disable some functions to avoid ambiguity. These elements can be allocated to W1 or W2 current inputs by relay settings, ensure that current is injected on the correct input. Particular care should be taken when testing overcurrent functions that the thermal rating of the current inputs is not exceeded. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 21 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.1.4 Definite Time Overcurrent (50) If DTL setting is small, gradually increase current until element operates. If DTL is large apply 0.9x setting, check for no operation, apply 1.1x setting, check operation Apply 2x setting current if possible and record operating time Phas e I L1 (I A Dir. Is (Amps) DTL (sec) P.U. Current Amps Operate Time 2 x Is NOTES ) I L2 (I B ) I L3 (I C ) Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record. 2.1.5 Inverse Time Overcurrent (51) It will be advantageous to map the function being tested to temporarily drive the relevant Pickup output in the Pickup Config sub-menu in the Output Config menu as this will allow the Pick-up LED to operate for the function. Gradually increase current until Pickup LED operates. Apply 2x setting current and record operating time, Apply 5x setting current and record operating time. Compare to calculated values for operating times Ph. P.U. D.O. & TIMIN G TESTS Dir Char. (NI EI VI LTI, DTL) Is (A) TM Operate Current P.U. D.O. (Amps) (Amps) Operate Time 2 x Is 5 x Is (sec) (sec) NOTES I L1 (I A ) I L2 (I B ) I L3 (I C ) Calculated Timing values in seconds for TM =1.0 Curve 2 xIs 5 xIs IEC-NI 10.03 4.28 IEC-VI 13.50 3.38 IEC-EI 26.67 3.33 IEC-LTI 120.00 30.00 ANSI-MI 3.80 1.69 ANSI-VI 7.03 1.31 ANSI-EI 9.52 1.30 Note that the operate time may be subject to the Minimum op time setting for the element and/or may have a Follower DTL applied. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 22 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.1.5.1 Element Blocking The Phase Overcurrent elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit and Inrush Detector operation. This functionality should be checked. Element BI Inhibits Inrush Detector 51-1 51-2 50-1 50-2 2.1.5.2 ANSI Reset If the element is configured as an ANSI characteristic, it may have an ANSI (decaying) reset delay applied. If ANSI reset is selected for an IEC characteristic element, the reset will be instantaneous. ANSI reset times from operated condition to fully reset are as follows for zero applied current and Time multiplier (TM) = 1.0. The reset curve characteristic type and TM is defined by the operating characteristic. Curve Fully operated to reset with Zero current applied & TM=1 (secs) ANSI-MI 4.85 ANSI-VI 21.6 ANSI-EI 29.1 Apply current in the following sequence, a) 2x setting for a time to ensure element operation, b) Zero current for the reset time above (xTM), c) 2x setting for a time to ensure element operation. Check that the second operation (c) is similar to the first (a) and in line with the expected operate time for the element at this current level. Repeat the test with the reset time (b) reduced to 50% of the previous value. Ensure that the second operate time (c) is 50% of the first (a) operate time. Operate time (expected) Reset time (calculated) Operate time (measured) 50% Reset Time (calculated) First test (c) 50% operate time (calculated) 50% operate time (measured) Second Test (c) Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 23 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.2 Derived Earth fault (50N,51N) 7SR242n-2aAn1-0CA0 W1-IL1 (IA) W1-IL2 (IB) W1-IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 50N (x2) 51N (x2) 46 BC (x2) 46 NPS (x4) 50G (x2) 51G (x4) 64H 37G (x2) IG1 50 BF-1 I4 ICT Each function element can be assigned to W1 or W2 CT inputs. NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive 87HS 37G IG2 W2-IL3 (IC) 50G 51G ICT 50N 51N 46 BC 46 NPS 74 CCS (x6) 74 TCS (x6) 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL 2 81 HBL5 37 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL 2 81 HBL5 24 (x3) 27 59 (x4) 59N (x2) 81 (x6) W2-IL1 (IA) 87BD 64H 37 W2-IL2 (IB) V1 (VX) 50 BF-2 I4 Figure 2-4 Measured Earth Fault Voltage Inputs: None Current Inputs: W1-I L1 (I A ), W1-I L2 (I B ), W1-I L3 (I C ), or W2-I L1 (I A ), W2-I L2 (I B ), W2-I L3 (I C ), Disable: 50BF, 50, 51, 49, 37 Map Pickup LED: 51N-n/50N-n - Self Reset Other protection functions may overlap with these functions during testing, it may be useful to disable some functions to avoid ambiguity. Measured EF & Restricted EF protections can be Enabled/Disabled individually or as groups in the `Function Config' menu. These elements can be allocated to W1 or W2 current inputs by relay settings, ensure that current is injected on the correct input. Derived EF elements can be separated from Measured EF by secondary injection of current through the phase input circuit only. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 24 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.2.1 Definite Time Overcurrent (50N) If DTL setting is small, gradually increase current until element operates. If DTL is large apply 0.9x setting, check for no operation, apply 1.1x setting, check operation Apply 2x setting current if possible and record operating time Input Is (Amps) DTL (sec) P.U. Current Amps Operate Time 2 x Is NOTES Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record. 2.2.2 Inverse Time Overcurrent (51N) It will be advantageous to map the function being tested to temporarily drive the relevant Pickup output in the Pickup Config sub-menu in the Output Config menu as this will allow the Pick-up led to operate for the function. Gradually increase current until Pickup LED operates. Apply 2x setting current and record operating time, Apply 5x setting current and record operating time. Compare to calculated values for operating times P.U. D.O. & TIMIN G TEST S Input Char. (NI EI VI LTI, DTL) Is (A) T.M. Operate Current P.U. (Amps) Calculated Timing values in seconds for TM =1.0 Curve 2 xIs Operate Time D.O. (Amps) NOTES 2 x Is (sec) 5 x Is (sec) 5 xIs IEC-NI 10.03 4.28 IEC-VI 13.50 3.38 IEC-EI 26.67 3.33 IEC-LTI 120.00 30.00 ANSI-MI 3.80 1.69 ANSI-VI 7.03 1.31 ANSI-EI 9.52 1.30 Note that the operate time may be subject to the Minimum op time setting for the element and/or may have a Follower DTL applied. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 25 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.2.2.1 Element Blocking The Measured Earth Fault elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit, VT Supervision and Inrush Detector operation. The Characteristic can be made non-directional by VT Supervision. This functionality should be checked. Element BI Inhibits Inrush Detector 51N-1 51N-2 51N-3 51N-4 50N-1 50N-2 50N-3 50N-4 2.2.3 ANSI Reset If the element is configured as an ANSI characteristic, it may have a reset delay applied. If ANSI reset is selected for an IEC characteristic element, the reset will be instantaneous. ANSI reset times from operated condition to fully reset are as follows for zero applied current and TM = 1.0. The reset curve characteristic type and TM is defined by the operating characteristic. Curve Fully operated to reset with Zero current applied & TM=1 (secs) ANSI-MI 4.85 ANSI-VI 21.6 ANSI-EI 29.1 Apply current in the following sequence, a) 2x setting for a time to ensure element operation, b) Zero current for the reset time above (xTM), c) 2x setting for a time to ensure element operation. Check that the second operation (c) is similar to the first (a) and in line with the expected operate time for the element at this current level. Repeat the test with the reset time (b) reduced to 50% of the previous value. Ensure that the second operate time (c) is 50% of the first (a) operate time. Operate time (expected) Reset time (calculated) Operate time (measured) 50% Reset Time (calculated) First test (c) 50% operate time (calculated) 50% operate time (measured) Second Test (c) Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 26 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.3 Measured Earth fault (50G, 51G) 7SR242n-2aAn1-0CA0 W1-IL1 (IA) W1-IL2 (IB) W1-IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 50N (x2) 51N (x2) 46 BC (x2) 46 NPS (x4) 50G (x2) 51G (x4) 64H 37G (x2) IG1 50 BF-1 I4 ICT Each function element can be assigned to W1 or W2 CT inputs. NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive 87HS 37G IG2 W2-IL3 (IC) 50G 51G 64H 50N 51N 46 BC 46 NPS 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL 2 81 HBL5 37 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL 2 81 HBL5 24 (x3) 27 59 (x4) 59N (x2) 81 (x6) W2-IL1 (IA) 87BD ICT 74 CCS (x6) 74 TCS (x6) 37 W2-IL2 (IB) V1 (VX) 50 BF-2 I4 Figure 2-5 Measured Earth Fault Voltage Inputs: None Current Inputs: I G1 , I G2 Disable: 50BF, 64H Map Pickup LED: 51G-n/50G-n - Self Reset Other protection functions may overlap with these functions during testing, it may be useful to disable some functions to avoid ambiguity. Derived EF, Measured EF & Restricted EF protections can be Enabled/Disabled individually or as groups in the `Function Config' menu. These elements can be allocated to I G1 or I G2 current inputs by relay settings, ensure that current is injected on the correct input. Measured EF elements can be separated from Derived EF by secondary injection of current through the I G1 or I G2 input circuit only. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 27 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.3.1 Definite Time Overcurrent (50G) If DTL setting is small, gradually increase current until element operates. If DTL is large apply 0.9x setting, check for no operation, apply 1.1x setting, check operation Apply 2x setting current if possible and record operating time Input Is (Amps) DTL (sec) P.U. Current Amps Operate Time 2 x Is NOTES I G1 Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record. 2.3.2 Inverse Time Overcurrent (51G) It will be advantageous to map the function being tested to temporarily drive the relevant Pickup output in the Pickup Config sub-menu in the Output Config menu as this will allow the Pick-up LED to operate for the function. Gradually increase current until Pickup LED operates. Apply 2x setting current and record operating time, Apply 5x setting current and record operating time. Compare to calculated values for operating times P.U. D.O. & TIMING TESTS Input Char. (NI EI VI LTI, DTL) Is (A) T.M. Operate Current P.U. D.O. (Amps) (Amps) Operate Time 2 x Is 5 x Is (sec) (sec) NOTES I G1 Calculated Timing values in seconds for TM =1.0 Curve 2 xIs 5 xIs IEC-NI 10.03 4.28 IEC-VI 13.50 3.38 IEC-EI 26.67 3.33 IEC-LTI 120.00 30.00 ANSI-MI 3.80 1.69 ANSI-VI 7.03 1.31 ANSI-EI 9.52 1.30 Note that the operate time may be subject to the Minimum op time setting for the element and/or may have a Follower DTL applied. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 28 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.3.2.1 Element Blocking The Measured Earth Fault elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit, VT Supervision and Inrush Detector operation. The Characteristic can be made non-directional by VT Supervision. This functionality should be checked. Element BI Inhibits Inrush Detector 51G-1 51G-2 51G-3 51G-4 50G-1 50G-2 50G-3 50G-4 2.3.3 ANSI Reset If the element is configured as an ANSI characteristic, it may have a reset delay applied. If ANSI reset is selected for an IEC characteristic element, the reset will be instantaneous. ANSI reset times from operated condition to fully reset are as follows for zero applied current and TM = 1.0. The reset curve characteristic type and TM is defined by the operating characteristic. Curve Fully operated to reset with Zero current applied & TM=1 (secs) ANSI-MI 4.85 ANSI-VI 21.6 ANSI-EI 29.1 Apply current in the following sequence, a) 2x setting for a time to ensure element operation, b) Zero current for the reset time above (xTM), c) 2x setting for a time to ensure element operation. Check that the second operation (c) is similar to the first (a) and in line with the expected operate time for the element at this current level. Repeat the test with the reset time (b) reduced to 50% of the previous value. Ensure that the second operate time (c) is 50% of the first (a) operate time. Operate time (expected) Reset time (calculated) Operate time (measured) 50% Reset Time (calculated) First test (c) 50% operate time (calculated) 50% operate time (measured) Second Test (c) Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 29 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.4 Restricted Earth fault (64H) 7SR242n-2aAn1-0CA0 W1-IL1 (IA) W1-IL2 (IB) W1-IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 50N (x2) 51N (x2) 46 BC (x2) 46 NPS (x4) 50G (x2) 51G (x4) 64H 37G (x2) IG1 50 BF-1 I4 ICT Each function element can be assigned to W1 or W2 CT inputs. NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive 87HS 37G IG2 W2-IL3 (IC) 50G 51G ICT 50N 51N 46 BC 46 NPS 74 CCS (x6) 74 TCS (x6) 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL 2 81 HBL5 37 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL 2 81 HBL5 24 (x3) 27 59 (x4) 59N (x2) 81 (x6) W2-IL1 (IA) 87BD 64H 37 W2-IL2 (IB) V1 (VX) 50 BF-2 I4 Figure 2-6 Restricted Earth Fault Voltage Inputs: n/a Current Inputs: I G1 , I G2 Disable: 50G, 51G, 50BF Map Pickup LED: 64H-n - Self Reset The external stabilising resistor value should be measured and compared to that specified in the settings data. Both values should be recorded. Element Settings Data: R STAB Value R STAB Measured 64H-1 64H-2 The relatively high value of stabilising resistance R STAB will often interfere with secondary current injection when using a digital test set. It is normal practice in these cases to short circuit the resistor to allow testing, the shorting link should be removed after testing. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 30 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide These elements can be enabled for the I G1 or I G2 current inputs by relay settings, ensure that current is injected on the correct input. Since the DTL setting is generally small the pick-up setting can be tested by gradually increasing current until element operates. The relay should be disconnected from the current transformers for this test. Apply 2x setting current if possible and record operating time Is (Amps) DTL (sec) P.U. Current Amps Operate Time 2 x Is NOTES 64H-1 64H-2 It is also desirable to check the operating voltage achieved with the setting resistor and all parallel CTs connected but de-energised. A higher capacity test set will be required for this test. Adequate current must be supplied to provide the magnetising current of all connected CTs. Precautions should be taken to ensure that no personnel are at risk of contact with any of the energised secondary wiring during the test. Settings Data: V S Measured Voltage Setting (V S ) Settings Data: I OP Measured Operate Current (I OP ) 64H-1 64H-2 To complete testing of the REF requires primary injection through the phase and residual (REF) CT in series to simulate an out of zone fault and ensure stability of the relay. The test can then be repeated with the REF CT secondary connections reversed to prove operation. 2.4.1.1 Element Blocking The Restricted Earth Fault element can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. Where applied this functionality should be checked. Element BI Inhibits Checked 64H-1 64H-2 Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record. Check that any shorting links are removed after testing. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 31 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.5 Open Circuit (46BC) 7SR242n-2aAn1-0CA0 W1-IL1 (IA) W1-IL2 (IB) W1-IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 50N (x2) 51N (x2) 46 BC (x2) 46 NPS (x4) 50G (x2) 51G (x4) 64H 37G (x2) IG1 50 BF-1 I4 ICT Each function element can be assigned to W1 or W2 CT inputs. NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive 87HS 37G IG2 W2-IL3 (IC) 50G 51G ICT 50N 51N 46 BC 46 NPS 74 CCS (x6) 74 TCS (x6) 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL 2 81 HBL5 37 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL 2 81 HBL5 24 (x3) 27 59 (x4) 59N (x2) 81 (x6) W2-IL1 (IA) 87BD 64H 37 W2-IL2 (IB) V1 (VX) 50 BF-2 I4 Figure 2-7 Open Circuit Voltage Inputs: n/a Current Inputs: W1-I L1 (I A ), W1-I L2 (I B ), W1-I L3 (I C ), or W2-I L1 (I A ), W2-I L2 (I B ), W2-I L3 (I C ), Disable: 51N, 46IT, 46DT Map Pickup LED: 46BC - Self Reset This function uses the ratio of NPS current to PPS current to detect an open circuit . These quantities can be produced directly from many advanced test sets but with limited equipment the following approach can be applied. Apply 3P balanced current with normal phase rotation direction. This current will consist of PPS alone, no NPS or ZPS. Increase 1 phase current magnitude in isolation to produce NPS. The single phase unbalance current will contain equal quantities of ZPS, NPS and PPS. The NPS component will be 1/3 of the unbalance current and the total PPS component will be value of the original balanced 3P current plus 1/3 of the additional unbalance current. i.e. as the single phase unbalance current increases, the ratio of NPS to PPS will also increase. The levels of each sequence component current can be monitored in the Current Meters in Instruments Mode. Inject 1A of balanced current. Gradually increase imbalance current, operating level should be as follows: (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 32 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 46BC Setting 1P unbalance current (% of 3P current) 46BC Setting 20% 75% 25% 100% 30% 129% 35% 161% 40% 200% 3P balanced current (A) 1P unbalance current (A) Measured Unbalance current 46BC-1 46BC-2 Apply 1A 1P unbalance current without 3P balanced current. Measure 46BC operating time. 46BC Delay setting Measured 46BC-1 46BC-2 2.5.1.1 Element Blocking Elements can be blocked by operation of a Binary Input Inhibit or by operation of the 46BC-n U/I Guard element. This functionality should be checked. Element BI Inhibits U/I Guard NOTES 46BC-1 46BC-2 (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 33 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.6 Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent (46NPS) 7SR242n-2aAn1-0CA0 W1-IL1 (IA) W1-IL2 (IB) W1-IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 50N (x2) 51N (x2) 46 BC (x2) 46 NPS (x4) 50G (x2) 51G (x4) 64H 37G (x2) IG1 50 BF-1 I4 ICT Each function element can be assigned to W1 or W2 CT inputs. NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive 87HS 37G IG2 W2-IL3 (IC) 50G 51G ICT 50N 51N 46 BC 46 NPS 74 CCS (x6) 74 TCS (x6) 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL 2 81 HBL5 37 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL 2 81 HBL5 24 (x3) 27 59 (x4) 59N (x2) 81 (x6) W2-IL1 (IA) 87BD 64H 37 W2-IL2 (IB) V1 (VX) 50 BF-2 I4 Figure 2-8 Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent Voltage Inputs: n/a Current Inputs: W1-I L1 (I A ), W1-I L2 (I B ), W1-I L3 (I C ), or W2-I L1 (I A ), W2-I L2 (I B ), W2-I L3 (I C ), Disable: 50, 51, 50BF, 87BD Map Pickup LED: 46IT/46DT - Self Reset Where two NPS elements are being used with different settings, it is convenient to test the elements with the highest settings first. The elements with lower settings can then be tested without disabling the lower settings. The Thermal withstand limitations of the current inputs, stated in the Performance Specification should always be observed throughout testing. These elements can be allocated to W1 or W2 current inputs by relay settings, ensure that current is injected on the correct input. NPS Overcurrent can be tested using a normal 3P balanced source. Two phase current connections should be reversed so that the applied balanced 3P current is Negative Phase Sequence. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 34 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.6.1 Definite Time NPS Overcurrent (46DT) If DTL setting is small, gradually increase current until element operates. If DTL is large apply 0.9x setting, check for no operation, apply 1.1x setting, check operation Apply 2x setting current if possible and record operating time Phase Is (Amps) DTL (sec) P.U. Current Amps Operate Time 2 x Is NOTES NPS Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record. 2.6.2 Inverse Time NPS Overcurrent (46IT) It will be advantageous to map the function being tested to temporarily drive the relevant Pickup output in the Pickup Config sub-menu in the Output Config menu as this will allow the Pick-up led to operate for the function. Gradually increase current until Pickup LED operates. Apply 2x setting current and record operating time, Apply 5x setting current and record operating time. Compare to calculated values for operating times Ph. P.U. D.O. & TIMING TESTS Char. (NI EI VI LTI, DTL) Is (A) TM Operate Current P.U. D.O. (Amps) (Amps) Operate Time 2 x Is 5 x Is (sec) (sec) NOTES NPS Calculated Timing values in seconds for TM =1.0 Curve 2 xIs 5 xIs IEC-NI 10.03 4.28 IEC-VI 13.50 3.38 IEC-EI 26.67 3.33 IEC-LTI 120.00 30.00 ANSI-MI 3.80 1.69 ANSI-VI 7.03 1.31 ANSI-EI 9.52 1.30 Note that the operate time may be subject to the Minimum op time setting for the element and/or may have a Follower DTL applied. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 35 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.6.2.1 ANSI Reset If the element is configured as an ANSI characteristic, it may have a reset delay applied. If ANSI reset is selected for an IEC characteristic element, the reset will be instantaneous. ANSI reset times from operated condition to fully reset are as follows for zero applied current and TM = 1.0. The reset curve characteristic type and TM is defined by the operating characteristic. Curve Fully operated to reset with Zero current applied & TM=1 (secs) ANSI-MI 4.85 ANSI-VI 21.6 ANSI-EI 29.1 Apply current in the following sequence, a) 2x setting for a time to ensure element operation, b) Zero current for the reset time above (xTM), c) 2x setting for a time to ensure element operation. Check that the second operation (c) is similar to the first (a) and in line with the expected operate time for the element at this current level. Repeat the test with the reset time (b) reduced to 50% of the previous value. Ensure that the second operate time (c) is 50% of the first (a) operate time. Operate time (expected) Reset time (calculated) Operate time (measured) 50% Reset Time (calculated) First test (c) 50% operate time (calculated) 50% operate time (measured) Second Test (c) 2.6.2.2 Element Blocking The NPS Overcurrent elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. This functionality should be checked. Element BI Inhibits 46IT 46DT Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record. When testing is complete reinstate any of the disabled functions. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 36 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.7 Undercurrent (37, 37G) 7SR242n-2aAn1-0CA0 W1-IL1 (IA) W1-IL2 (IB) W1-IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 50N (x2) 51N (x2) 46 BC (x2) 46 NPS (x4) 50G (x2) 51G (x4) 64H 37G (x2) IG1 50 BF-1 I4 ICT Each function element can be assigned to W1 or W2 CT inputs. NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive 87HS 37G IG2 W2-IL3 (IC) 50G 51G ICT 50N 51N 46 BC 46 NPS 74 CCS (x6) 74 TCS (x6) 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL 2 81 HBL5 37 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL 2 81 HBL5 24 (x3) 27 59 (x4) 59N (x2) 81 (x6) W2-IL1 (IA) 87BD 64H 37 W2-IL2 (IB) V1 (VX) 50 BF-2 I4 Figure 2-9 Undercurrent 2.7.1 Voltage Inputs: n/a Current Inputs: I G2 W1-I L1 (I A ), W1-I L2 (I B ), W1-I L3 (I C ), I G1 or W2-I L1 (I A ), W2-I L2 (I B ), W2-I L3 (I C ), Disable: 50N, 51N, 51G, 46, 87BD Map Pickup LED: 37-n, 37G-n - Self Reset 37-n Elements If two Undercurrent 37 elements are used with different settings, it is convenient to test the element with the lowest setting first. The higher setting element can then be tested without interference from the other element. These elements can be allocated to W1 or W2 current inputs by relay settings, ensure that current is injected on the correct input. Apply 3P balanced current at a level above the 37-n setting until the element resets. If DTL setting is small, gradually reduce any each phase current in turn until element operates. If DTL is large apply 1.1x setting, check for no operation, apply 0.9x setting, check operation Testing of these elements phase by phase may cause inadvertent operation of the 46 NPS Overcurrent elements. Apply 0.5x setting current and record operating time (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 37 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Phase Is (Amps) DTL (sec) P.U. Current Amps Operate Time 0.5 x Is NOTES Wn-I L1 (I A ) Wn-I L2 (I B ) Wn-I L3 (I C ) Wn-I L1 (I A ) Wn-I L2 (I B ) Wn-I L3 (I C ) Elements can be blocked by operation of a Binary Input Inhibit or by operation of the 37-n U/I Guard element. This functionality should be checked. Element BI Inhibits U/I Guard NOTES 37-1 37-2 Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record. 2.7.2 37G-n Elements Apply current to the I Gn input at a level above the 37G-n setting until the element resets. If DTL setting is small, gradually reduce current until element operates. If DTL is large apply 1.1x setting, check for no operation, apply 0.9x setting, check operation Apply 0.5x setting current and record operating time Phase Is (Amps) DTL (sec) P.U. Current Amps Operate Time 0.5 x Is NOTES IG IG Elements can be blocked by operation of a Binary Input Inhibit. This functionality should be checked. Element BI Inhibits NOTES 37G-1 37G-2 Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 38 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.8 Thermal Overload (49) 7SR242n-2aAn1-0CA0 W1-IL1 (IA) W1-IL2 (IB) W1-IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 50N (x2) 51N (x2) 46 BC (x2) 46 NPS (x4) 50G (x2) 51G (x4) 64H 37G (x2) IG1 50 BF-1 I4 ICT Each function element can be assigned to W1 or W2 CT inputs. NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive 87HS 37G IG2 W2-IL3 (IC) 50G 51G ICT 50N 51N 46 BC 46 NPS 74 CCS (x6) 74 TCS (x6) 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL 2 81 HBL5 37 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL 2 81 HBL5 24 (x3) 27 59 (x4) 59N (x2) 81 (x6) W2-IL1 (IA) 87BD 64H 37 W2-IL2 (IB) V1 (VX) 50 BF-2 I4 Figure 2-10 Thermal Overload Voltage Inputs: n/a Current Inputs: W1-I L1 (I A ), W1-I L2 (I B ), W1-I L3 (I C ), or W2-I L1 (I A ), W2-I L2 (I B ), W2-I L3 (I C ), Disable: 51, 50, 37, 46NPS, 50CBF, 87BD Map Pickup LED: 49 Alarm The current can be applied from a 3P balanced supply or phase by phase from a 1P supply. Alternatively the 3 phase current inputs can be connected in series and injected simultaneously from a single 1P source. This elements can be allocated to W1 or W2 current inputs by relay settings, ensure that current is injected on the correct input. The Thermal Overload Setting and Time Constant Setting can be considered together to calculate the operating time for a particular applied current. The following table lists operate times for a range of Time Constant Settings for an applied current of 2x the Thermal Overload setting. Ensure that the thermal rating of the relay is not exceeded during this test. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 39 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Time Constant (mins) Operate Time (sec) 1 17.3 2 34.5 3 51.8 4 69 5 86.3 10 173 15 259 20 345 25 432 30 51.8 50 863 100 1726 The Thermal State must be in the fully reset condition in order to measure the operate time correctly. This can be achieved by setting change in the Thermal protection settings menu or by pressing the Test/Reset button when the Thermal Meter is shown in the Instruments Mode. Reset the thermal State then apply 2x the Overload Setting current. Calculated Operate Time (s) Measured Operate Time (s) If the Thermal Overload Capacity Alarm is used, this can be tested by monitoring the Thermal Capacity in the instruments menu. If the Thermal time constant is longer than a few minutes, this can be assessed during the timing test above. If the Time Constant is less than a few minutes, a lower multiple of current will be required such that the rate of capacity increase is slowed to allow monitoring of the instrument to be accurate. Capacity Alarm Setting 2.8.1.1 Measured Element Blocking The Thermal element can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. This functionality should be checked. Element BI Inhibits 49 (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 40 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.9 Under/Over Voltage (27/59) 7SR242n-2aAn1-0CA0 W1-IL1 (IA) W1-IL2 (IB) W1-IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 50N (x2) 51N (x2) 46 BC (x2) 46 NPS (x4) 50G (x2) 51G (x4) 64H 37G (x2) IG1 50 BF-1 I4 ICT Each function element can be assigned to W1 or W2 CT inputs. NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive 87HS 37G IG2 W2-IL3 (IC) 50G 51G 64H 50N 51N 46 BC 46 NPS 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL 2 81 HBL5 37 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL 2 81 HBL5 24 (x3) 27 59 (x4) 59N (x2) 81 (x6) W2-IL1 (IA) 87BD ICT 74 CCS (x6) 74 TCS (x6) 37 W2-IL2 (IB) V1 (VX) 50 BF-2 I4 Figure 2-11 Phase Under/Over Voltage Voltage Inputs: V 1 (V X ) Current Inputs: n/a apply zero current to stabilize other functions Disable: 59N Map Pickup LED: 27/59-n - Self Reset Where more than one Undervoltage (27) elements are being used with different settings, it is convenient to test the elements with the lowest settings first. The elements with higher settings can then be tested without disabling the lower settings. Note that if the voltage is reduced below the 27UVG setting, the function may be blocked. Current inputs are not required to stabilise the relay during voltage element testing. If the DTL is short, starting from nominal voltage, slowly decrease the applied test voltage until the Pickup LED (temporarily mapped) is lit. Record the operate voltage. The LED should light at setting Volts +/-5%. Slowly increase the input voltage until the LED extinguishes. Record the reset voltage to check the `Hysteresis' setting. If the DTL is long, the operate level should be checked by applying a voltage of 90% of setting voltage. Check Hysteresis by resetting element to the operate level setting plus the hysteresis setting. Connect the relevant output contact(s) to stop the test set. Step the applied voltage to a level below the setting. The test set should be stopped at the operate time setting +/-5% When testing is complete reinstate any of the disabled functions. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 41 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Where more than one Overvoltage (59) elements are being used with different settings, it is convenient to test the elements with the highest settings first. The elements with lower settings can then be tested without disabling the higher settings. If the `O/P Phases' is set to `All', the voltage on all phases must be increased simultaneously. Otherwise the 3 phases should be tested individually. If the DTL setting is short, starting from nominal voltage, slowly increase the applied 3P or VL1 test voltage until the Pickup LED (temporarily mapped) is lit. The LED should light at setting Volts +/-5% Decrease the input voltage to nominal Volts and the LED will extinguish. Record the reset voltage to check the `Hysteresis' setting. If the DTL setting is long, the operate level can be checked by applying 100% of setting to cause operation followed by setting minus the Hysteresis setting to cause reset. Connect the relevant output contact(s) to stop the test set. Step the applied voltage to a level above the setting. The test set should be stopped at the operate time setting +/-5% Test inputs VL2 and VL3 by repeating the above if necessary. Phase 27/59 setting (Volts) U/ O DTL (sec) Hyst. D.O. (calculated) P.U. Volts D.O Volts Op. Time 2x Vs (OV) 0.5x Vs (UV) UV Guard NOTES V 1 (V X ) 2.9.1.1 Element Blocking The NPS Overcurrent elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit and VT Supervision. This functionality should be checked. Element BI Inhibits 27/59-1 27/59-2 27/59-3 27/59-4 When testing is complete reinstate any of the disabled functions. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 42 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.9.2 Undervoltage Guard (27/59UVG) If any 27 Undervoltage element is set to be inhibited by the 27 Undervoltage Guard element, this function should be tested. Connect the test voltage inputs to suit the installation wiring diagram utilising any test socket facilities available. It may be useful to temporarily map an LED as `General Pickup' to assist during testing. 27UVG operation will reset the General Pickup if no other element is operated. This LED should not be set as `Hand Reset' in the Output matrix. Starting from nominal voltage, apply a step decrease to the applied voltage to a level below the 27 Undervoltage setting but above the 27UVG setting such that an Undervoltage element operation occurs. Slowly reduce the applied voltage until the 27 Undervoltage element resets, this can be detected by the General Pickup LED reset if no other element is operated (this includes any Undervoltage element which is not UV Guarded). Phase Vs (Volts) V element Used for test Blocked Volts NOTES UVG (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 43 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.10 Neutral Over Voltage (59N) 7SR242n-2aAn1-0CA0 W1-IL1 (IA) W1-IL2 (IB) W1-IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 50N (x2) 51N (x2) 46 BC (x2) 46 NPS (x4) 50G (x2) 51G (x4) 64H 37G (x2) IG1 50 BF-1 I4 ICT Each function element can be assigned to W1 or W2 CT inputs. NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive 87HS 37G IG2 W2-IL3 (IC) 50G 51G 64H 50N 51N 46 BC 46 NPS 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL 2 81 HBL5 37 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL 2 81 HBL5 24 (x3) 27 59 (x4) 59N (x2) 81 (x6) W2-IL1 (IA) 87BD ICT 74 CCS (x6) 74 TCS (x6) 37 W2-IL2 (IB) V1 (VX) 50 BF-2 I4 Figure 2-12 Neutral Overvoltage Voltage Inputs: V 1 (V X ) Current Inputs: n/a apply zero current to stabilize other functions Disable: 27/59 Map Pickup LED: 59N-n - Self Reset (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 44 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.10.1 Definite Time (59NDT) If DTL setting is small, gradually increase single phase voltage until element operates. If DTL is large apply 0.9x setting, check for no operation, apply 1.1x setting, check operation Apply 2x setting voltage if possible and record operating time Phase Vs (Volts) DTL (sec) P.U. Current Volts Operate Time 2 x Vs NOTES V 1 (V X) Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record. 2.10.2 Inverse Time (59NIT) It will be advantageous to map the function being tested to temporarily drive the relevant Pickup output in the Pickup Config sub-menu in the Output Config menu as this will allow the Pick-up LED to operate for the function. Gradually increase voltage until Pickup LED operates. Apply 2x setting voltage and record operating time, Apply a higher multiple of setting voltage and record operating time. Compare to calculated values for operating times from: 1 top (sec onds ) ) = M Vn [Vs ] - 1 Where M = Time multiplier and Vn/Vs = multiple of setting. Ph. Vs (V) TM Operate Voltage P.U. D.O. (Volts) (Volts) Operate Time 2 x Vs x Vs (sec) (sec) NOTES V 1 (V X) 2.10.2.1 Element Blocking The Neutral Overvoltage elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. This functionality should be checked. Element BI Inhibits 59NIT 59NDT Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record. When testing is complete reinstate any of the disabled functions. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 45 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.11 Under/Over Frequency (81) 7SR242n-2aAn1-0CA0 W1-IL1 (IA) W1-IL2 (IB) W1-IL3 (IC) IG1 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 50N (x2) 51N (x2) 46 BC (x2) 46 NPS (x4) 50G (x2) 51G (x4) 64H 37G (x2) 50 BF-1 I4 ICT Each function element can be assigned to W1 or W2 CT inputs. NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive 87HS 37G IG2 W2-IL3 (IC) 50G 51G 64H 50N 51N 46 BC 46 NPS 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL 2 81 HBL5 37 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL 2 81 HBL5 24 (x3) 27 59 (x4) 59N (x2) 81 (x6) W2-IL1 (IA) 87BD ICT 74 CCS (x6) 74 TCS (x6) 37 W2-IL2 (IB) V1 (VX) 50 BF-2 I4 Figure 2-13 Under/Over Frequency Voltage Inputs: V 1 (V X ) Current Inputs: n/a apply zero current to stabilize other functions Disable: Map Pickup LED: 81-n - Self Reset For Over-frequency, the elements with the highest setting should be tested first and for Under-frequency the elements with the lowest settings should be tested first. The elements with other settings can then be tested without need to disable the elements already tested. Note that the relay is designed to track the gradual changes in power system frequency and that sudden step changes in frequency during testing do not reflect normal system operation. Normal `instantaneous' operation of the frequency element is 140-175ms in line with the Performance Specification. Application of sudden step changes to frequency can add additional delay which can produce misleading test results. Gradually increase/decrease applied voltage frequency until 81-n operation occurs. Elements set for more extreme frequency fluctuation should be tested first with lesser elements disabled. If the 81-n Delay setting is long it will be advantageous to map the function to temporarily drive the relevant Pickup output in the Pickup Config sub-menu in the Output Config menu as this will allow the Pick-up LED to operate for the function. If the delay setting is short the operation of the element can be easily checked directly. The frequency should then be gradually decreased/increased until the element resets. The reset frequency can be used to check the Hysteresis setting. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 46 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide If the element is set as 81-n U/V Guarded, The applied voltage must be above the 81 UV Guard Setting in the U/O Frequency menu. Apply setting frequency +0.5Hz for Over-frequency or -0.5Hz for Under-frequency and record operating time. Starting with the element in the operated condition, gradually increase or decrease the applied voltage until the element resets. Measure the reset voltage level to check the 81 Hysteresis setting. F (Hertz) U/O DTL (sec) Hyst. D.O. (calc.) P.U. Freq Hertz D.O. Freq. Hertz Operate Time +/- 0.5Hz UV Guard NOTES If the element is set as 81-nU/V Guarded, this setting can be tested by applying the test voltage at a level below the 81 U/V Guard Setting at a frequency in the operate range. Increase the voltage until the relay operates. UVG UVG Setting (Volts) Freq element Used for test Blocked Volts (D.O.) Unblocked Volts (P.U.) NOTES U/O Freq 2.11.1.1 Element Blocking The U/O Frequency elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. This functionality should be checked. Element BI Inhibits 81-1 81-2 81-3 81-4 81-5 81-6 Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record. When testing is complete reinstate any of the disabled functions. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 47 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.12 Overfluxing (24) 7SR242n-2aAn1-0CA0 W1-IL1 (IA) W1-IL2 (IB) W1-IL3 (IC) IG1 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 50N (x2) 51N (x2) 46 BC (x2) 46 NPS (x4) 50G (x2) 51G (x4) 64H 37G (x2) 50 BF-1 I4 ICT Each function element can be assigned to W1 or W2 CT inputs. NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive 87HS 37G IG2 W2-IL3 (IC) 50G 51G ICT 50N 51N 46 BC 46 NPS 74 CCS (x6) 74 TCS (x6) 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL 2 81 HBL5 37 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL 2 81 HBL5 24 (x3) 27 59 (x4) 59N (x2) 81 (x6) W2-IL1 (IA) 87BD 64H 37 W2-IL2 (IB) V1 (VX) 50 BF-2 I4 Figure 2-14 Under/Over Frequency The settings are set in terms of V/f based on multiple of nominal voltage and frequency. Application of a voltage of nominal voltage and frequency represents 1.0. Testing is simplified by applying nominal frequency and increasing voltage only, such that the operating level is simply the setting multiplied by Nominal Voltage. 2.12.1 definite time (24DT) If DTL setting is small, gradually increase voltage until element operates. If DTL is large apply 0.95x setting, check for no operation, apply 1.05x setting, check operation Apply 0.9x voltage, increase to 1.1x setting and record operating time Setting (xVn) Setting (volts) Hysteresis (%) Calculated D.O. (volts) DTL Setting (sec) P.U. Volts D.O. Volts Operate Time NOTES Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 48 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.12.2 inverse time (24IT) The inverse V/f element should be tested at each of the points specified by settings that constitute the overall inverse characteristics. Setting (xVn) Setting (volts) Hysteresis (%) Calculated D.O. (volts) X0 Setting (xVn) Setting (volts) X1 DTL Setting (sec) Y1 X2 Y2 X3 Y3 X4 Y4 X5 Y5 X6 Y6 (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Operate Time DTL Setting (sec) Y0 P.U. Volts D.O. Volts Operate Time NOTES NOTES Chapter 6 Page 49 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 50 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Section 3: Supervision Functions 3.1 CB Fail (50BF) 7SR242n-2aAn1-0CA0 W1-IL1 (IA) W1-IL2 (IB) W1-IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 50N (x2) 51N (x2) 46 BC (x2) 46 NPS (x4) 50G (x2) 51G (x4) 64H 37G (x2) IG1 50 BF-1 I4 ICT Each function element can be assigned to W1 or W2 CT inputs. NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive 87HS 37G IG2 W2-IL3 (IC) 50G 51G 64H 50N 51N 46 BC 46 NPS 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL 2 81 HBL5 37 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL 2 81 HBL5 24 (x3) 27 59 (x4) 59N (x2) 81 (x6) W2-IL1 (IA) 87BD ICT 74 CCS (x6) 74 TCS (x6) 37 W2-IL2 (IB) V1 (VX) 50 BF-2 I4 Figure 3-1 CB Fail Voltage Inputs: n/a Current Inputs: I G2 W1-I L1 (I A ), W1-I L2 (I B ), W1-I L3 (I C ), I G1 or W2-I L1 (I A ), W2-I L2 (I B ), W2-I L3 (I C ), Disable: Map Pickup LED: 50BF-n-n - Self Reset The circuit breaker fail protection time delays are initiated either from: A binary output mapped as Trip Contact in the OUTPUT CONFIG>BINARY OUTPUT CONFIG menu, or A binary input mapped as 50BF Ext Trip in the INPUT CONFIG>INPUT MATRIX menu. Or A binary input mapped as 50BF Mech Trip in the INPUT CONFIG>INPUT MATRIX menu. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 51 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide These elements are operated from W1 and W2 current inputs, ensure that current is injected on the correct input for the element being tested. Apply a trip condition by injection of current to cause operation of a suitable protection element. Allow current to continue after the trip at a level of 110% of the 50BF Setting current level on any phase. Measure the time for operation of 50BF-1 Delay and 50BF-2 Delay. Repeat the sequence with the 50BF CB Faulty input energised and ensure the 50BF-1 and 50BF-2 outputs operate without delay, by-passing the timer delay settings. Repeat the sequence with current at 90% of the 50BF Setting current level after the element trip and check for no CB Fail operation. Repeat the sequence by injecting the current to I4 and using the 50BF-I4 Setting. Setting (xIn) Test Current 50BF-1 (110%)............. 50BF-1-I4 50BF-2 50BF-1 Delay............... 50BF-2 Delay................... (90%)............... No Operation No Operation 50BF CB Faulty Operation No Delay Operation No Delay (90%)............... No Operation No Operation 50BF CB Faulty Operation No Delay Operation No Delay (90%)............... No Operation No Operation 50BF CB Faulty Operation No Delay Operation No Delay (90%)............... No Operation No Operation 50BF CB Faulty Operation No Delay (110%)............. (110%)............. 50BF-2-I4 (110%)............. Operation No Delay If the circuit breaker can also receive a trip signal from a protection function where there is no increase in current, this trip input should be mapped to 50BF Mech Trip in the INPUT CONFIG>INPUT MATRIX menu. Initiate this binary input and simulate the circuit breaker remaining closed by ensuring the CB Closed binary Input is energised and ensure operation of the 50BF-1 and 50BF-2 outputs after their programmed delays. Mech Trip 50BF-1 50BF-2 Delay................... No Operation No Operation No Operation No Operation CB Closed CB Open 50BF-2 50BF-1 Delay............... CB Closed CB Open 3.1.1.1 Element Blocking The CB Fail function can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. This functionality should be checked. Element BI Inhibits NOTES 50BF-1 50BF-2 (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 52 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 3.2 Trip/Close Circuit Supervision (74TCS, 74CCS) 7SR242n-2aAn1-0CA0 W1-IL1 (IA) W1-IL2 (IB) W1-IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 50N (x2) 51N (x2) 46 BC (x2) 46 NPS (x4) 50G (x2) 51G (x4) 64H 37G (x2) IG1 50 BF-1 I4 ICT Each function element can be assigned to W1 or W2 CT inputs. NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive 87HS 37G IG2 W2-IL3 (IC) 50G 51G ICT 50N 51N 46 BC 46 NPS 74 CCS (x6) 74 TCS (x6) 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL 2 81 HBL5 37 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL 2 81 HBL5 24 (x3) 27 59 (x4) 59N (x2) 81 (x6) W2-IL1 (IA) 87BD 64H 37 W2-IL2 (IB) V1 (VX) 50 BF-2 I4 Figure 3-2 Trip Circuit Supervision Voltage Inputs: n/a Current Inputs: n/a Disable: Map Pickup LED: 74TCS-n/74CCS-n - Self Reset The T/CCS-n Delay can be initiated by applying an inversion to the relevant status input and measured by monitoring of the alarm output. TCS-n Delay setting Measured CCS-n Delay setting Measured (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 53 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 3.3 Magnetising Inrush Detector (81HBL2) 7SR242n-2aAn1-0CA0 W1-IL1 (IA) W1-IL2 (IB) W1-IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 50N (x2) 51N (x2) 46 BC (x2) 46 NPS (x4) 50G (x2) 51G (x4) 64H 37G (x2) IG1 50 BF-1 I4 ICT Each function element can be assigned to W1 or W2 CT inputs. NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive 87HS 37G IG2 W2-IL3 (IC) 50G 51G ICT 50N 51N 46 BC 46 NPS 74 CCS (x6) 74 TCS (x6) 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL 2 81 HBL5 37 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL 2 81 HBL5 24 (x3) 27 59 (x4) 59N (x2) 81 (x6) W2-IL1 (IA) 87BD 64H 37 W2-IL2 (IB) V1 (VX) 50 BF-2 I4 Figure 3-3 Magnetising Inrush Detector Voltage Inputs: n/a Current Inputs: W1-I L1 (I A ), W1-I L2 (I B ), W1-I L3 (I C ), or W2-I L1 (I A ), W2-I L2 (I B ), W2-I L3 (I C ) Disable: Map Pickup LED: nd Logical operation of the harmonic blocking can be tested by injection of 2 harmonic current (at 100Hz for 50Hz nd relay) to cause operation of the blocking signals. Note that injection of any level of 2 harmonic alone on a current input will cause the block to be raised if the Cross or Phase blocking method is used since the harmonic nd content on this input is 100%, i.e. greater than setting. Full wave rectified current contains mostly 2 harmonic and is the traditional method to generate it without advanced equipment. If the Cross or Sum Blocking methods are used, fundamental frequency current can be injected into the other winding simultaneously to operate protection elements if required to test the blocking operation. Care should be taken that the thermal limits of the relay are not exceeded during these tests. More advanced test equipment is required, with the facility to combine harmonic and fundamental frequencies of current, to test the accuracy of setting for current level of the blocking element. Note that the 81HBL2 Setting is nd set as a fraction of the total current. e.g. 0.25A at 100Hz combined with 1A at 50Hz gives a 2 harmonic content of 0.2 i.e. (0.25/(0.25+1.0)). (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 54 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide A compromise test can be made by the use of a diode to generate a half-wave rectified waveform from a sinusoidal source. The half-wave rectified current will contain a combination of fundamental and harmonic nd nd currents. The rectified waveform contains even harmonics higher than 2 but the relationship between the 2 harmonic current content, the fundamental component and the total RMS current is as shown below. Note that some protection elements can be set to operate on the RMS current or the Fundamental current and the applied values are different when non-sinusoidal waveforms are applied. The Inrush Detector setting is based on the ratio nd of 2 harmonic to fundamental. This method is not suitable for use with constant current generating test sets such as modern digital equipment. Half Wave Rectified nd nd Full Sine RMS Rectified RMS Current Fundamental component 2 Harmonic component 2 /Fundamental 1.0 0.5 0.5 0.212 0.424 Assuming that the Gn 81HBL2 Setting is less than 40%, inject half-wave rectified current at an RMS or Fundamental component level above the element setting to prove that the block is applied and the element is stable. Care should be taken that the thermal limits of the relay are not exceeded during these tests. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 55 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 3.4 Overfluxing Detector (81HBL5) 7SR242n-2aAn1-0CA0 W1-IL1 (IA) W1-IL2 (IB) W1-IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 (x2) 50 BF-1 50 (x2) 51 (x2) 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 50N (x2) 51N (x2) 46 BC (x2) 46 NPS (x4) 50G (x2) 51G (x4) 64H 37G (x2) IG1 50 BF-1 I4 ICT Each function element can be assigned to W1 or W2 CT inputs. NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive 87HS 37G IG2 W2-IL3 (IC) 50G 51G ICT 50N 51N 46 BC 46 NPS 74 CCS (x6) 74 TCS (x6) 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL2 81 HBL5 37 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL 2 81 HBL5 37 50 BF-2 50 51 49 81 HBL 2 81 HBL5 24 (x3) 27 59 (x4) 59N (x2) 81 (x6) W2-IL1 (IA) 87BD 64H 37 W2-IL2 (IB) V1 (VX) 50 BF-2 I4 Figure 3-4 Magnetising Inrush Detector Voltage Inputs: n/a Current Inputs: W1-I L1 (I A ), W1-I L2 (I B ), W1-I L3 (I C ), or W2-I L1 (I A ), W2-I L2 (I B ), W2-I L3 (I C ) Disable: Map Pickup LED: th Logical operation of the harmonic blocking can be tested by injection of 5 harmonic current (at 250Hz for 50Hz relay) to cause operation of the blocking signals. Note that injection of any level of 5th harmonic alone on a current input will cause the block to be raised since the harmonic content on this input is 100%, i.e. greater than setting. Fundamental frequency current can be injected into the other winding simultaneously to operate the 87BD or 87HS protection elements if required to test the blocking operation. Care should be taken that the thermal limits of the relay are not exceeded during these tests. More advanced test equipment is required, with the facility to combine harmonic and fundamental frequencies of current, to test the level of the blocking element. Note that the 81HBL5 Setting is set as a fraction of the total current. e.g. 0.25A at 250Hz combined with 1A at 50Hz gives a 5th harmonic content of 0.2 i.e. (0.25/(0.25+1.0)). (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 56 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Section 4: Control & Logic Functions 4.1 Quick Logic If this functionality is used, the logic equations may interfere with testing of other protection functions in the relay. The function of the Quick Logic equations should be tested conjunctively with connected plant or by simulation to assess suitability and check for correct operation on an individual basis with tests specifically devised to suit the particular application. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 57 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 58 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Section 5: Testing and Maintenance 7SR24 relays are maintenance free, with no user serviceable parts. 5.1 Periodic Tests During the life of the relay, it should be checked for operation during the normal maintenance period for the site on which the product is installed. It is recommended the following tests are carried out:1. Visual inspection of the metering display 2. Operation of output contacts 3. Secondary injection of each element 5.2 Maintenance Relay failure will be indicated by the `Protection Healthy' LED being off or flashing. A message may also be displayed on the LCD. In the event of failure Siemens Protection Devices Ltd. (or the nearest Siemens office) should be contacted. The relay should be returned as a complete unit. No attempt should be made to dismantle the unit to isolate and return only the damaged sub-assembly. It may however be convenient to fit the withdrawable relay to the outer case from a spare relay, to avoid the disturbance of relay panel wiring, for return to Siemens Protection Devices Ltd. The withdrawable relay should never be transported without the protection of the outer case. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 59 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 5.3 Troubleshooting Table 5-1 Troubleshooting Guide Observation Action Relay does not power up. Check that the correct auxiliary DC voltage is applied and that the polarity is correct. Relay won't accept the password. The Password being entered is wrong. Enter correct password. If correct password has been forgotten, note down the Numeric Code which is displayed at the Change Password screen e.g. Change password = 1234567 To retrieve the password, communicate this code to a Siemens Protection Devices Ltd. representative. Protection Healthy LED flashes General failure. Contact a Siemens Protection Devices Ltd. representative. LCD screen flashes continuously. The LCD has many possible error messages which when displayed will flash continuously. These indicate various processor card faults. General failure. Contact a Siemens Protection Devices Ltd. representative. Backlight is on but no text can be seen. Adjust the contrast. Scrolling text messages are unreadable. Adjust the contrast. Relay displays one instrument after another with no user intervention. This is normal operation, default instruments are enabled. Remove all instruments from the default list and only add those that are required. (See Section 2: Settings and Instruments). Cannot communicate with the relay. Check that all of the communications settings match those used by ReyDisp Evolution. Check that the Tx and Rx fibre-optic cables are connected correctly. ( Tx -> Rx and Rx -> Tx ). Check that all cables, modems and fibre-optic cables work correctly. Ensure that IEC 60870-5-103 is specified for the connected port (COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4). Relays will not communicate in a ring network. Check that the Data Echo setting on all relays is set to ON. Check that all relays are powered up. Check that all relays have unique addresses. Status inputs do not work. Check that the correct DC voltage is applied and that the polarity is correct. Check that the status input settings such as the pick-up and dropoff timers and the status inversion function are correctly set. Relay instrument displays show small currents or voltages even though the system is dead. This is normal. The relay is displaying calculation noise. This will not affect any accuracy claims for the relay. If the above checklist does not help in correcting the problem please contact the local Siemens office or contact PTD 24hr Customer Support, Tel: +49 180 5247000, Fax: +49 180 524 2471, e-mail: support.energy@siemens.com. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 60 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Section 6: Relay Software Upgrade Instructions 6.1 General Please read thoroughly all of the instructions supplied with the firmware upgrade before starting the download process. * * If you are loading firmware into a product that is already installed on site then follow the instructions in section 2, 3 and 4. Otherwise skip directly to section 3 to load firmware into the device. 6.2 Replacing firmware on a product installed on site 6.2.1 Identify Which Software Is Currently Loaded With the relay connected to a suitable DC supply. Press CANCEL several times to ensure that you are at the root of the menu system. The relay will typically display the relay model name or circuit name. On newer relay models press CANCEL and TEST to bring up the SOFTWARE VERSION menu. While still pressing TEST release the other keys. On older relay models press and hold CANCEL, press and hold TEST, press and hold ENTER then "Build Version --> to view" should appear. While still pressing ENTER release the other keys. Navigate to the software information screen using the TEST/RESET-> button. The following typical information uniquely identifies a particular relay model. (Older relay models may only display a subset of this information). 6.2.2 Overall Software Information Software Art No Build Date Build Time Code CRC Boot Block Art No 6.2.3 This is the application software code used which may common to many relay variants. This is the date when the software was compiled. This is time when the software was compiled. This is the CRC check code of the software code. This is the boot block software code responsible for loading in new application software code. Product Configuration Information Product Art No Product Name Release Date Release Time This is the Products unique configuration article number. This is the Products unique model name. This is the date when this particular configuration was released. This is the time when this particular configuration was released. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 61 of 62 Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 6.2.4 Things To Do Before Loading New Firmware/Software Ensure that a secure copy of relay settings is available as all settings will be lost during the code upload process. A hard copy is useful for checking purposes. It is usually possible to download the existing settings into Reydisp Evolution, save the file and then reload these settings into the relay following the upgrade. Reydisp will highlight any changes that it cannot automatically resolve for you to manually correct when re-installing the settings.. If the relay is in service then it is advisable to remove any TRIP LINKS to prevent in-advertent mal-operation due to incorrect settings being applied. The attachments are password protected self extracting zip files to prevent email systems discarding them or modifying them which should be saved with the "EX" extension renamed to be "EXE". The password that is applied to this zip file is "REYROLLE" in capital letters. 6.2.5 Loading Firmware using front USB port New firmware/software may be loaded via the USB port on the front Fascia. Check compatibility of software before starting the procedure. The relay will not accept firmware/software for which the MLFB ordering code is not supported. Installation instructions are provided with the upgrade firmware and should be studied before the procedure is attempted.. A USB connection between a PC and the relay front port is required. The process may take several minutes to complete at which time the relay will restart. Please make note of any warning or error messages that appear on the Reyfresh terminal window as the relay restarts. 6.2.6 Solving Software Upload Problems The relay will auto detect the download baud rate and will use whatever baud rate set within Reyfresh. However the default and maximum baud rate of 460800 bits/sec is preferred The download procedure requires a PC running Windows XP (Service Pack 3), Windows Vista or Windows 7. When the relay restarts, messages appear on the LCD to confirm the number of I/O modules fitted, please press the ENTER key when requested if the details displayed are correct. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 62 of 62 7SR242 Duobias Multi-Function 2-Winding Transformer Protection Relay Applications Guide Document Release History This document is issue 2017/08. The list of revisions up to and including this issue is: 2017/08 Software revision2662H85001 R8c-7d 2015/11 Text revisions to sections 2.2 and 6.6. Drawing revisions to Fig. 2-4, Fig. 6-7, Fig. 6-8 and Fig. 6-9. References to IEC61869-2 added. 2014/04 Revision to section 6.6 2013/01 Software revision 2662H85001 R7c-7b 2012/08 Addition of optional IEC 61850 communication protocol and Ethernet Interface. 2010/06 Revisions to trip/close circuit supervision diagrams 2010/02 Document reformat due to rebrand 2010/02 Third issue. Software revision 2662H80001 R4c-3 2008/07 Second issue. Software revision 2662H80001R3d-2c. 2008/05 First issue (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 1 of 64 (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 2 of 64 Contents Document Release History .................................................................................................................... 1 Contents .................................................................................................................................................. 3 Section 1: Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 7 Section 2: Protection Functions ........................................................................................................... 9 2.1 Overall Differential Protection (87) ............................................................................................ 9 2.1.1 ICT Settings for Current Magnitude Balance ............................................................. 10 2.1.2 ICT Settings for Vector Group Correction .................................................................. 10 Interposing CT Selection Guide .............................................................................................. 11 2.1.3 Biased Differential (87BD) Settings ........................................................................... 12 2.1.4 Differential Highset (87HS) Settings .......................................................................... 14 2.1.5 Example 1 - New Installation (90MVA Yd11 Transformer) ....................................... 15 Summary of Required Settings ............................................................................................... 17 2.1.6 Example 2 - Relay Replacement (Dyn1 Transformer) Using Existing CTs .............. 22 Summary of Protection Settings ............................................................................................. 24 2.2 Instantaneous OC/EF (50/50G/50N) ...................................................................................... 25 2.3 Time Delayed OC/EF (51/51G/51N) ....................................................................................... 25 2.3.1 Selection of Over-current Characteristics .................................................................. 25 2.3.2 Reset Delay ................................................................................................................ 27 2.4 High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault (64H) ........................................................................ 28 2.4.2 Establishing the Required Stabilising Resistor Value ................................................ 30 2.4.3 Limiting Circuit Over-Voltages (Metrosils).................................................................. 30 2.5 Open Circuit (46BC) ................................................................................................................ 32 2.6 Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent (46NPS) .................................................................. 32 2.7 Undercurrent (37) .................................................................................................................... 32 2.8 Thermal Overload (49) ............................................................................................................ 33 2.8.1 Settings Guidelines .................................................................................................... 33 2.9 Under/Over Voltage (27/59) .................................................................................................... 35 2.10 Neutral Overvoltage (59N) ...................................................................................................... 36 2.10.1 Application with Capacitor Cone Units ....................................................................... 36 2.11 Under/Over Frequency (81) .................................................................................................... 37 2.12 Over Fluxing Protection (24) ................................................................................................... 38 Section 3: CT Requirements ............................................................................................................... 39 3.1 CT Requirement for Differential Protection ............................................................................. 39 3.2 CT Requirements for High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault (64H) ..................................... 40 Section 4: Control Functions .............................................................................................................. 41 4.1 User Defined Logic ................................................................................................................. 41 4.1.1 Auto-Changeover Scheme Example .......................................................................... 41 Section 5: Supervision Functions ...................................................................................................... 43 5.1 Inrush Detector (81HBL2) ....................................................................................................... 43 5.2 Overfluxing Detector (81HBL5) ............................................................................................... 44 5.3 Circuit Breaker Fail (50BF) ..................................................................................................... 45 Example of Required Settings (e.g. HV CB) ........................................................................... 46 5.4 Trip Circuit Supervision (74TCS) ............................................................................................ 47 5.4.1 Trip Circuit Supervision Connections ......................................................................... 47 5.4.2 Close Circuit Supervision Connections ...................................................................... 49 Section 6: Application Considerations and Examples ..................................................................... 51 6.1 The Effects of An In Zone Earthing Transformer .................................................................... 51 6.2 Protection of Star/Star Transformer With Tertiary Winding .................................................... 53 6.3 Transformer with Primary Connections Crossed on Both Windings....................................... 54 (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 3 of 64 6.4 Transformer with Primary Connections Crossed on One Winding ......................................... 56 6.5 Protection of Auto Transformers ............................................................................................. 57 6.6 Reactor, Motor and Connections Protection ........................................................................... 58 Section 7: Common Functions ........................................................................................................... 59 7.1 Multiple Settings Groups ......................................................................................................... 59 7.2 Binary Inputs ........................................................................................................................... 60 7.3 Binary Outputs ........................................................................................................................ 63 7.4 LEDs ....................................................................................................................................... 63 (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 4 of 64 List of Figures Figure 2-1 Procedure for calculating Overall Differential Protection Settings .......................................... 9 Figure 2-2: 87BD Characteristic ............................................................................................................. 12 Fig. 2-3: Differential Highset Characteristic ............................................................................................ 14 Fig. 2-4 New Transformer Application .................................................................................................... 15 Figure 2-5: AC Connections - Example 1 ............................................................................................... 15 Figure 2-6 ICT Settings - Example 1 ..................................................................................................... 16 Figure 2-7: Relay Currents - Star Winding Internal Earth ...................................................................... 18 Figure 2-8: Relay Currents - Star Winding Internal Phase Fault ............................................................ 19 Figure 2-9: Relay Currents - Delta Winding Internal Earth Fault ........................................................... 20 Figure 2-10: Relay Currents - Delta Winding Internal Phase Fault ........................................................ 20 Figure 2-11 Relay Replacement............................................................................................................. 22 Figure 2-12: AC Connections - Example 2 ............................................................................................. 22 Figure 2-13 Summary of ICT Settings .................................................................................................... 23 Figure 2-14 IEC NI Curve with Time Multiplier and Follower DTL Applied ............................................ 26 Figure 2-15 IEC NI Curve with Minimum Operate Time Setting Applied .............................................. 26 Figure 2-16 Overcurrent Reset Characteristics ...................................................................................... 27 Figure 2-17: REF Protection Applied to a Delta/Star Transformer......................................................... 28 Figure 2-18: AC Connections: REF ........................................................................................................ 28 Figure 2-19 Thermal Overload Settings ................................................................................................. 34 Figure 2-20 NVD Application .................................................................................................................. 36 Figure 2-21 NVD Protection Connections .............................................................................................. 36 Figure 2-22 Load Shedding Scheme Using Under-Frequency Elements .............................................. 37 Figure 3-1 CT Requirements .................................................................................................................. 40 Figure 4-1 Example Use of Quick Logic ................................................................................................. 41 Figure 5-1 - Circuit Breaker Fail ............................................................................................................. 45 Figure 5-2 - Single Stage Circuit Breaker Fail Timing ............................................................................ 45 Figure 5-3 - Two Stage Circuit Breaker Fail Timing ............................................................................... 46 Figure 5-4: Trip Circuit Supervision Scheme 1 (H5) ............................................................................ 47 Figure 5-5: Trip Circuit Supervision Scheme 2 (H6) ............................................................................ 48 Figure 5-6: Trip Circuit Supervision Scheme 3 (H7) ............................................................................ 48 Figure 5-7 Close Circuit Supervision Scheme .................................................................................... 49 Figure 6-1: Relay Currents - External Earth Fault with In Zone Earthing Transformer ......................... 51 Figure 6-2: Relay Currents - External Earth Fault with In Zone Earthing Transformer ......................... 52 Figure 6-3 7SR24 Applied to Yd Transformer with an In Zone Earthing Transformer ........................... 52 Figure 6-4: Protection of Star/Star Transformer with Tertiary ................................................................ 53 0 Figure 6-5 - AC Connections: Yd9, 90 Transformer - Non-standard Secondary Connections ....................................................................................................................... 54 0 Fig. 6-6 AC Connections: Yd9, 90 Transformer - Standard Secondary Connections ......................... 55 Fig. 6-7 Dyn11 Transformer with Reverse Phase Notation ................................................................... 56 Fig. 6-8: AC Connections for Auto-Transformer Overall Protection ....................................................... 57 Fig. 6-9: AC Connections for Auto-Transformer Overall and REF Protection ....................................... 57 Fig. 6-10 AC Connections for Reactor and Connections Protection ...................................................... 58 Figure 7-1 Example Use of Alternative Settings Groups .................................................................... 59 Figure 7-2 Example of Transformer Alarm and Trip Wiring ................................................................... 60 Figure 7-3 - Binary Input Configurations Providing Compliance with EATS 48-4 Classes ESI 1 and ESI 2 ................................................................................................................. 62 List of Tables Table 2-1 The Effect of ICT Selection on Protection Settings ................................................................ 21 (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 5 of 64 Nomenclature IF = Fault current corresponding to the rated stability limit (primary Amps) I Fint = Maximum prospective internal fault current (primary Amps) I MAG = Secondary magnetising (exciting) current of current transformer at Vs volts. I NLR = Non-linear resistor (Metrosil) current. Is = Relay setting current P.O.C. = Primary operate current (fault setting) R CT = Resistance of CT secondary winding. RL = Resistance of CT connection leads Rstab = Resistance of stabilising resistor T= Turns ratio of all current transformers (Primary turns / Secondary turns) V Fint = Maximum secondary internal fault voltage Vk = Kneepoint voltage of the CT Vs = Relay circuit setting voltage (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 6 of 64 Section 1: Introduction The 7SR242 relay can be used to provide comprehensive protection for two winding or auto-transformers power transformers. The relay can also be used to provide differential protection for motors and reactors etc. Basic functionality includes overall differential protection and two restricted earth fault (REF) protections i.e. REF protection for each transformer winding. Optional current based and voltage based functionality can be used to provide integrated, comprehensive transformer protection. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 7 of 64 (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 8 of 64 Section 2: Protection Functions This section provides guidance on the application and recommended settings of the 7SR24 protection functions. 2.1 Overall Differential Protection (87) This section covers the transformer overall differential protections - the biased differential and high-set differential elements. Transformer design limitations necessitate that the protection CTs are located on the line side of the HV and LV windings, therefore the zone of differential protection covers both transformer windings. IW1 IW2 W1 W2 The application of differential protection to transformers is complicated by: * The current magnitude change introduced by the transformer HV/LV turns ratio. The current ratio may also be variable due to the presence of an On-Load-Tap-Changer (OLTC). * The transformer connections which may introduce a phase change between the currents flowing into each winding of the transformer. * Magnetising inrush current which flows in only one winding of the transformer when energised. Generally the procedure to calculate relay settings is carried out in the following order: Establish System Parameters Transformer rated power Transformer impedance Transformer rated voltage Winding Connections Transformer OLTC range HV CT ratio LV CT ratio Calculate ICT Settings ICT Multiplier ICT vectors Establish Required Protection Settings 87BD 87HS Calculate Required Relay Settings 87BD Initial 87 Bias Slope 1 Figure 2-1 Procedure for calculating Overall Differential Protection Settings (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 9 of 64 2.1.1 ICT Settings for Current Magnitude Balance Internal current multipliers are used to adjust the CT secondary currents to accommodate for any mismatch between the winding 1 and winding 2 CT ratios. For load or through fault conditions the output of the ICT Multiplier for each winding must be equal, notwithstanding variations in the OLTC position. Where possible the output of each ICT Multiplier is set to 1A at transformer full load rating when the transformer OLTC is on its mid-tap position. At mid-tap a balanced relay should have virtually no differential currents, the bias currents will vary with the load level. Balancing ICT Multiplier outputs (ICT OUT ) to 1A at transformer rating ensures that the relay operates at the levels indicated by its differential protection settings. However achieving balance at ICT OUT = 1 is not always possible; here the effects on settings must be taken into account. The effect of applying ICT OUT < 1 is to de-sensitise current dependent differential settings, applying ICT OUT > 1 makes the effected elements more sensitive. To compensate for the resultant ICT OUT value the following settings must be multiplied by ICT OUT : 87HS Setting 87BD Initial st 87BD 1 Bias Slope Limit See examples in sections 0 and 2.1.6. 2.1.2 ICT Settings for Vector Group Correction Internal interposing current transformers are used to correct the CT secondary current phase relationships in line with any phase change introduced by the transformer connections. As a general rule, the phase angle ICT Connection setting to correct the phase angle difference is applied to the star side winding. A table showing the settings to apply for all standard transformer vector groups is included on the following page. The table assumes that all line CTs are `star' connected. Note that the choice of interposing CT vector group will modify the effective operating levels of the protection due to the current distribution for the various fault conditions - the effects on settings must be taken into account - see section 2.1.5.1. Settings examples included in section 6 cover selected non-standard connection arrangements e.g. where the primary connections within the protected zone are crossed. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 10 of 64 Interposing CT Selection Guide Power Transformer Vector Group HV Interposing CT Selection LV Interposing CT Selection Yy0, YNy0, Yyn0, YNyn0, Ydy0, Yndy0, Ydyn0, Yndyn0, Dz0 Ydy0,0 Ydy0,0 Yd1, YNd1 Yd1,-30 Yy0,0 Yd1, YNd1 + Earthing Transformer Yd1,-30 Ydy0,0 Yy2, YNy2, Yyn2 YNyn2, Ydy2, YNdy2, Ydyn2, Yndyn2, Dz2 Ydy2,-60 Ydy0,0 Yd3, YNd3 Yd3,-90 Yy0,0 Yd3, YNd3 + Earthing Transformer Yd3,-90 Ydy0,0 Yy4, YNy4, Yyn4, YNyn4, Ydy4, YNdy4, Ydyn4, Yndyn4, Dz4 Ydy4,-120 Ydy0,0 Yd5, YNd5 Yd5,-150 Yy0,0 Yd5, YNd5 + Earthing Transformer Yd5,-150 Ydy0,0 Yy6, YNy6, Yyn6, YNyn6, Ydy6, YNdy6, Ydyn6, Yndyn6, Dz6 Ydy6,180 Ydy0,0 Yd7, YNd7 Yd7,150 Yy0,0 Yd7, YNd7 + Earthing Transformer Yd7,150 Ydy0,0 Yy8, YNy8, Yyn8, YNyn8, Ydy8, YNdy8, Ydyn8, Yndyn8, Dz8 Ydy8,120 Ydy0,0 Yd9, YNd9 Yd9,90 Yy0,0 Yd9, YNd9 + Earthing Transformer Yd9,90 Ydy0,0 Yy10, Yny10, Yyn10, YNyn10, Ydy10, YNdy10, Ydyn10, Yndyn10, Dz10 Ydy10,60 Ydy0,0 Yd11, Ynd11 Yd11,30 Yy0,0 Yd11, Ynd11 + Earthing Transformer Yd11,30 Ydy0,0 Dy1, Dyn1 Yy0,0 Yd11,30 Dy1, Dyn1 + Earthing Transformer Ydy0,0 Yd11,30 Dy3, Dyn3 Yy0,0 Yd9,90 Dy3, Dyn3 + Earthing Transformer Ydy0,0 Yd9,90 Dy5, Dyn5 Yy0,0 Yd7,150 Dy5, Dyn5 + Earthing Transformer Ydy0,0 Yd7,150 Dy7, Dyn7 Yy0,0 Yd5,-150 Dy7, Dyn7 + Earthing Transformer Ydy0,0 Yd5,-150 Dy9, Dyn9 Yy0,0 Yd3,-90 Dy9, Dyn9 + Earthing Transformer Ydy0,0 Yd3,-90 Dy11, Dyn11 Yy0,0 Yd1,-30 Dy11, Dyn11 + Earthing Transformer Ydy0,0 Yd1,-30 1. Y or y denotes an unearthed star connection on the HV or LV side of the transformer. 2. YN or yn denotes an earthed star connection on the HV or LV side of the transformer. 3. D or d denotes a delta connection on the HV or LV side of the transformer respectively. 4. Z or z denotes a zigzag connection of the HV or LV side of the transformer respectively (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 11 of 64 2.1.3 Biased Differential (87BD) Settings The 87BD elements provide differential protection for phase and earth faults. The limiting factors for protection sensitivity are dictated by the need to ensure protection stability during load or through fault conditions. Magnitude restraint bias is used to ensure the relay is stable when the transformer is carrying load current and during the passage of external (out of zone) fault current. As the bias current increases the differential current required for operation increases. Harmonic bias is used to prevent relay operation during magnetising inrush current into one winding when the transformer is first energised. Slo pe IW2 ias IW1 + IW2 2nd B Operate Current IW1 D 87B 87BD Initial Setting st ias 1 B 2nd Bias Slope Type e Slop Bias (Restraint) Current IW1 + IW2 2 1st Bias Slope Limit Figure 2-2: 87BD Characteristic 87BD Initial Setting (0.1 to 2.0 x In) This setting is selected to ensure stability in the presence of CT and relay errors when low levels of bias current are present i.e. low load levels. This is the minimum level of differential current at which the relay will operate. Typically this setting is chosen to match the on load tap-change range. For example if the tap change range is +10% to -20%, a setting of 0.3In is selected. st 87BD 1 Bias Slope Setting (0.0 to 0.7) Steady state unbalance current will appear in the differential (operate) circuit of the relay due to the transformer tap position, relay tolerance and to CT measurement errors. The differential current will increase with increasing load or through fault current in the transformer so, to ensure stability, the differential current required for operation increases with increasing bias current. The bias slope expresses the current to operate the relay relative to the biasing (restraint) current. The Bias slope setting chosen must be greater than the maximum unbalance, it is selected to ensure stability when through fault or heavy load current flows in the transformer and the tap changer is in its extreme position. The recommended setting is 1 x the tap change range. As the protection is optimised around the centre tap position then using the total tap change range includes for a 100% safety margin, this provides contingency for CT and relay tolerances. For example if the tap change range is +10 to -20%, the overall range is 30% so a 0.3x setting is chosen. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 12 of 64 st 87BD 1 Bias Slope Limit Setting (1 to 20 x In) Above this setting the ratio of differential current to bias current required for operation is increased. When a through fault occurs, saturation of one or more CTs may cause a transient differential current to be detected by the relay. The bias slope limit is chosen to ensure the biased differential function is stable for high through fault currents coincident with CT saturation. This setting defines the upper limit of the bias slope and is expressed in multiples of nominal rated current i.e. the lower the setting the more stable the protection. The three phase through fault current can be estimated from the transformer impedance. For a typical grid transformer having a 15% impedance, the maximum through fault will be 1/0.15 = 6.66 x rating. A setting value is chosen that introduces the extra bias at half of the three phase through fault current level of the transformer, so 6.66/2 = 3.33 and a setting of 3 would be selected as the nearest lower setting available. nd Bias Slope Type (Line, Curve) nd Bias Slope Setting (1.0 to 2.0 - applied to `Line' only) 87BD 2 87BD 2 These settings are chosen to ensure the biased differential function is stable for high through fault currents coincident with CT saturation. 87BD Inrush Action Harmonic bias is used to prevent relay operation during magnetising inrush current into one winding when the transformer is first energised. The recommended setting is ENABLED - see section 5.1. 87BD Overfluxing Action This setting can be used to prevent operation of the 87BD elements in the presence of allowable over-fluxing conditions - see section 5.2. 87BD Time Delay Setting A 5ms setting is recommended where the circuit is cabled to ensure stability during resonant conditions. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 13 of 64 2.1.4 Differential Highset (87HS) Settings The element operates on the differential current measured by the relay. The 87HS element is generally applied as an unrestrained differential element to provide fast tripping for heavy internal faults. IW1 IW2 87HS Setting Operate Time W1 W2 87HS 87HS Delay Operate Current IW1 + IW2 Fig. 2-3: Differential Highset Characteristic 87HS Setting (1 to 30 x In) The 87HS element is set as low as possible but not less than the maximum three phase through fault current and not less than half the peak magnetizing inrush current. For almost all applications a setting of 7 or 8 x In has shown to be sufficiently sensitive for internal faults as well as providing stability during external faults and transient system conditions. A Differential Highset Setting of 7 x In will be stable for a peak magnetizing inrush levels of 14 x rated current. Smaller transformers generally will have lower impedance and therefore greater three phase through fault levels and magnetizing inrush currents. A setting of 8 x can be used as CT saturation is reduced as system X/R is usually very low and the peak level of magnetising current does not usually ever exceed 16 x rating. 87HS Delay Setting A 5ms setting is recommended to compensate for transient overreach. 87HS Inrush Action 87HS Overfluxing Action These functions are set to `Disabled' unless specifically required by the application. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 14 of 64 2.1.5 Example 1 - New Installation (90MVA Yd11 Transformer) Y d TP1 +10% Turns TP11 90MVA, Z = 14%, Yd11, 132/33kV +10% to -20% (turns) TP31 -20% Turns HV LV Tap Changer Connections a A b C B c Fig. 2-4 New Transformer Application W1/W2 Yd11 (30o) 1 A 2 W1 IL1 2 6 6 5 W1 IL2 9 RSTAB 10 14 IG1 5 W2 IL2 W1 IL3 13 B 1 W2 IL1 10 9 W2 IL3 18 A 17 IG2 NLR NOTES CTs shown wired to 1A relay inputs REF protection shown on Star winding RSTAB = REF Series Stabilising resistor NLR = REF Non-linear (voltage limiting) resistor Figure 2-5: AC Connections - Example 1 (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 15 of 64 Step 1 - Selection of Line CT Ratios CTs with a secondary rating of 1A are preferred as the burden imposed on the CT by the secondary wiring is reduced in comparison with a 5A rated secondary. HV load current = LV load current = 90 x 10 6 3 x 132,000 = 393.6A 90 x 10 6 3 x 33,000 x 1.05 CT ratio = 400/1A is selected. = 1500A CT ratio = 1600/1A is selected. Note, the 1.05 factor relates to the tap changer at mid-tap position. Step 2 - Selection of ICT Multiplier Settings The outputs of the interposing CTs (ICT OUT ) must be balanced for system healthy conditions - where possible the balance is set at 1.00A at transformer rated current/mid-tap position. HV Secondary current = 393.6 = 0.98A 400 HV ICT Multiplier = 1/0.98 = 1.02 LV Secondary current = 1500 = 0.94A 1600 LV ICT Multiplier = 1/0.94 = 1.06 90MVA, Z = 14%, Yd11, 132/33kV +10% to -20% (At mid-tap 132/34.65kV) 400/1 393.6A Y 1500A d 1600/1 0.98A W1: 1A 0.94A W2: 1A Terminals 0.94 0.98 X1.02 X1.06 ICT Multiplier 1.00 1.00 Yd11 Yy0 ICT Connection W2 Bias W1 Bias W1 ICTOUT = 1.00 Operate W2 ICTOUT = 1.00 Figure 2-6 ICT Settings - Example 1 (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 16 of 64 Summary of Required Settings CT/VT CONFIG > W1 Phase Input W1 Phase CT Ratio W2 Phase Input W2 Phase CT Ratio 1A 400:1 1A 1600:1 FUNCTION CONFIG> Gn Differential Gn Inrush Detector Enabled Enabled DIFFERENTIAL PROT'N > Gn W1 ICT Multiplier 1.02 Gn W1 ICT Connection Yd11 Gn W2 ICT Multiplier 1.06 Gn W2 ICT Connection Yy0 (Note that the above settings produce ICT OUT = 1.00) DIFFERENTIAL PROT'N > 87BD > Gn 87 BD Element Gn 87BD Initial: Gn 87BD 1st Bias Slope: Gn 87BD 1st Bias Slope Limit: Gn 87BD 2nd Bias Slope Type: Gn 87BD 2nd Bias Slope: Gn 87BD Delay: Gn 87BD Inrush Action: Gn 87BD Overfluxing Action: Enabled 0.3 x In 0.3x 4 x In Line 1.5x 0.005s Inhibit Off DIFFERENTIAL PROT'N > 87HS > Gn 87HS Element Gn 87HS Setting: Gn 87HS Delay: Gn 87HS Inrush Action: Gn 87HS Overfluxing Action: Enabled 8 x In 0.005s Off Off SUPERVISION > INRUSH DETECTOR > Gn81HBL2 Element Gn 81HBL2 Bias Gn 81HBL2 Setting Enabled Cross 0.2 x I OUTPUT CONFIG>OUTPUT MATRIX> 87BD 87HS BOn, Ln BOn, Ln (0.3 x ICT OUT ) (OLTC = +10% to -20%) (1/0.14 x 0.5 = 3.6 x ICT OUT ) (Default value) (Default value) (> I 3PH THRU FAULT i.e. 1/0.14 = 7.14 x ICT OUT ) (Default value) (Default value) OUTPUT CONFIG>BINARY OUTPUT CONFIG> CB1 Trip Contacts BOn CB2 Trip Contacts BOn (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 17 of 64 2.1.5.1 Example 1 - Further Analysis Having established settings to ensure stability under load, transient and external fault conditions the following considers the operating levels for internal faults. The `fault setting' for internal fault conditions is affected by the ICT Multiplier and ICT Connection settings applied: W1 Internal Earth Fault Yd11 (30o) A-E Fault 1.00 1.00 x 1.02 1.02 x 1.06 ICT Connection Yy0 (0o) Yd11 (30o) 1.02 ICT Multiplier 0.589 0.589 B A B C B O O O O 87T 87HS Figure 2-7: Relay Currents - Star Winding Internal Earth Notes A- E fault causes current to flow in the A and C elements The Yd ICT connection reduces current flow by a factor of 1/3 Relay may indicate A and C faults (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 18 of 64 W1 Internal Phase-Phase Fault Yd11 (30o) B-C Fault 1 1 1.00 1.00 ICT Multiplier 1.02 1.02 ICT Connection x 1.06 Yy0 (0o) Yd11 (30o) x 1.02 0.589 1.178 0.589 B B A B C B 87T 87HS O O O O O O Figure 2-8: Relay Currents - Star Winding Internal Phase Fault Notes B - C fault causes current to flow in the A, B and C elements The Yd ICT connection causes a 1:2:1 current distribution and introduces a 1/3 multiplying factor. Relay may indicate three phase fault (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 19 of 64 W2 Internal Earth Fault A-E Fault Yd11 (30o) 1.00 x 1.02 1.00 x 1.06 ICT Multiplier 1.07 1.07 Yy0 (0o) Yd11 (30o) ICT Connection A B 1.07 B C O 87T 87HS O 1.07 Figure 2-9: Relay Currents - Delta Winding Internal Earth Fault W2 Internal Phase-Phase Fault B-C Fault Yd11 (30o) 1.00 1.00 x 1.02 x 1.06 ICT Multiplier 1.07 1.07 Yy0 (0o) Yd11 (30o) ICT Connection A B B C 87T 87HS B 1.07 1.07 O O O O Figure 2-10: Relay Currents - Delta Winding Internal Phase Fault (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 20 of 64 Table 2-1 summarises the implications of using Yd or Yy interposing CTs. Table 2-1 The Effect of ICT Selection on Protection Settings CT HV LV Secondary ( ICT: Yd11, x 1.02) ( ICT: Yy0, x 1.06) Current W1 ICT OUT = W2 ICT OUT = 3-Phase A = 1A A = 1.02A A = 1.06A B = 1A B = 1.02A B = 1.06A C = 1A C = 1.02A C = 1.06A A=0 A = 0.589A A=0 B = 1A B = 1.178A B = 1.06A C = 1A C = 0.589A C = 1.06A A = 1A A = 0.589A A = 1.06A B=0 B=0 B=0 C=0 C = 0.589A C=0 B-C A-E The above analysis covers current distributions for internal faults. The table illustrates that the Yd ICT has the effect of: Modifying the amplitude of the ICT OUT currents Changing current distribution The above factors must be considered during any analysis of protection operations and indications. A similar analysis can be carried for external (through) fault conditions. However as the protection settings already ensured stability for the maximum through fault condition (3-phase fault) this is not necessary. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 21 of 64 2.1.6 Example 2 - Relay Replacement (Dyn1 Transformer) Using Existing CTs 45MVA, Z = 10%, Dyn1, 132/33kV +5% to -15% 300/1A 560/0.577A D y Figure 2-11 Relay Replacement It is recommended to wire all line CTs in star when connecting to the 7SR24 relay. Where the 7SR24 is used to replace an older biased differential relay the existing CTs will often be re-used. In this example it is recommended that the existing LV line CTs connected in `delta' are reconnected as `star'. Usually the interposing CTs associated with older schemes can be removed as both the vector group and current magnitude compensation functions are carried out within the 7SR24. This requires ICT settings to be programmed into the relay to correct for differences before the currents are applied to the differential algorithm. When the relay is in balance the phase angle of the currents applied to each phase of the differential algorithm will be in anti-phase. Dyn1 1 A 2 W1 IL1 2 6 6 5 W1 IL2 9 5 W2 IL2 10 W1 IL3 13 B 1 W2 IL1 14 IG1 10 9 W2 IL3 18 A 17 IG2 NOTES CTs shown wired to 1A relay inputs REF protection shown on Star winding Figure 2-12: AC Connections - Example 2 (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 22 of 64 Step 1 - Connection of CTs Remove all interposing CTs from the secondary circuit. Connect all line CT secondary wiring in star. HV load current = LV load current = 45 x 10 6 3 x 132,000 45 x 10 6 3 x 33,000 = 196.8A Re-use 300/1A CTs. x 0.95 = 747.9A Re-use 560/0.577A CTs. Step 2 - Selection of Interposing CT Multiplier Settings HV Secondary current = 196.8 = 0.66A 300 HV ICT Multiplier = 1/0.66 = 1.54 LV Secondary current = 747.9 = 0.77 A 560 / 0.577 LV ICT Multiplier = 1/0.77 = 1.30 45MVA, Z = 10%, Dyn1, 132/33kV +5% to -15% 300/1 196.8A D y 747.9A 560/0.577A 0.66A W1: 1A 0.77A W2: 1A Terminals 0.77 0.66 X1.54 X1.30 ICT Multiplier 1.00 1.00 Yy0 Yd11 ICT Connection W2 Bias W1 Bias ICTOUT = 1.00 Operate Figure 2-13 Summary of ICT Settings (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 23 of 64 Summary of Protection Settings CT/VT CONFIG > W1 Phase Input W1 Phase CT Ratio W2 Phase Input W2 Phase CT Ratio 1A 300:1 1A 560:0.58 FUNCTION CONFIG> Gn Differential Gn Inrush Detector Enabled Enabled DIFFERENTIAL PROT'N > Gn W1 ICT Multiplier 1.54 Gn W1 ICT Connection Yy0 Gn W2 ICT Multiplier 1.30 Gn W2 ICT Connection Yd11 (Note that the above settings produce ICT OUT = 1.00) DIFFERENTIAL PROT'N > 87BD > Gn 87 BD Element Gn 87BD Initial: Gn 87BD 1st Bias Slope: Gn 87BD 1st Bias Slope Limit: Gn 87BD 2nd Bias Slope Type: Gn 87BD 2nd Bias Slope: Gn 87BD Delay: Gn 87BD Inrush Action: Gn 87BD Overfluxing Action: Enabled 0.2 x In 0.2x 5 x In Line 1.5x 0.005s Inhibit Off DIFFERENTIAL PROT'N > 87HS > Gn 87 HS Element Gn 87HS Setting: Gn 87HS Delay: Gn 87HS Inrush Action: Gn 87HS Overfluxing Action: Enabled 10 x In 0.005s Off Off SUPERVISION > INRUSH DETECTOR > Gn 81HBL2 Element Gn 81HBL2 Bias Gn 81HBL2 Setting Enabled Cross 0.2 x I OUTPUT CONFIG>OUTPUT MATRIX> 87BD 87HS BOn, Ln BOn, Ln (0.2 x ICT OUT ) (OLTC = +5% to -15%) (1/0.1 x 0.5 = 5 x ICT OUT ) (Default value) (Default value) (> I 3PH THRU FAULT i.e. 1/0.1 = 10 x ICT OUT ) (Default value) (Default value) OUTPUT CONFIG>BINARY OUTPUT CONFIG> CB1 Trip Contacts BOn CB2 Trip Contacts BOn (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 24 of 64 2.2 Instantaneous OC/EF (50/50G/50N) Instantaneous overcurrent can be applied to protect the HV terminals against high fault currents. The current setting applied must be above the maximum 3-phase through fault level of the transformer to ensure grading with the LV overcurrent protection. Where the setting applied is below the magnetising inrush current of the transformer then inrush blocking (81HBL2) should be enabled. A sensitive instantaneous HV earth fault setting can be considered where the transformer winding connections do not allow the through flow of zero sequence current. Time delayed (DTL) operation can also be considered where the transformer switch on magnetising inrush current may cause mal-operation. This will be identified during commissioning. An increased operate current or high impedance operation can also be considered. 2.3 Time Delayed OC/EF (51/51G/51N) The time delayed element can provide a number of shaped characteristics. The selectable Inverse definite minimum time lag (IDMTL) and Definite Time Lag (DTL) characteristics provide protection for phase and earth faults. As these protections are used as back-up protections discrete relays are often installed. To reduce cost and complexity it may be considered acceptable to implement the backup protection using elements within the main protection relay. The relay is self supervised and this can be used as justification for allowing the backup protection to be included as part of the main differential protection relay. The following elements can be included: * Three phase over current with IDMTL (IEC or ANSI) or DTL operate characteristic (51) * Derived earth fault with IDMTL (IEC or ANSI) or DTL operate characteristic (51N) * Measured earth fault with IDMTL (IEC or ANSI) or DTL operate characteristic (51G) Each of the above elements can be selected to winding 1 or winding 2 CT inputs. The time delayed characteristics are used to provide grading with other relays or fuses. Earth fault elements can be used to provide system protection or standby earth fault protection of an earthing resistor. 2.3.1 Selection of Over-current Characteristics Where the relay operate time must be co-ordinated with other time delayed relays on the system, the operating characteristic is selected to be the same type as the other relays. Often a normally inverse (NI) characteristic is applied, however extremely inverse curves (EI) can provide improved grading with fuses or moulded case circuit breakers. To optimise the grading capability of the relay additional time multiplier, `Follower DTL' (Figure 2-14) or `Minimum Operate Time' (Figure 2-15) settings can be applied. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 25 of 64 1000.00 1000.00 100.00 100.00 10.00 Operating Time (Seconds) Operating Time (Seconds) 10.00 Time Multiplier = 1 Follower DTL 1.00 1.00 Increasing Time Multiplier 0.10 0.10 0.01 0.01 1 100 10 1 1000 10 100 1000 Current (x Is) Current (x Is) Figure 2-14 IEC NI Curve with Time Multiplier and Follower DTL Applied 1000.00 OPERATE ZONE 100.00 Operating Time (Seconds) 10.00 Min Operate Time = 4sec IEC NI Curve: TM = 1 1.00 0.10 0.01 1 10 100 1000 Current (x Is) Figure 2-15 IEC NI Curve with Minimum Operate Time Setting Applied (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 26 of 64 2.3.2 Reset Delay Faults in plastic insulated cables or compound-filled joint boxes can be intermittent or `flashing' faults - the insulant melts and temporarily reseals the fault for a short time after which the insulation fails again. The repeating process of the fault often causes electromechanical disc relays to "ratchet" up and eventually trip the faulty circuit if the reset time of the relay was longer than the time between successive flashes. To ensure time grading is maintained with other relays on the system a DTL or shaped (ANSI only) reset characteristic can be selected for all overcurrent and earth fault elements. Where the substation feeds an outgoing overhead line network, particularly where reclosers are installed, instantaneous resetting is desirable to ensure that, on multiple shot reclosing schemes, correct grading between the substation incomer relays and the relays associated with the reclosers is maintained. R3 R1 R2 FAULT Clashing conductors or re-sealing cable (Instantaneous. Reset TRIP % of Algorithm Disc Travel Electro-mechanical Relay DTL Reset TRIP Time Time Figure 2-16 Overcurrent Reset Characteristics (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 27 of 64 2.4 High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault (64H) Restricted earth fault (REF) protection can be applied to either or both windings of the transformer. The 7SR24 provides a high impedance REF (64H) element for each transformer winding. Low leakage reactance CTs (Class PX) are required for use with high impedance protection systems. REF REF Figure 2-17: REF Protection Applied to a Delta/Star Transformer The zone of REF protection is defined by the position of the CTs and/or the transformer winding. REF protection provides a low operate current (fault setting) for in zone earth faults and stability during external faults. REF is more sensitive than overall biased differential protection (87BD) to earth faults it can protect against faults for a greater portion of the transformer windings or where the impedance in the earth fault path is relatively high. For a solidly earthed star winding, the REF function is roughly twice as sensitive in detecting a winding earth fault, than biased differential protection. The stability of high impedance REF schemes depends upon the operate voltage setting being greater than the voltage which can appear across the element during the maximum assigned through fault conditions. To provide the required operating voltage an external `stabilising' resistor is wired in series with the 64H current measuring input. A non-linear resistor is connected in parallel to protect the relay circuit against high over-voltages. REF connections are shown in Figure 2-18. Dy11 (30o) Note: CTs shown wired to 1A relay inputs 7SR24 1 A 2 W1 IL1 2 6 6 5 W1 IL2 9 10 13 14 IG1 5 W2 IL2 W1 IL3 Stabilising Resistor B 1 W2 IL1 10 9 W2 IL3 A 18 17 IG2 Stabilising Resistor Non-Linear Resistor Non-Linear Resistor Figure 2-18: AC Connections: REF The operating voltage of the relay/stabilising resistor combination is calculated taking into account: the r.m.s. value of the symmetrical component of the transformer through fault current The relay current setting is calculated taking into account: the required operate level for in-zone earth faults (fault setting). (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 28 of 64 2.4.1.1 Stability Requirement The use of class PX CTs (IEC61869-2) ensures steady state CT errors are minimised. Transient CT errors are caused by CT saturation e.g. due to high currents flowing at times of through faults. Where CT saturation conditions are different in each CT this will cause differential current to flow in the CT secondary circuit wiring. The highest level of differential current will flow when one set of CTs is fully saturated, providing zero output and all other CTs transform normally. When fully saturated the CT secondary provides no current and it behaves as a resistance in the secondary circuit. Differential current in the secondary circuit will flow either through this `resistance' or through the relay. A `stabilising' resistance is added in series with the relay input to ensured that the operate voltage at the current setting is greater than the maximum voltage which can appear across the element/stabilising resistor during the maximum assigned through fault conditions. It is assumed that any earthing resistor can become short-circuit. This maximum voltage that can appear across the relay circuit can be determined by a simple calculation which makes the following assumptions: One current transformer is fully saturated making its excitation current negligible. The remaining current transformers maintain their ratio. The resistance of the secondary winding of the saturated CT together with the leads connecting it to the relay circuit terminals constitute the only burden in parallel with the relay. The minimum required relay operate voltage setting (Vs) is given by: VS IF (RCT + RL ) x T (1) To ensure high speed relay operation the relay circuit operating voltage should be selected in accordance with the stability requirement above (equation 1), also, the operate voltage should not exceed 0.5 x CT knee point voltage (Vk). VS 2.4.1.2 VK 2 (2) Operation Requirement For internal faults the relay will operate at the calculated `Voltage Setting' Vs. This operating voltage will also be applied across the CT secondary windings of all the CT secondaries connected in parallel with the relay. This voltage will drive a magnetising current in each of the CT secondary windings and this must be added to the relay operate current when calculating the operate current of the high impedance protection scheme. In general: 2.4.1.3 P.O.C. = (I S + I NLR + I MAG )/T (3) Consideration of Component Thermal Ratings When the relay circuit operates for an internal fault the circuit breakers are opened and the flow of fault current ceases. Where a CB fails to trip then fault current will flow in the high impedance circuit until the fault is cleared by the operation of CB failure or back up protection. The thermal rating of the relay circuit components should then be considered. Alternatively the high impedance circuit can be arranged to short circuit the external components after operation. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 29 of 64 2.4.2 Establishing the Required Stabilising Resistor Value The relay burden need not be considered as it is effectively negligible relative to the burden of the stabilising resistor. The setting (operate) voltage (Vs) across the Relay and Stabilising Resistor at the Relay operating current (Is): R STAB = VS IS (4) Stabilising Resistor power rating must: Be sufficient for continuous operation at the circuit operate voltage (Vs): PCONT (Is)2 x Rstab Short time rated to withstand I Fint for the maximum fault clearance time. For a failed circuit breaker condition the back up protection clearance time is considered - typically a one second rating is sufficient. P1SEC VFint 2 Rstab Where: VFint 4 (VK 3 x Rstab x IFint) x 1.3 Where I Fint is not known, the breaking capacity current of the Circuit Breaker can be used. 2.4.3 Limiting Circuit Over-Voltages (Metrosils) Non-linear resistors are connected in parallel with the relay circuit to limit the peak voltage developed across the high impedance components during internal faults to a `safe' level below 3kV peak. Where a Metrosil is not connected in circuit the peak voltage can be calculated from: VPk = 2 x 2 x VK x ((IFint x Rstab ) - VK) Notwithstanding the above calculation SPDL recommend that a Metrosil is always fitted in the high impedance relay circuit The use of non-linear resistors manufactured by Metrosil is recommended. The operate characteristic is defined by:- Voltage characteristic: V = C .I For dc or instantaneous values. 1 Vrms 2 Irms = 0.52 C Vpeak = 1.09C ( Irms) For applied sinusoidal voltages For applied sinusoidal currents Where: C and are Metrosil constants When supplied as discrete components 7XG14 Metrosils can be specified as single or three phase, with a diameter of 75mm or 150mm and have constant `C' values of 450, 900 or 1000. Metrosils of diameter 75mm have a thermal rating of 8kJ. Where a higher thermal rating is required Metrosils of 150mm diameter should be used. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 30 of 64 The chosen Metrosil `C' value must; 1) Ensure negligible current flows through the Metrosil at relay operate voltage (Vs), and, 2) Limit over-voltages for operational and safety reasons i.e. 1.09C (I Fint ) < 3kV A `C' value of 450 is generally acceptable where the relay operate voltage is less than 100V, a `C' value of 1000 is recommended for settings above 100V. Metrosil short time power rating must; Be sufficient to dissipate the heat created by the flow of maximum secondary internal fault current. The Metrosil is chosen so that it can withstand I Fint for the maximum fault clearance time. For a failed circuit breaker condition the back up protection clearance time must be considered - typically a one second rating is sufficient. P 1SEC 4 x I F x T x VK (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 31 of 64 2.5 Open Circuit (46BC) Used to detect an open circuit condition e.g. an OLTC failure. There will be little or no fault current and so the differential protection elements will not detect the condition. However the condition can be detected because there will be a high content of NPS (unbalance) current present. An NPS / PPS ratio > 50% will result from an open circuit condition. A time delay can be applied to prevent operation for transitory effects. 2.6 Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent (46NPS) The Negative Phase Sequence (NPS) over current is intended to be used to detect uncleared system faults and conditions such as broken primary connections that may produce significant NPS current. This unbalance may cause rotating plant such as generators or motors to overheat and fail. This may also be used to monitor the state of the tap changer and alarm for faults with diverter resistors or switches. Typical Settings are 5 to 10% for Tap Changer alarm and 10 to 15% for system fault or broken conductor. 2.7 Undercurrent (37) Where current decreases beneath defined levels this can indicate low load or CB open conditions, it can also be used to indicate that no current is flowing. The undercurrent function is used: As a fault current check i.e. that no fault current continues to flow and that an auto-isolation sequence may safely be initiated. As a check that a CB has opened - this can be used in addition to or in place of CB auxiliary switch indications. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 32 of 64 2.8 Thermal Overload (49) Thermal protection is provided to supplement the Winding Temperature device. This function provides a general overload thermal protection i.e. not a winding hot spot protection. Outputs can be assigned to both alarm and trip levels. The default settings are recommended if transformer data is not available, these settings correspond to the lowest level of thermal withstand for an oil filled transformer. Transformer overloading can result in:* Reduced transformer life expectancy. * Lower insulation voltage withstand due to degradation of the insulation. * Increased mechanical stress due to expansion. * Gas bubble production in the mineral oil at extreme levels of overload. 2.8.1 Settings Guidelines 49 Overload Setting The 49 Overload Setting is expressed as a multiple of the relay nominal current and is equivalent to the factor k.I B as defined in the IEC255-8 thermal operating characteristics. It is the value of current above which 100% of thermal capacity will be reached after a period of time. This setting should be set to 110% of the secondary current flowing when the transformer is at its full rating and on its minimum voltage tap position. 49 Time Constant Setting A transformer may be required to temporarily run overloaded e.g. 150% of rating for two hours or 200% of rating for one hour. The thermal time constants required to match these specifications are: 150% for two hours Time constant = 178 minutes 200% for one hour Time constant = 186 minutes These times are applicable to an overload occurring from no load with the transformer at ambient temperature. The actual tripping time will depend on the loading level prior to the overload occurring. The operate time can be calculated from: Time to trip I2 t(mins) = x ln 2 2 I - (I) The steady state % thermal capacity used can be calculated from: I2 % thermal capacity used = 2 x 100 (I) Where: I = applied current in terms of x I n I = thermal pick-up setting x I n (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 33 of 64 49 Capacity Alarm Setting This setting can be used to provide an alarm prior to a thermal trip occurring and is typically set to about 80 to 90 % of thermal capacity. The thermal capacity alarm can be mapped to a binary output wired to the control system. Example 45MVA, Z = 10%, Dyn1, 132/33kV +5% to -15% 300/1A D y Figure 2-19 Thermal Overload Settings 1. In fig. 2-19 the direction of power flow is HV to LV. If W1 input is connected to HV CTs (as is usual) then set 49 Select = W1. The transformer loss current and harmonic currents are then included in the thermal calculation. 2. FUNCTION CONFIG>Gn Thermal: Enabled CURRENT PROT'N>THERMAL>Gn49 Thermal Overload: Enabled. 3. CURRENT PROT'N>THERMAL>49 Overload Setting: Maximum Primary Full Load current = 45000 3 x 132 x 0.85 = 231.5 A Secondary Current = 231.5A/300 = 0.772A. The thermal function should not trip for currents below this value. A setting of 110% is used to include a margin of safety. Therefore 49 Overload Setting = 0.85 x I n (I ) (1.10 x 0.772) 4. The time constant to apply will depend upon the transformer overload specification, but in this case it was decided to set a time constant of 178 minutes. This will allow an overload of 150% from ambient for about two hours before a trip is issued. 5. The capacity alarm is a useful function and therefore it is set to 90%. The current required to reach this 90% figure should be calculated. It is important not to alarm for current within the normal loading range of the transformer. 2 2 The steady state thermal capacity = I / I x 100% 2 2 For this example: 90% = I / I x 100%. I = 0.806 x I n and this level is above the maximum full load current of 0.772 x I n . The above provides guidelines only as setting philosophies differ. Alternative protection setting groups may be used to match transformer loading for temporary or emergency overloads, wide variations in winter/summer loading or if a cooling failure (pump or fan) occurs. The thermal settings applied will differ in each Setting Group and will be made appropriate to the specific load conditions. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 34 of 64 2.9 Under/Over Voltage (27/59) Power system under-voltages may occur due to: System faults. An increase in system loading, Non-energized power system e.g. loss of an incoming transformer During normal system operating conditions regulating equipment such as transformer On Load Tap Changers (OLTC) and generator Automatic Voltage Regulators (AVR) ensure that the system runs within acceptable voltage limits. 7SR24 under-voltage/DTL elements can be used to detect abnormal under-voltage conditions due to system overloads. Binary outputs can be used to trip non-essential loads - returning the system back to its normal operating levels. This `load shedding' should be initiated via time delay elements so avoiding operation during transient disturbances. An under voltage scheme (or a combined under frequency/under voltage scheme) can provide faster tripping of non-essential loads than under-frequency load shedding so minimising the possibility of system instability. Where a transformer is supplying 3-phase motors a significant voltage drop e.g. to below 80% may cause the motors to stall. An under-voltage element can be set to trip motor circuits when the voltage falls below a preset value so that on restoration of supply an overload is not caused by the simultaneous starting of all the motors. A time delay is required to ensure voltage dips due to remote system faults do not result in an unnecessary disconnection of motors. To confirm presence/loss of supply, the voltage elements should be set to values safely above/below that where a normal system voltage excursion can be expected. The switchgear/plant design should be considered. The `Dead' level may be very near to the `live' level or may be significantly below it. The variable hysteresis setting allows the relay to be used with all types of switchgear. System over-voltages can damage component insulation. Excessive voltage may occur for: Sudden loss of load A tap changer run-away condition occurs in the high voltage direction, Generator AVR equipment malfunctions or Reactive compensation control malfunctions. System regulating equipment such as transformer tap changers and generator AVRs may correct the overvoltage - unless this equipment mal-functions. The 7SR24 overvoltage/DTL elements can be used to protect against damage caused by system over-voltages. If the overvoltage condition is small a relatively long DTL time delay can be used. If the overvoltage is more severe then another element, set at a higher pickup level and with a shorter DTL can be used to isolate the circuit more quickly. Alternatively, elements can be set to provide alarm and tripping stages, with the alarm levels set lower than the tripping stages. The use of DTL settings allows a grading system to be applied to co-ordinate the network design, the regulating plant design, system plant insulation withstand and with other overvoltage relays elsewhere on the system. The DTL also prevents operation during transient disturbances. The use of IDMTL protection is not recommended because of the difficulty of choosing settings to ensure correct co-ordination and security of supply. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 35 of 64 2.10 Neutral Overvoltage (59N) Neutral Overvoltage Displacement (Residual Overvoltage) protection is used to detect an earth fault where little or no earth current flows. This can occur where a transformer feeder has been tripped at its HV side for an earth fault, but the circuit is still energised from the LV side via an unearthed transformer winding. Insufficient earth current would be present to cause a trip, but residual voltage would increase significantly; reaching up to 3-times the normal phase-earth voltage level. If Neutral Overvoltage protection is used, it must be suitably time graded with other protections in order to prevent unwanted tripping for external system earth faults. EHV/HV HV/MV Transformer Feeder HV CB OC/EF HV CB Tripped by local protection MV CB Earth fault NVD MV CB tripped by: 1) Feeder unit protection or 2) Intertrip from HV feeder protection or 3) NVD protection Figure 2-20 NVD Application Typically NVD protection measures the residual voltage (3V 0 ) directly from an open delta VT or from capacitor cones - see fig. 2.13-2 below. VT with Open Delta Secondary Capacitor Cone Unit Capacitor Cone Adaptor Unit 3Vo Relay 3Vo Relay Figure 2-21 NVD Protection Connections 2.10.1 Application with Capacitor Cone Units Capacitor cones provide a cost effective method of deriving residual voltage. The wide range of capacitor cone component values used by different manufacturer's means that the relay cannot be connected directly to the cones. The external adaptor unit contains parallel switched capacitors that enable a wide range of values to be selected using a DIL switch and hence the Capacitor Cone output can be scaled to the standard relay input range. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 36 of 64 2.11 Under/Over Frequency (81) During normal system operation the frequency will continuously vary over a relatively small range due to the changing generation/load balance. Excessive frequency variation may occur for: Loss of generating capacity, or loss of mains supply (under-frequency): If the governors and other regulating equipment cannot respond to correct the balance, a sustained under-frequency condition may lead to a system collapse. Loss of load - excess generation (over-frequency): The generator speeds will increase causing a proportional frequency rise. This may be unacceptable to industrial loads, for example, where the running speeds of synchronous motors will be affected. In the situation where the system frequency is falling rapidly it is common practise to disconnect non-essential loads until the generation-load balance can be restored. Usually, automatic load shedding, based on underfrequency is implemented. Under-frequency relays are usually installed on the transformer incomers of distribution or industrial substations as this provides a convenient position from which to monitor the busbar frequency. Loads are disconnected (shed) from the busbar in stages until the frequency stabilises and returns to an acceptable level. The 7SR24 has six under/over frequency elements (optional). An example scheme may have the first load shedding stage set just below the nominal frequency, e.g. between 49.0 - 49.5Hz. A time delay element would be associated with this to allow for transient dips in frequency and to provide a time for the system regulating equipment to respond. If the first load shedding stage disconnects sufficient plant the frequency will stabilise and perhaps return to nominal. If, however, this is not sufficient then a second load shedding stage, set at a lower frequency, will shed further loads until the overload is relieved. This process will continue until all stages have operated. In the event of the load shedding being unsuccessful, a final stage of under-frequency protection should be provided to totally isolate all loads before plant is damaged, e.g. due to overfluxing. An alternative type of load shedding scheme would be to set all under-frequency stages to about the same frequency setting but to have different length time delays set on each stage. If after the first stage is shed the frequency doesn't recover then subsequent stages will shed after longer time delays have elapsed. Network Incomer STAGE 1: Least important STAGE 2 STAGE 3 STAGE 4 Generator G59 300/5 STAGE 5 STAGE 6 5 1 2 6 5 3 4 2 4 Essential Load Figure 2-22 Load Shedding Scheme Using Under-Frequency Elements (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 37 of 64 2.12 Over Fluxing Protection (24) An under-frequency condition at nominal voltage can cause over-fluxing (or over-excitation) of the transformer. Excess flux can cause transformer core saturation and some of the flux will radiate as leakage flux through the 2 transformer tank. This leakage flux causes eddy currents and the I R losses from these currents heat the transformer tank and can cause overheating. Overfluxing protection is applied to generator step-up transformers and other plant which may be subject to this condition. This function measures the ratio of voltage to frequency (V/f) applied the transformer to determine operation. The relay has two types of V/f characteristics: * User Definable Inverse curve * Two Independent Definite Time Lag elements(DTL) User Definable V/f Curve As the leakage flux will cause overheating, an inverse type curve provides an appropriate match to the over fluxing withstand characteristics of a transformer. The relay includes a user definable curve. Where the transformer manufacturer has provided an over-fluxing withstand curve the user can define up to seven points to provide correlation between the relay characteristic and transformer withstand curves. Y0 X0, Y0 point defines curve pick-up X Y (secs) X Straight-line between points X X X6, Y6 point defines curve cut-off X X Y6 X0 X X6 X - (V/f) Two Stage DTL Over fluxing In addition to the inverse curve, two independent DTL V/f elements are included and are used where the over excitation withstand curve of the transformer is not known. In this case the inverse V/f curve should be set to [Disabled] and both DTL elements should be set to [Enabled]. The default DTL settings are adequate to protect almost all transformer designs, and can be used with confidence. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 38 of 64 Section 3: CT Requirements The specification of CTs must meet the requirements of all protection functions utilised e.g. overall differential, REF and backup over current protections. The relay has 1A and 5A rated terminals for each CT input and any combination of these may be used. 1A rated CTs can be used on one winding and together with 5A rated CTs on the other. 3.1 CT Requirement for Differential Protection The quality of CTs will affect the performance of the protection system. The CT knee-point voltage (V k ) is a factor in assessing protection performance. If a high level internal short circuit occurs the dc offset in the primary fault current may produce transient CT saturation. This is more likely to occur if the CT knee-point is low and/or the connected burden is high. Saturated CTs produce high levels of even harmonics which may increase the operate time of the biased differential function where harmonic restraint or inhibit is applied. A highset differential element (87HS) can be used without harmonic restraint this can reduce the overall operating time of the differential protection. Restricted Earth Fault protection helps ensure fast tripping as its speed of operation is not affected significantly by CT saturation. For high speed operation: Vk 4 x I FS x (R CT + R L ) Where: Vk = CT knee point voltage. I FS = Max. secondary 3-phase through fault current (as limited by the transformer impedance). R CT = Secondary winding resistance of each star connected CT. R L = The CT secondary loop lead resistance. Where the CTs used have a lower knee point voltage e.g. half that calculated in the expression above the biased differential elements may have a slightly longer operate time. To ensure stability during through fault conditions the biased differential settings should be increased by 10%. Advice on CT Selection. 1A rated CT secondaries are preferred to 5A CTs as the CT VA burden is reduced by a factor of 25. Line current transformer ratios should be selected to match the main transformer rating and ratio. However the ICT Multiplier adjustment can be used to compensate for non matched ratios. Choose a CT ratio that produces at least 0.33 x nominal secondary rating, when based on the transformer is at nameplate rating i.e. within the range of the ICT Multiplier setting. Where long secondary lead lengths are required measures can be taken to reduce the burden imposed on the CTs: Use high CT ratios to reduce the secondary current. Compensate the low secondary current using the ICT Multipliers.. Parallel CT secondary cable cores to reduce lead resistance. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 39 of 64 Worked Example 90MVA, Z = 14%, Yd11, 132/33kV +10% to -20% CT Specification VK = 250V T= 1/400 RCT = 3.5 Ohms 400/1 1600/1 Y RL = C = 1 Ohm d CT Specification VK = 750V T= 1/1600 RCT = 12 Ohms RL = C = 4 Ohm Figure 3-1 CT Requirements Suitability of HV Current Transformers: VK 4 x 90 x 10 6 3 x 132 x 10 3 x 400 x 0.14 x (3.5 + 1) = 126.5V i.e. less than 250V Suitability of LV Current Transformers: VK 4 x 90 x 10 6 3 x 33 x 10 3 x1600 x 0.14 x (12 + 4) = 449.9V i.e. less than 750V An indication of the suitability of a protection class CT e.g. class 5P to IEC60044 classification can be obtained. The product of its rated burden expressed in ohms and the secondary current equivalent of its accuracy limit primary current will give an approximation of the secondary voltage it can produce while operating within the limit of its stated composite error. 3.2 CT Requirements for High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault (64H) For high impedance REF protection: It is recommended that low reactance CTs conforming to IEC61869-2 Class PX are used. Class PX CTs have a specified excitation characteristic and secondary winding resistance and these parameters are used to calculate the performance of the protection in terms of primary operate current for internal faults and stability during through fault conditions. All current transformers should have an equal turns ratio. The knee-point voltage of the CTs must be greater than 2 x 64H Setting Voltage (Vs) - see section 2.4. A full explanation of how to specify CTs for use with REF protection, and set REF relays is available on our Website: www.siemens.com/energy . (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 40 of 64 Section 4: Control Functions 4.1 4.1.1 User Defined Logic Auto-Changeover Scheme Example INCOMER 1 INCOMER 2 Start On-Load Change-over Start On-Load Change-over BO3 BI 1 CB1 CB2 VT1 CB1 OPEN VT2 V1 Vx Busbar 1 Busbar 2 CB3 LOADS LOADS Figure 4-1 Example Use of Quick Logic The MV installation illustrated above is fed from two incomers. To limit the substation fault level the busbar is run with CB3 open. When a fault occurs on one of the incomers it is isolated by the circuit protection. To re-supply the disconnected loads from the remaining incomer CB3 is closed. If the line fault occurs on incomer 1 it must be confirmed that CB 1 has opened before CB3 can be closed. The relay on incomer 1 confirms that a trip has been issued to CB1 (e.g. Binary Output 2), that CB 1 has opened (e.g. Binary Input 1) and that no current flows in the circuit (e.g. 37-1 = Virtual 1): Incomer 1 Relay is Configured: CB1 Open auxiliary switch wired to B.I. 1 Trip output to CB1 = B.O. 2 OUTPUT CONFIG>OUTPUT MATRIX: 37-1 = V1 OUTPUT CONFIG>OUTPUT MATRIX: E1 = BO3 CONTROL & LOGIC>QUICK LOGIC: E1 = O2.I1.V1 The output from Incomer 1 (BO3) relay is input to the relay on CB 3 (Binary Input 1). A panel switch may be used to enable the On-Load Change-over scheme (Binary Input 2). Before Closing CB3 a check may be made that there is no voltage on busbar 1 (27/59-1 = Virtual 1). CB 3 is closed from Binary Output 3. CB3 Relay is Configured: Panel switch (ON-Load Change-over Enabled) wired to B.I. 1 OUTPUT CONFIG>OUTPUT MATRIX: 27/59-1 = V1 OUTPUT CONFIG>OUTPUT MATRIX: E1 = BO3 CONTROL & LOGIC>QUICK LOGIC: E1 = I1.I2.V1 If required a time delay can be added to the output using the CONTROL & LOGIC > QUICK LOGIC: E1 Pickup Delay setting. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 41 of 64 (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 42 of 64 Section 5: Supervision Functions 5.1 Inrush Detector (81HBL2) 87 Inrush Element (Enable, Disable) When a transformer is energized transient magnetizing inrush currents flow in each phase of the energised winding. Inrush currents only flow into one transformer winding and the resulting unbalance can be sufficient to cause mal-operation of the biased differential elements. To prevent the relay operating for this non-fault condition, the presence of even harmonics in the current is used to distinguish between inrush currents and short circuit faults. The inrush restraint detector can be used to block the operation of selected elements during transformer magnetising inrush conditions. The 81HBL2 Bias setting allows the user to select between, Phase, Sum and Cross methods of measurement. Each of the three selections has a specific application. Phase - The even harmonic content in each phase is measured independently and compared to the total operate current in its own phase i.e. each phase of the biased differential elements is blocked by even harmonic content in its own phase only. This method is used: Where large transformers are manufactured with three separate phase tanks each containing a phase core. This construction facilitates transportation. Each of the phase cores is not magnetically affected by the flux in the other phase cores. These large single phase transformers are often auto-transformers used on EHV transmission systems. A typical setting level for this application is 18% of Id. Both ICT settings are selected to Yy e.g. reactor, motor, generator applications. Cross - Each phase is monitored and if the even harmonic present in any phase exceeds the setting then all three phases are blocked. This method is used for the majority of applications of the relay to power transformers. Generally the default setting of 0.20 x Id provides stable operation. Sum - The level of even harmonic current (2nd and 4th) in the differential signal for each phase is measured. The square root is taken of each of these even harmonic currents and these three values summated. This single current level is then divided by the Inrush Setting to arrive at the Harmonic Sum with which each of the phase currents are compared. If the operate current in any phase is greater than this Harmonic Sum then its differential element will operate. The advantage of this method is it allows fast operation of the biased differential element if the transformer is switched onto an internal phase to earth fault. The cross method may suffer from slowed operation for this situation, as healthy phase inrush may block all three phases (including the one feeding the fault current) from operating. Where REF is used to protect the winding, the slowed operation is not critical as the REF will operate very fast, typically in about 20ms for this rare condition. The Sum method is not slowed down when switching onto an in zone earth fault, as the Harmonic Sum is reduced by the presence of the fault current and therefore allows relay operation. Typically the Sum method will allow the biased differential elements to operate in the normal time of about 30ms, if a transformer earth fault occurs when it is energised. This setting is recommended if REF is not used to protect the windings for earth faults on effectively earthed power systems. The recommended setting that offers a good compromise between stability for typical inrush currents and fast operation for internal faults is 0.15 x Id. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 43 of 64 87 Inrush Setting (0.1 to 0.5 x Id) This defines the levels of inrush used in each of the above methods. The setting applied will determine the level of even harmonic (second and fourth) content in the relay operating current that will cause operation of the relay to be inhibited. The lowest setting of 0.1 x Id therefore represents the setting that provides the most stability under magnetising inrush conditions. The recommended settings for each method are: Phase - 0.18 x Id Cross - 0.20 x Id Sum - 0.15 x Id These setting provide a good compromise between speed of operation for internal faults and stability for inrush current. Generally the above values will be stable for most cases, but in rare cases may not prevent relay operation for all angles of point on wave switching, and the setting may require being lower slightly. If the relay operates when the transformer is energised, the waveform record should be examined for signs of fault current and the levels of harmonic current. Set to 0.20 x Id unless a very rare false operation for inrush occurs. In which case a lower setting should be adopted after checking the waveform record for the presence of fault current. 5.2 Overfluxing Detector (81HBL5) An increase in transformer or decrease in system frequency may result in the transformer becoming over-excited. The 81HBL5 element can be used to prevent protection operation e.g. prevent differential protection operation during acceptable over-excitation conditions. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 44 of 64 5.3 Circuit Breaker Fail (50BF) Where a circuit breaker fails to operate to clear fault current the power system will remain in a hazardous state until the fault is cleared by remote or back-up protections. To minimise any delay, CB Failure protection provides a signal to either re-trip the local CB or back-trip the next `upstream' CB. HV 50 BF CB1 7SR24 CB2 50 BF LV Figure 5-1 - Circuit Breaker Fail The CBF function is initiated by the operation of either: Protection functions that operate binary outputs mapped as OUTPUT CONFIG>BINARY OUTPUT CONFIG>CBn Trip Contacts, or A binary input mapped as INPUT CONFIG>INPUT MATRIX >C50BF-n Ext Trip Each 50BF uses phase segregated current check elements and two timers. Current in each phase is monitored and if any of the 50BF current check elements have not reset before the timers have expired an output is given. Typically a single stage scheme is used, DTL1 is wired to back-trip the adjacent CBs e.g. via the busbar protection system. Alternatively the first timer output can be wired to re-trip the failed CB through a different trip coil, and the second timer output is wired to trip the adjacent CBs. Practical time sequences for single and two stage 50BF applications are illustrated below. Relay Operation and CBF Timer Started System Fault Main Trip Relay Operation 20 40 Backtrip Trip Relay Reset of CBF elements does not occur Backtrip Operation Failure of CB to trip 60 80 CB Backtrip Sucessful 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 340 ms from fault occuring CB Operate Time Stage 1 CBF Timer (Backtrip) = 120ms Figure 5-2 - Single Stage Circuit Breaker Fail Timing (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 45 of 64 Relay Operation and CBF Timer Started System Fault Backtrip Trip Relay Operation CBF Retrip Trip Relay Main Trip Relay Operation 40 CB's Fails to Trip 60 80 No Reset of CBF elements No Reset of CBF elements CBF Retrip Operation 120 140 160 180 200 220 Reset of CBF elements CBF Back trip Operation Failed CB Retrip Operation 100 Operation of all BB CB's 240 260 280 300 320 340 360 ms from occuri CB Operate Time Stage 1 CBF Timer (Retrip) = 120ms Stage 2 CBF Timer (Backtrip) = 250ms Figure 5-3 - Two Stage Circuit Breaker Fail Timing Example of Required Settings (e.g. HV CB) FUNCTION CONFIG> Gn CB Fail Enabled SUPERVISION > CB FAIL > 50BF-1 Gn 50BF-1 Element Gn 50BF-1 Setting Gn 50BF-1-1 Delay Gn 50BF-1-2 Delay Enabled 0.2 x In 120ms 250ms INPUT CONFIG>INPUT MATRIX> 50BF-1 Ext Trip BIn OUTPUT CONFIG>OUTPUT MATRIX> 50BF-1-1 50BF-1-2 BOn, Ln BOn, Ln OUTPUT CONFIG>BINARY OUTPUT CONFIG> CB1 Trip Contacts BOn The above based on: First Stage Backtrip (or Re-trip) Trip Relay operate time CB Tripping time DUOBIAS-M Reset Time Safety Margin Overall First Stage CBF Time Delay Typical Times 10ms 50ms 30ms 30ms 120ms Second Stage (Back Trip) First CBF Time Delay Trip Relay operate time DUOBIAS-M Reset Time CB Tripping time Margin Overall Second Stage CBF Time Delay 120ms 10ms 30ms 50ms 50ms 260ms (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 46 of 64 5.4 Trip Circuit Supervision (74TCS) Binary Inputs may be used to monitor the integrity of the CB trip circuit wiring. Current flows through the B.I. confirming the integrity of the auxiliary supply, CB trip coil, auxiliary switch, C.B. secondary isolating contacts and associated wiring connected to that BI. If the current flow ceases, the B.I. drops off and if it is user programmed to operate one of the output relays, this can be used to provide an alarm. In addition, an LED on the relay fascia can be programmed to operate. A user text label can be used to define the operated LED e.g. "Trip CCT Fail". The relevant Binary Input is mapped to 74TCS-n in the INPUT CONFIG>INPUT MATRIX menu. To avoid giving spurious alarm messages while the circuit breaker is operating the input is given a 0.4s Drop-off Delay in the INPUT CONFIG>BINARY INPUT CONFIG menu. To provide an alarm output a normally open binary output is mapped to 74TCS-n. 5.4.1 Trip Circuit Supervision Connections The following circuits are derived from UK ENA S15 standard schemes H5, H6 and H7. For compliance with this standard: Where more than one device is used to trip the CB then connections should be looped between the tripping contacts. To ensure that all wiring is monitored the binary input must be at the end of the looped wiring. Resistors must be continuously rated and where possible should be of wire-wound construction. Scheme 1 (Basic) + 52a - Circuit Breaker R BO TRIP COIL 52b TRIP CCT n FAIL R BI +ve -ve BO 1 BO n 7SR24 Figure 5-4: Remote Alarm H5 Scheme Notes: BI = 19V (30, 48, 110, 220V supply) BI = 88V (110, 220V supply) R = 3K3 typical Trip Circuit Supervision Scheme 1 (H5) Scheme 1 provides full Trip and Close supervision with the circuit breaker Open or Closed. Where a `Hand Reset' Trip contact is used measures must be taken to inhibit alarm indications after a CB trip. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 47 of 64 Scheme 2 (Intermediate) + 52a TRIP COIL - 52a Circuit Breaker BO 52b TRIP CCT n FAIL R BI +ve -ve BO 1 BO n 7SR24 Figure 5-5: Remote Alarm H6 Scheme Notes: BI = 19V (30, 48, 110, 220V supply) BI = 88V (110, 220V supply) R = 3K3 typical Trip Circuit Supervision Scheme 2 (H6) Scheme 2 provides continuous Trip Circuit Supervision of trip coil with the circuit breaker Open or Closed. It does not provide pre-closing supervision of the connections and links between the tripping contacts and the circuit breaker and may not therefore be suitable for some circuits which include an isolating link. Scheme 3 (Comprehensive) - 19V Binary Input Only + 52a TRIP COIL - Circuit Breaker BO 52b TRIP CCT n FAIL R BI +ve R -ve BI +ve H7 Scheme Notes: BI = 19V (48, 110, 220V supply) R = 3K3 typical -ve BO 1 BO n 7SR24 Figure 5-6: Remote Alarm Trip Circuit Supervision Scheme 3 (H7) Scheme 3 provides full Trip and Close supervision with the circuit breaker Open or Closed. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 48 of 64 5.4.2 Close Circuit Supervision Connections BO + 52a CLOSE COIL - CLOSE CCT n FAIL R BI +ve Circuit Breaker R -ve 52b BO 1 BO n 7SR24 Figure 5-7 Remote Alarm H5 Scheme Notes: BI = 19V (30, 48, 110, 220V supply) BI = 88V (110, 220V supply) R = 3K3 typical Close Circuit Supervision Scheme Close circuit supervision with the circuit breaker Open or Closed. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 49 of 64 (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 50 of 64 Section 6: Application Considerations and Examples 6.1 The Effects of An In Zone Earthing Transformer The in zone earthing transformer is a source of zero-sequence fault current. An earth fault on the delta side of the transformer external to the differential protection zone will cause zero sequence currents to flow in the CTs on the delta side of the transformer without corresponding current to flow in the line CTs on the star side of the transformer. If these zero sequence currents are allowed to flow through the differential elements they may cause undesired tripping. Yd11 (30o) ICT Multiplier ICT Connection Yd11 (30o) Yy0 (0o) B B B 87T 87HS A B B C O O O O O O Figure 6-1: Relay Currents - External Earth Fault with In Zone Earthing Transformer To prevent undesired tripping the ICT connections should be such as to cause the zero sequence currents to flow in a closed delta CT secondary connection of low impedance instead of in the differential relay operating coil. As we have already corrected for the transformer vector group on the star side a Ydy0 ICT is used on the delta side winding. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 51 of 64 Yd11 (30o) ICT Multiplier Ydy0 (0o) Yd11 (30o) ICT Connection B A B B B C B B B 87T 87HS Figure 6-2: Relay Currents - External Earth Fault with In Zone Earthing Transformer W1/W2 Yd11 (30o) 1 A 2 W1 IL1 2 6 6 5 10 W1 IL3 13 5 W2 IL2 W1 IL2 9 B 1 W2 IL1 14 IG1 ICT1 = Yd11 10 9 W2 IL3 18 A 17 IG2 ICT2 = Ydy0 NOTES CTs shown wired to 1A relay inputs Figure 6-3 7SR24 Applied to Yd Transformer with an In Zone Earthing Transformer (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 52 of 64 6.2 Protection of Star/Star Transformer With Tertiary Winding Yndyn0 (0o) 1 A 2 W1 IL1 2 6 6 5 W1 IL2 9 5 W2 IL2 10 W1 IL3 13 B 1 W2 IL1 14 IG1 ICT1 = Yd11 10 9 W2 IL3 A 18 17 IG2 ICT2 = Yd11 Figure 6-4: Protection of Star/Star Transformer with Tertiary The provision of the tertiary winding in star/star transformers both stabilises the neutral potential and can allow earth fault current to flow in the secondary connections i.e. reduces the zero sequence impedance. An earth fault on the LV side of the transformer external to the differential protection zone will cause zero sequence currents to flow in the CTs on the LV side without corresponding current to flow in the line CTs on the HV side. If these zero sequence currents are allowed to flow through the differential elements they may cause undesired tripping. The transformer has a phase shift of zero. To prevent undesired tripping for external faults a zero sequence shunt is required, this is implemented by selecting star/delta interposing CT settings. The Interposing CT Connection setting on all sets of current inputs must be set to the same Yd setting e.g. all Yd1, -30 or all Yd11, 30. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 53 of 64 6.3 Transformer with Primary Connections Crossed on Both Windings 0 Yd11 Transformer Connected as Yd9 (90 ) The phase-shift between the W1 and W2 primary systems may necessitate that primary connections to each winding of the transformer have to be crossed. Fig. 6.4-1 shows a typical arrangement where a Yd11 transformer is arranged to give a primary system phase-shift of 90 by crossing of its main connections. There are two optional methods of configuring the 7SR24 relay. Solution 1 Figure 6-5 shows W1 and W2 CT secondary wiring crossed over to replicating the crossovers on the transformer primary connections: A C b A-N = b-c B-N = c-a C-N = a-b B a c W1/W2 Yd11 (30o) A B C a b c 1 A 2 W1 IL1 2 6 6 5 10 W1 IL3 13 5 W2 IL2 W1 IL2 9 B 1 W2 IL1 14 IG1 ICT1 = Yd11 10 9 W2 IL3 18 A 17 IG2 ICT2 = Ydy0 NOTES CTs shown wired to 1A relay inputs 0 Figure 6-5 - AC Connections: Yd9, 90 Transformer - Non-standard Secondary Connections Notes: An advantage of the above is that the 7SR24 relay can be set to correspond to the vector group shown on the main transformer rating plate i.e. Yd11, +30 simplifying installation. This approach is also applicable where the transformer is used to reverse the system phase sequence - see section 6.5. A disadvantage is that `non-standard' secondary wiring connections are used. Relay instruments will indicate 'transformer' quantities rather than system quantities. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 54 of 64 Solution 2 Fig. 6-6 shows use of the ICT Connection settings to correct for the phase shift introduced by the transformer connection i.e. ICT1 Connection is set to Yd9, -90 and ICT2 Connection is set to Ydy0, 0. A C b A-N = b-c B-N = c-a C-N = a-b B a c W1/W2 Yd11 (30o) A B C a b c 1 A 2 W1 IL1 2 6 6 5 10 W1 IL3 13 5 W2 IL2 W1 IL2 9 B 1 W2 IL1 14 IG1 ICT1 = Yd9 10 9 W2 IL3 18 A 17 IG2 ICT2 = Ydy0 NOTES CTs shown wired to 1A relay inputs 0 Fig. 6-6 AC Connections: Yd9, 90 Transformer - Standard Secondary Connections Notes: An advantage of the approach above is that `standard' secondary wiring connections are used. The 7SR24 relay setting correspond to the power system vector relationship i.e. Yd9, 90. Relay instruments will indicate 'system' quantities rather than transformer quantities. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 55 of 64 6.4 Transformer with Primary Connections Crossed on One Winding Reversing the connections on only one side of the transformer will reverse the phase sequence of the system. For this arrangement W1 and W2 CT secondary wiring must be crossed over to replicate the crossovers on the transformer primary connections - see Fig. 6-7. A C A-B = b-n B-C = a-n C-A = c-n b a c B Dyn11 1 A 2 W1 IL1 2 6 6 5 B 1 W2 IL1 5 W2 IL2 W1 IL2 IG1 9 W2 IL3 18 A 17 IG2 ICT1 = Yy0 ICT2 = Yd1 9 10 W1 IL3 13 NOTE: CTs shown wired to 1A relay inputs 14 10 Fig. 6-7 Dyn11 Transformer with Reverse Phase Notation Notes: The 7SR24 relay is set to correspond to the vector group shown on the main transformer rating plate i.e. Dy11, +30. Relay instruments will indicate 'transformer' quantities rather than system quantities. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 56 of 64 6.5 Protection of Auto Transformers The transformer has a phase shift of zero. To prevent undesired tripping of the overall differential protection for external faults a zero sequence shunt is required, this is implemented by selecting ICT Connection setting on both sets of CT inputs to Ydy0. The inrush inhibit (81HBL2) must be Enabled as the magnetising inrush currents in each phase will not balance. ICT2 = Ydy0 ICT1 = Ydy0 1 A 2 W1 IL1 2 6 6 5 10 9 W2 IL3 18 A 17 IG2 10 W1 IL3 13 5 W2 IL2 W1 IL2 9 B 1 W2 IL1 14 IG1 Fig. 6-8: AC Connections for Auto-Transformer Overall Protection ICT1 = Ydy0 1 ICT2 = Ydy0 A 2 W1 IL1 2 6 6 5 10 W1 IL3 14 13 IG1 5 W2 IL2 W1 IL2 9 B 1 W2 IL1 10 9 W2 IL3 18 A 17 IG2 Fig. 6-9: AC Connections for Auto-Transformer Overall and REF Protection (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 57 of 64 6.6 Reactor, Motor and Connections Protection 1 A 2 W1 IL1 2 6 6 5 W1 IL2 9 5 W2 IL2 10 W1 IL3 13 B 1 W2 IL1 14 IG1 ICT1 = Yy0 10 9 W2 IL3 18 A 17 IG2 ICT2 = Yy0 Fig. 6-10 AC Connections for Reactor and Connections Protection Settings must take into consideration: Connections: High internal and through fault currents. Series reactor: Through fault current limited by reactor. Shunt reactor: Single end fed faults only. Motor: Single end fed faults only. Generator: Single end fed faults only. Primary current values are not subject to variation due to tap changing (as in transformer / OLTC applications), st the 87BD and 87BD 1 Bias Slope can both be set to 0.1. The inrush inhibit feature (81HBL2) must be enabled as the magnetising inrush currents in each phase will not balance. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 58 of 64 Section 7: Common Functions 7.1 Multiple Settings Groups Alternate settings groups can be used to reconfigure the relay during significant changes to system conditions e.g. Primary plant switching in/out. Summer/winter or day/night settings. Switchable earthing connections. Allowable short term overloads. Loss of Grid connection (see below) Start generators Trip non-essential loads Local Generation Industrial system draws power from grid system during normal operation Select alternate settings group Relays normally use settings group 1 On loss of mains: Local generation switched in. Non essential loads tripped Relays on essential circuits switched to settings group 2 to reflect new load and fault currents RADIAL SUBSTATION Non-essential loads Figure 7-1 Example Use of Alternative Settings Groups (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 59 of 64 7.2 Binary Inputs Each Binary Input (BI) can be programmed to operate one or more of the relay functions, LEDs or output relays. These could be used to bring such digital signals as Inhibits for protection elements, the trip circuit supervision status, autoreclose control signals etc. into the Relay. Alarm and Tripping Inputs A common use of binary inputs is to provide indication of alarm or fault conditions e.g. transformer Buchholz Gas or Buchholz Surge conditions. The Binary Inputs can be mapped to LED(s), waveform storage trigger and binary outputs. The inputs can also be mapped as `General Alarms' - this allows user defined text to be displayed on the LCD when the BI is energised. Inputs used in this way are programmed using: INPUT CONFIG>INPUT MATRIX>General Alarm n - Assigned to BI. INPUT CONFIG>GENERAL ALARMS>General Alarm n - 16 character string. Where transformer outputs require high speed tripping, such as a Buchholz Surge, these should be wired to a binary input to provide LED indication and also have a parallel connection wired to directly trip the circuit via a blocking diode, see Figure 7-2: - + RELAY Buchholz Gas BO n +ve -ve BI n BO n Buchholz Surge BO n +ve -ve BI n BO n Wdg. Temp Alarm BO n +ve -ve BI n BO n BO n Wdg. Temp Trip BO n +ve -ve BI n Oil Temp Alarm +ve -ve BI n Oil Temp Trip +ve -ve POWER TRANSFORMER BI n Blocking Diodes TRIP CIRCUIT Figure 7-2 Example of Transformer Alarm and Trip Wiring (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 60 of 64 The Effects of Capacitance Current The binary inputs have a low minimum operate current and may be set for instantaneous operation. Consideration should be given to the likelihood of mal-operation due to capacitance current. Capacitance current can flow through the BI, for example if an earth fault occurs on the dc circuits associated with the relay. The binary inputs will be less likely to mal-operate if they: 1 Have both the positive and negative switched (double-pole switched). 2 Do not have extensive external wiring associated with them e.g. if the wiring is confined to the relay room. Where a binary input is both used to influence a control function (e.g. provide a tripping function) and it is considered to be susceptible to mal-operation the external circuitry can be modified to provide immunity to such disturbances, see Figure 7-3. AC Rejection The default pick-up time delay of 20ms provides immunity to ac current e.g. induced from cross site wiring. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 61 of 64 ESI-1 + 470 + ESI-2 30V DC Nominal (24 - 37.5V Operative) IOP > 10mA 220 30V DC Nominal (24 - 37.5V Operative) IOP > 20mA BI (19V) 1K5 BI (19V) 820 - + 1K6 - + 48V DC Nominal (37.5 - 60V Operative) IOP > 10mA 820 48V DC Nominal (37.5 - 60V Operative) IOP > 20mA BI (19V) BI (19V) 820 1K5 - - BI DTL = 10ms (10F, 60V Capacitance discharge) + 2K0 110V DC Nominal (87.5 - 137.5V Operative) IOP > 25mA + 110V DC Nominal (87.5 - 137.5V Operative) IOP > 50mA 1K2 BI (19V) 560 BI (19V) 330 - - BI DTL = 10ms (10F, 150V Capacitance discharge) + 110V DC Nominal (87.5 - 137.5V Operative) IOP > 25mA + 110V DC Nominal (87.5 - 137.5V Operative) IOP > 50mA BI (88V) BI (88V) 1K3 2K7 - - BI DTL = 10ms (10F, 150V Capacitance discharge) Resistor power ratings: 30V DC Nominal 48V DC Nominal 110V DC Nominal 110V DC Nominal >3W >3W >10W (ESI- 1) >20W (ESI-2) Resistors must be wired with crimped connections as they may run hot Figure 7-3 - Binary Input Configurations Providing Compliance with EATS 48-4 Classes ESI 1 and ESI 2 (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 62 of 64 7.3 Binary Outputs Binary Outputs are mapped to output functions by means of settings. These could be used to bring out such digital signals as trips, a general pick-up, plant control signals etc. All Binary Outputs are trip rated Each can be defined as Self or Hand Reset. Self-reset contacts are applicable to most protection applications. Hand-reset contacts are used where the output must remain active until the user expressly clears it e.g. in a control scheme where the output must remain active until some external feature has correctly processed it. Case contacts C25 and C26 will automatically short-circuit when the relay is withdrawn from the case. This can be used to provide an alarm that the Relay is out of service. Notes on Self Reset Outputs With a failed breaker condition the relay may remain operated until current flow in the primary system is interrupted by an upstream device. The relay will then reset and attempt to interrupt trip coil current flowing through an output contact. Where this level is above the break rating of the output contact an auxiliary relay with heavy-duty contacts should be utilised. 7.4 LEDS Output-function LEDs are mapped to output functions by means of settings. These could be used to display such digital signals as trips, a general pick-up, plant control signals etc. User Defined Function LEDs are used to indicate the status of Function Key operation. These do not relate directly to the operation of the Function Key but rather to its consequences. So that if a Function Key is depressed to close a Circuit-Breaker, the associated LED would show the status of the Circuit-Breaker closed Binary Input. Each LED can be defined as Self or Hand Reset. Hand reset LEDs are used where the user is required to expressly acknowledge the change in status e.g. critical operations such as trips or system failures. Self-reset LEDs are used to display features which routinely change state, such as Circuit-Breaker open or close. The status of hand reset LEDs is retained in capacitor-backed memory in the event of supply loss. (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 63 of 64 (c)2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 64 of 64 Published by and copyright (c) 2014: Siemens AG Infrastructure & Cities Sector Freyeslebenstrasse 1 91058 Erlangen, Germany Siemens Protection Devices Limited P.O. Box 8 North Farm Road Hebburn Tyne & Wear NE31 1TZ United Kingdom Phone: +44 (0)191 401 7901 Fax: +44 (0)191 401 5575 www.siemens.com/energy For more information, please contact our Customer Support Center. Phone: +49 180/524 8437 Fax: +49 180/524 24 71 E-mail: support.energy@siemens.com August 17 All rights reserved. Trademarks mentioned in this document are the property of Siemens AG, its affiliates, or their respective owners. Subject to change without prior notice. The information in this document contains general descriptions of the technical options available, which may not apply in all cases. The required technical options should therefore be specified in the contract. www. siemens.com/energy Siemens Protection Devices Limited 2